2018 Sprinter Operators Manual

Sprinter
Operating Instructions
É9065843213FËÍ
9065843213
Sprinter
Order no. 64627567 13 Part no. 906 584 32 13 Edition 07-17

Mercedes-Benz
Symbols Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. Publication details
G WARNING 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Internet
Warning notes make you aware of dangers Toronto, ON M4G 4C9
which could pose a threat to your health or www.mercedes-benz.ca Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-
life, or to the health and life of others. Customer Relations Department: cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the
following websites:
1-800-387-0100
http://www.mercedes-benz.com
H Environmental note
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
Environmental notes provide you with infor- Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and Mercedes-Benz
Canada Inc. are Daimler companies. http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
mation on environmentally aware actions or
disposal. Canada only: "Authorized Sprinter Dealer" is
defined as an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Sprinter Dealer. Editorial office
! Notes on material damage alert you to dan-
gers that could lead to damage to your vehi-
cle. You are welcome to forward any queries or sug-
gestions you may have regarding this Operating
i These symbols indicate useful instructions Instructions to the technical documentation
or further information that could be helpful to team at the address on the inside of the front
you. cover.
X This symbol designates an instruc- Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
tion you must follow. Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
X Several consecutive symbols indi- Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and Mercedes-Benz
cate an instruction with several Canada Inc. are Daimler companies.
steps. Not to be reprinted, translated, or otherwise
(Y page) This symbol tells you where you can reproduced, in whole or in part, without written
find further information on a topic. permission.
YY This symbol indicates a warning or an
instruction that is continued on the
next page. Vehicle manufacturer
Display This text indicates a message on the
display. Daimler AG
Mercedesstra e 137
70327 Stuttgart
Registered trademarks
Germany
ESP® is a registered trademark of Daimler AG.
Vehicle distributor
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
www.mbusa.com
www.mbsprinterusa.com
Customer Assistance Center:
1-877-762-8267
As at 21 February 2017
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
Before you first drive off, read the Operating
Instructions carefully and familiarize yourself
with your vehicle. Please adhere to the informa-
tion and warning notes in this Operating Instruc-
tions for your own safety and to ensure a longer
operating duration of the vehicle. Failure to
observe the instructions may lead to damage to
the vehicle or personal injury.
Vehicle damage caused by a failure to observe
the instructions is not covered by the New Vehi-
cle Limited Warranty.
The equipment or model designation of your
vehicle may differ according to:
RModel
ROrder
RCountry specification
RAvailability
The illustrations in this Operating Instructions
show a left-hand-drive vehicle. The location of
vehicle parts and controls for right-hand drive
vehicles differ accordingly.
Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its vehi-
cles to the state of the art.
Mercedes-Benz reserves the right to introduce
changes in:
RDesign
REquipment
RTechnology
Therefore, the descriptions provided may occa-
sionally differ from your own vehicle.
The following are integral parts of the vehicle:
ROperating Instructions
RMaintenance or Service Booklet
RService and warranty information
REquipment-dependent operating instructions
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all
times. Should you sell the vehicle, always pass
the documents on to the new owner.
We wish you pleasant motoring at all times.
9065843213 É9065843213FËÍ
2 Contents
Index ....................................................... 4 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 74

Useful information ................................. 74
Seats ..................................................... 74
Introduction ......................................... 23
Steering wheel ....................................... 79
Operating Instructions ........................... 23
Mirrors ................................................... 80
Service and vehicle operation ................ 23
Proper use ............................................. 25
Protection of the environment ............... 25 Lights and windshield wipers ............ 82
Operating safety and vehicle approval Useful information ................................. 82
............................................................... 26 Exterior lighting ..................................... 82
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ............... 29 Interior lighting ...................................... 87
QR code for rescue card ........................ 30 Changing bulbs ...................................... 89
Data stored in the vehicle ...................... 30 Windshield wipers .................................. 96
At a glance ........................................... 33 Climate control .................................... 99

Cockpit .................................................. 33 Useful information ................................. 99
Instrument cluster ................................. 34 Overview of climate control systems ..... 99
Steering wheel buttons .......................... 37 Operating the climate control system .. 102
Center console ...................................... 37 Adjusting the air vents ......................... 106
Overhead control panel ......................... 38 Operating the auxiliary heating sys-
Door control panel ................................. 39 tem ...................................................... 107
Further control panels ........................... 39 Operating the cargo compartment air
vents .................................................... 117
Safety ................................................... 41
Useful information ................................. 41 Driving and parking .......................... 118
Occupant safety .................................... 41 Useful information ............................... 118
Children in the vehicle ........................... 49 Breaking-in notes ................................. 118
Pets in the vehicle ................................. 54 Driving ................................................. 118
Driving safety systems ........................... 54 Automatic transmission ....................... 123
Emergency exit ...................................... 57 Refueling ............................................. 126
Theft deterrent locking system .............. 58 Parking ................................................ 129
Driving tips .......................................... 132
Driving systems ................................... 139
Opening and closing ........................... 61
Working mode ..................................... 153
Useful information ................................. 61
Towing a trailer .................................... 154
Key ........................................................ 61
Central locking ...................................... 65
Driver's door and front-passenger On-board computer and displays .... 160
door ....................................................... 66 Useful information ............................... 160
Sliding door ........................................... 67 Important safety notes ........................ 160
Electrical step ........................................ 68 Instrument cluster ............................... 160
Rear doors ............................................. 69 On-board computer (vehicles without
Partition sliding door ............................. 71 steering wheel buttons) ....................... 162
Side windows ......................................... 72 On-board computer (vehicles with
steering wheel buttons) ....................... 163
Display messages ................................ 175
Contents 3
Indicator and warning lamps in the Loading the vehicle .............................. 259
instrument cluster ............................... 195 What you should know about wheels
and tires .............................................. 262
Flat tire ................................................ 267
Stowing and features ....................... 205
Changing wheels ................................. 267
Useful information ............................... 205
Wheel and tire combination ................. 273
Stowage spaces and stowage com-
Spare wheel ......................................... 273
partments ............................................ 205
Cup holder ........................................... 209
Bottle holder ........................................ 209 Technical data ................................... 276
Ashtray ................................................ 210 Useful information ............................... 276
Cigarette lighter ................................... 210 Vehicle electronics .............................. 276
12-V socket ......................................... 211 Identification plates ............................. 276
Mobile phone ....................................... 211 Service products and capacities .......... 278
Additional communications equip- Vehicle data ......................................... 286
ment .................................................... 212
Transporting loads ............................ 213

Loading guidelines ............................... 213
Load distribution ................................. 215
Securing loads ..................................... 215
Carrier systems ................................... 217
Maintenance and care ...................... 219

Engine compartment ........................... 219
Vehicle interior .................................... 226
Maintenance ........................................ 226
Battery ................................................. 228
Care ..................................................... 234
Breakdown assistance ..................... 241

Where will I find...? .............................. 241
Flat tire ................................................ 243
Jump-starting ....................................... 243
Tow-starting and towing away ............. 244
Electrical fuses .................................... 247
Wheels and tires ............................... 248

Important safety notes ........................ 248
Operation ............................................ 248
Operation in winter .............................. 250
Tire pressure ....................................... 251
4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... Setting the center air vents ........... 106

Setting the side air vents ............... 107
4ETS (Electronic Traction System) .... 57 Air vents
12-V socket ........................................ 211 see Air vents
Air-conditioning system
A Refrigerant ..................................... 286
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) see Climate control
Display message ............................ 181 Air-recirculation mode
Function/notes ................................ 54 Important safety notes .................. 105
Important safety notes .................... 54 Switching on/off ........................... 105
Indicator lamp ................................ 196 All-wheel drive
Access step in the bumper Engaging/disengaging ................... 147
Cleaning ......................................... 238 Important safety notes .................. 146
Activating/deactivating cooling LOW RANGE transmission ratio ..... 147
with air dehumidification ................. 103 Anti-lock braking system
Activating/deactivating the roof see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
ventilator ........................................... 117 Anti-theft system
Adaptive Brake Assist Interior motion sensor ..................... 59
Function/notes ............................. 142 Armrests .............................................. 78
ADAPTIVE ESP® Ashtray ............................................... 210
ASR (acceleration skid control)
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Activating/deactivating ................... 55
Add-on equipment ............................... 28
Display message ............................ 182
Additional indicators
Function/notes ................................ 55
Replacing bulbs ............................... 91
Important safety notes .................... 55
Replacing bulbs (roof) ...................... 94
Indicator lamp ................................ 196
Additives
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Diesel ............................................ 280
Activating/deactivating ................... 58
Engine oil ....................................... 283
Switching off the alarm .................... 58
Adjusting the headlamp range ........... 84
Authorized workshop
ADR (working speed governor) ........ 153
see Qualified specialist workshop
Air bags
Automatic car wash (care) ............... 234
Deployment ..................................... 47
Automatic headlamp mode ................ 83
Front air bag (driver, front
Automatic locking ............................... 66
passenger) ....................................... 46
Automatic transmission
Accelerator pedal position ............. 125
Introduction ..................................... 45
Changing gear ............................... 124
Side impact air bag .......................... 46
Changing gear yourself .................. 124
Window curtain air bag .................... 47
Air filter Driving tips .................................... 125
Emergency running mode .............. 126
Indicator lamp ................................ 202
Air pressure Important safety notes .................. 123
Kickdown ....................................... 125
see Tire pressure
Air vents Maneuvering .................................. 125
Overview ........................................ 123
Adjusting for the passenger com-
Problem (malfunction) ................... 126
partment ........................................ 107
Releasing the parking lock man-
Adjusting on the roof ..................... 107
ually ............................................... 126
Important safety notes .................. 106
Index 5
Selector lever ................................ 123 Battery

Selector lever positions ................. 124 Replacing (SmartKey) ...................... 63
Shift ranges ................................... 125 Battery (SmartKey)
Starting the engine ........................ 120 Checking .......................................... 63
Touchshift ...................................... 124 Important safety notes .................... 63
Trailer towing ................................. 125 Replacing ......................................... 63
Transmission oil change ................ 284 Battery (vehicle)
Automatic transmission emer- Care ............................................... 233
gency mode ....................................... 126 Charging ........................................ 233
AUX port ............................................. 212 Disconnecting/connecting (addi-
Auxiliary heater tional battery) ................................ 232
see Auxiliary warm-air heater Disconnecting/connecting
see Hot-water auxiliary heater (starter battery) ............................. 230
Auxiliary heating Display message ............................ 194
Activating/deactivating heater Important safety notes .................. 228
booster mode ................................ 112 Indicator lamp ................................ 199
Adjusting ....................................... 172 Installing/removing (additional
Conditions for switching on ........... 109 battery) .......................................... 233
Heating time .................................. 108 Jump starting ................................. 243
Important safety notes .................. 107 Location ......................................... 229
Operating with the button (control Main switch ................................... 118
panel) ............................................ 109 Removing and installing (starter
Operation with the remote con- battery) .......................................... 231
trol ................................................. 110 Removing and installing the floor
Operation with the timer ................ 114 covering ......................................... 229
Selecting a switch-on time ............. 109 Before driving off
Setting the switch-on time ............. 110 Important safety notes .................. 120
see Auxiliary heating Belt
see Auxiliary warm-air heater see Seat belts
see Hot-water auxiliary heater Belt warning ......................................... 45
Auxiliary warm-air heater Bio-diesel ........................................... 279
Problem (malfunction) ................... 117 Bleeding the fuel system .................. 122
Setting the departure time ............. 116 Blind Spot Assist
Axle load, permissible (trailer tow- Activating/deactivating (button) .... 145
ing) ...................................................... 288 Activating/deactivating (vehicle
with steering wheel buttons) ......... 172
B Display messages (vehicles with
steering wheel buttons) ................. 192
Backup lamps
Display messages (vehicles with-
Replacing bulbs ............................... 92
out steering wheel buttons) ........... 180
Backup lamps (Chassis Cab)
Notes/function .............................. 143
Replacing bulbs ............................... 93
Trailer towing ................................. 145
BAS (Brake Assist System)
Bottle holder
Display message ............................ 182
see Cup holder
Function/notes ................................ 56 Brake Assist
Indicator lamp ................................ 196
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Basic settings
Brake fluid
see Settings
Checking the level ......................... 224
6 Index
Display message ............................ 183 Car

Notes ............................................. 284 see Vehicle
Warning lamp ................................. 197 Care
Brake force distribution Access step in the bumper ............ 238
Display message ............................ 183 Car wash ........................................ 234
see EBD (electronic brake force Display ........................................... 238
distribution) Exterior lights ................................ 237
Brake lamps Interior ........................................... 238
Replacing bulbs ............................... 92 Notes ............................................. 234
Brake lamps (Chassis Cab) Paint .............................................. 236
Replacing bulbs ............................... 93 Plastic trim .................................... 239
Brake linings Power washer ................................ 235
Display message ............................ 182 Rear view camera .......................... 237
Indicator lamp ................................ 199 Roof lining ...................................... 239
Brake pads/linings Seat belt ........................................ 239
New ............................................... 135 Seat cover ..................................... 239
Brake system Selector lever ................................ 239
Warning lamp ................................. 196 Sensors ......................................... 237
Brakes Sliding door ................................... 238
ABS .................................................. 54 Steering wheel ............................... 239
Adaptive Brake Assist .................... 142 Step (electrical) ............................. 238
Applying the parking brake ............ 130 Trim pieces .................................... 239
BAS .................................................. 56 Washing by hand ........................... 235
Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 284 Washing the engine ....................... 235
Checking brake fluid level .............. 224 Wheels ........................................... 236
Display message ............................ 183 Windows ........................................ 236
EBD .................................................. 56 Wiper blades .................................. 236
Important safety notes .................. 134 Cargo compartment
New brake pads/linings ................ 135 Activating/deactivating ventila-
Parking brake (notes) ..................... 135 tion ................................................ 117
Riding tips ...................................... 134 Cargo compartment floor ................... 29
Breakdown Cargo tie-down points and tie
Fire extinguisher ............................ 243 downs
First-aid kit .................................... 242 Important safety notes .................. 215
Jump-starting ................................. 243 Cargo tie-down rings
Reflective safety jacket .................. 242 Installing ........................................ 217
Vehicle tool kit ............................... 241 Permissible tensile load ................. 287
Warning lamp ................................. 242 Carrier system
Warning triangle ............................ 242 Ladder rack ................................... 218
see Towing away Center console overview .................... 37
Bulb failure indicator .......................... 82 Central locking
Automatic locking ............................ 66
C Important safety notes .................... 65
Locking/unlocking (buttons) ........... 65
California
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 61
Important notice for retail cus-
Locking/unlocking manually ............ 65
tomers and lessees .......................... 23
Central locking system
see Central locking
Index 7
Change of address .............................. 24 Child

Change of ownership .......................... 24 Restraint system .............................. 50
Changing bulbs Child seat
Additional indicators (roof) .............. 94 Forward-facing restraint system ...... 53
Additional turn signals ..................... 91 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
Backup lamp (Chassis Cab) ............. 93 anchors ............................................ 51
Backup lamps .................................. 92 On the front-passenger seat ............ 52
Bi-Xenon bulbs ................................. 89 Rearward-facing restraint system .... 52
Brake lamps ..................................... 92 Top Tether ....................................... 52
Brake lamps (Chassis Cab) .............. 93 Child-proof locks
Cornering lamps .............................. 90 Important safety notes .................... 53
Courtesy lights ................................. 94 Rear door ......................................... 54
Daytime running lamps (halogen Children
headlamps) ...................................... 90 Special seat belt retractor ............... 49
Display message ............................ 185 Children in the vehicle
Front interior light ............................ 95 Important safety notes .................... 49
High-beam headlamps ..................... 90 Chock ................................................. 131
Interior light ..................................... 95 Cigarette lighter ................................ 210
Interior lighting ................................ 95 Cleaning
License plate lamp ........................... 93 Mirror turn signal ........................... 237
License plate lamp (Chassis Cab) .... 93 Trailer tow hitch ............................. 238
Low-beam headlamps ...................... 90 Cleaning
Overview of lamp types (front see Care
bulbs) ............................................... 89 Climate control
Overview of lamp types (rear Air conditioning in the rear com-
bulbs, Chassis Cab) ......................... 93 partment ........................................ 102
Overview of lamp types (rear Air-conditioning system ................. 100
bulbs) ............................................... 92 Auxiliary heating ............................ 107
Parking lamps .................................. 91 Checking/cleaning the air filter
Perimeter lamp .......................... 93, 94 (rear-compartment air condition-
Perimeter/side marker lamp ........... 91 ing) ................................................ 226
Rear fog lamp .................................. 92 Cooling with air dehumidification .. 103
Rear fog lamp (Chassis Cab) ............ 93 Defrosting the windows ................. 104
Rear interior light ............................. 95 Heating ............................................ 99
Standing lamps (rear, Chassis Heating in the rear compartment ... 101
Cab) ................................................. 93 Important safety notes .................... 99
Standing lamps (rear) ...................... 92 Operating the cargo compartment
Tail lamps ........................................ 92 air vents ......................................... 117
Tail lamps (Chassis Cab) .................. 93 Overview of systems ........................ 99
Turn signals (front) ........................... 91 Problem with the rear window
Turn signals (rear, Chassis Cab) ....... 93 defroster ........................................ 105
Turn signals (rear) ............................ 92 Problems with the windshield
Warning and indicator lamps ......... 203 heating .......................................... 105
Changing bulbs Rear-compartment air condition-
see Replacing bulbs ing ................................................. 102
Checklist Rear-compartment heating ............ 101
Before driving off-road ................... 138 Reheat function (air dehumidifica-
tion) ............................................... 104
8 Index
Setting the air distribution ............. 103 Cornering lamps

Setting the air vents ...................... 106 Replacing bulbs ............................... 90
Setting the airflow ......................... 103 Cornering light function
Setting the temperature ................ 103 Function/notes ................................ 85
Switching air-recirculation mode Courtesy lights
on/off ............................................ 105 Replacing bulbs ............................... 94
Switching on/off ........................... 102 Crosswind Assist
Switching the rear window Display message ............................ 192
defroster on/off ............................ 105 Function/notes ................................ 57
Switching windshield heating on/ Cruise control
off .................................................. 105 Activating ....................................... 140
Cockpit Activation conditions ..................... 140
Overview .......................................... 33 Cruise control lever ....................... 139
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST Deactivating ................................... 140
Activating/deactivating the dis- Display message ............................ 191
tance warning function .................. 142 Display messages (vehicle with-
Display messages (vehicles with out steering wheel buttons) ........... 176
steering wheel buttons) ................. 192 Driving system ............................... 139
Display messages (vehicles with- Function/notes ............................. 139
out steering wheel buttons) ........... 180 Important safety notes .................. 139
COMAND display Problem (malfunction) ................... 141
Cleaning ......................................... 238 Resuming the stored speed ........... 140
Combination switch ............................ 84 Setting a speed .............................. 140
Communications equipment Storing and maintaining current
Operation ....................................... 212 speed ............................................. 140
PND fittings ................................... 212 Cup holder ......................................... 209
Type approval/frequency .............. 276 Cup holder
Consumption statistics (on-board see Cup holders
computer) .......................................... 173 Cup holders ........................................ 209
Control panel Curtains (cleaning instructions) ...... 240
Above the windshield ....................... 38 Customer Assistance Center
Center console ................................ 37 (CAC) ..................................................... 28
Climate control ................................ 37 Customer Relations Department ....... 28
Driver's door .................................... 39
Left and right side of the steering D
wheel ............................................... 39
Conversions/equipment .................... 28 Dashboard
Coolant (engine) see Cockpit
Adding ........................................... 224 Dashboard lighting
Checking the level ......................... 223 see Instrument cluster lighting
Display message ............................ 190 Data
Displaying the temperature (on- see Technical data
board computer) ............................ 166 Daytime running lamps
Filling capacity ............................... 285 Activating/deactivating (vehicles
Important safety notes .................. 223 with steering wheel buttons) ......... 170
Warning lamp ................................. 200 Changing bulbs (halogen head-
Cooling lamps) .............................................. 90
see Climate control Switching on/off (switch) ................ 82
Index 9
Switching on/off (vehicles with- Safety systems .............................. 181

out steering wheel buttons) ........... 163 Service interval display .................. 227
Dealership SmartKey ....................................... 194
see Qualified specialist workshop Tires ............................................... 193
Declarations of conformity ................. 27 Vehicle ........................................... 194
DEF (Diesel Exhaust Fluid ) Distance recorder ............................. 166
Refilling .......................................... 128 see Odometer
Delayed switch-off ............................ 171 see Trip odometer
Diagnostics connection Distance warning function
Operating safety and vehicle Activating/deactivating ................. 142
approval ........................................... 27 Indicator lamp ................................ 142
Diesel .................................................. 279 Warning lamp ................................. 195
Diesel engine Door lock
Preglow indicator lamp .................. 202 see Central locking
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Doors
Display messages (vehicles with Central locking/unlocking
steering wheel buttons) ................. 187 (SmartKey) ....................................... 61
Display messages (vehicles with- Control panel ................................... 39
out steering wheel buttons) ........... 177 Display message ............................ 194
Indicator lamp ................................ 198 Indicator lamp ................................ 203
Level indicator ............................... 161 Drinking and driving ......................... 132
Notes ............................................. 281 Drinks holder
Storage .......................................... 281 see Bottle holder
Tank content .................................. 282 Driver's/front-passenger door
Diesel particle filter Unlocking ......................................... 66
Short-distance driving .................... 133 Driving abroad ................................... 133
Digital speedometer Driving off-road
Setting the unit (vehicles with DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) .. 148
steering wheel buttons) ................. 168 see Off-road driving
Display Driving on flooded roads .................. 136
Outside temperature (vehicles Driving safety systems
with steering wheel buttons) ......... 166 4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-
Outside temperature display tem) ................................................. 57
(vehicles without steering wheel ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 54
buttons) ......................................... 162 Adaptive Brake Assist .................... 142
Standard display (vehicles with ASR (Acceleration Skid Control) ...... 55
steering wheel buttons) ................. 166 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 56
Standard display (vehicles with- Distance warning function ............. 141
out steering wheel buttons) ........... 162 EBD (electronic brake force distri-
see Warning and indicator lamps bution) ............................................. 56
Display ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-
see Warning and indicator lamps gram) ............................................... 56
Display messages Important safety information ........... 54
Calling up the message memory .... 175 Overview .......................................... 54
Driving systems ............................. 191 Driving system
Engine ............................................ 187 Display messages (vehicle with-
Important safety notes .................. 175 out steering wheel buttons) ........... 180
Lights ............................................. 185
10 Index
Driving systems Function ........................................... 68

Blind Spot Assist ............................ 143 Important safety notes .................... 68
Cruise control ................................ 139 Indicator lamp ................................ 204
Display message ............................ 191 Manual retraction ............................ 68
Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 145 Obstacle detection ........................... 68
PARKTRONIC ................................. 150 Electrical system
Driving tips Battery main switch ....................... 118
Automatic transmission ................. 125 Electronic brake force distribution
Brakes ........................................... 134 see EBD (electronic brake force
Break-in period .............................. 118 distribution)
Checking brake lining thickness .... 135 Electronic Stability Program
Downhill gradient ........................... 134 see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Drinking and driving ....................... 132 Emergency exit .................................... 57
Driving abroad ............................... 133 Emergency exit window ..................... 57
Driving in winter ............................. 136 Emergency Tensioning Devices
Driving on flooded roads ................ 136 Activation ......................................... 47
Driving on wet roads ...................... 136 Emissions control
Exhaust check ............................... 133 Service and warranty information .... 23
Fuel ................................................ 132 Engine
General .......................................... 132 ADR (working speed governor) ...... 153
Hydroplaning ................................. 136 Changing the power output ............. 27
Icy road surfaces ........................... 136 Check Engine warning lamp ........... 201
Important safety notes .................. 118 Cleaning instructions ..................... 235
Limited braking efficiency on sal- Engine number ............................... 278
ted roads ....................................... 135 Engine speed setting (working
New brake disks ............................ 135 mode) ............................................ 154
New brake pads/linings ................ 135 Irregular running ............................ 122
Off-road driving .............................. 137 Jump-starting ................................. 243
Overrun cut-off .............................. 132 Operating safety .............................. 27
Snow chains .................................. 251 Starting .......................................... 120
Speed limitation ............................. 133 Starting problems .......................... 122
Towing a trailer .............................. 154 Switching off .................................. 131
Transport by rail ............................. 134 Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 247
Wet road surface ........................... 135 Engine electronics
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) .... 148 Notes ............................................. 276
E Engine oil
EBD (electronic brake force distri- Adding ........................................... 223
bution) Additives ........................................ 283
Display message ............................ 183 Checking the oil level (on-board
Function/notes ................................ 56 computer) ...................................... 221
Indicator lamps .............................. 196 Checking the oil level using the
Electrical closing assist ...................... 68 dipstick .......................................... 222
Electrical step Display message ............................ 191
Filling capacity ............................... 283
Cleaning ......................................... 238
Information about oil consump-
Display message ............................ 194
tion ................................................ 283
Emergency release .......................... 68
Mixing ............................................ 283
Index 11
Notes about oil grades ................... 282 Consumption information .............. 280
Oil change ...................................... 283 Consumption statistics .................. 173
Oil level (note) ............................... 221 Diesel at very low outside temper-
Viscosity ........................................ 282 atures ............................................ 279
Warning lamp ................................. 200 Driving tips .................................... 132
Engine speed setting (working Fuel gauge ..................................... 161
mode) ................................................. 153 Problem (malfunction) ................... 128
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Quality (diesel) ............................... 279
gram) Refueling ........................................ 126
Crosswind Assist ............................. 57 Showing the range (vehicles with
Display message ............................ 184 steering wheel buttons) ................. 173
Important safety information ........... 56 Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 279
Indicator lamp ................................ 199 Fuel filter with water separator
Warning lamp ................................. 195 draining ......................................... 225
Exhaust check ................................... 133 Indicator lamp ................................ 203
Exhaust gas aftertreatment Fuel gauge ......................................... 161
DEF level indicator ......................... 161 Fuel tank
DEF reducing agent ....................... 281 Problem (malfunction) ................... 128
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) ............. 281 Fuel tank
Indicator lamp ................................ 202 see Fuel tank
Refilling DEF .................................. 128 Fuses .................................................. 247
Exterior lighting
see Lights G
Exterior mirrors
Gasoline
Adjusting ......................................... 80
Reserve fuel warning lamp ............. 201
Important safety notes .................... 80 General driving tips
Eyeglasses compartment ................. 206
Driving short distances .................. 133
Genuine parts ...................................... 29
F Glove box ........................................... 205
Fire extinguisher ............................... 243 GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (defini-
First-aid kit ......................................... 242 tion) .................................................... 265
Flat tire
Changing a wheel/mounting the H
spare wheel ................................... 268 Handbrake
General notes ................................ 267
see Parking brake
Fog lamps
Hazard warning lamps ........................ 85
Switching on/off .............................. 83
Head restraints
Fogged up-up windows
Adjusting ......................................... 78
see Climate control
Headlamps
Folding seat ......................................... 76
Adding fluid to cleaning system ..... 225
Frequencies
Cleaning system (function) .............. 85
Mobile phone ................................. 276
Fogging up ....................................... 86
Two-way radio ................................ 276
see Automatic headlamp mode
Front interior light
Headliner (cleaning instructions) .... 239
Replacing bulbs ............................... 95
Heating
Fuel
see Climate control
Additives (diesel) ........................... 280
12 Index
High-beam headlamps Motion detectors ............................. 88

Replacing bulbs ............................... 90 Notes on replacing bulbs ................. 95
Switching on/off .............................. 84 Overview .......................................... 87
Highbeam Assist Replacing bulbs ............................... 95
Activating/deactivating (vehicles Switching the load-compartment
with steering wheel buttons) ......... 170 lighting on/off ................................. 88
Activating/deactivating (vehicles Switching the rear compartment
without steering wheel buttons) .... 163 lighting on centrally ......................... 87
Display messages (vehicles with Interior motion sensor
steering wheel buttons) ................. 187 Arming ............................................. 59
Display messages (vehicles with- Deactivating ..................................... 60
out steering wheel buttons) ........... 180 Function ........................................... 59
Function/notes ................................ 86 Switching off .................................... 59
Hood
Closing ........................................... 220 J
Display message ............................ 194
Jack
Important safety notes .................. 219
Jacking points ................................ 268
Indicator lamp ................................ 203
Preparation .................................... 268
Opening ......................................... 219
Hot-water auxiliary heater Storage location ............................ 241
Using ............................................. 268
Jump-starting ..................................... 243
Hydroplaning ..................................... 136
K
I
Key
Ignition lock
Position in the ignition lock ............ 119
see Key positions
Key positions ..................................... 119
Immobilizer .......................................... 58
Indicator lamp Kickdown ........................................... 125
see Warning and indicator lamps
Indicators L
see Turn signals Lamps
Insect protection on the radiator ...... 29 see Warning and indicator lamps
Installing a wheel Lane Keeping Assist
Installing the adapter (spare Activating/deactivating ................. 146
wheel) ............................................ 270 Display messages (vehicles with
Instrument cluster steering wheel buttons) ................. 192
Fuel gauge ..................................... 161 Display messages (vehicles with-
Important safety notes .................. 160 out steering wheel buttons) ........... 180
Instrument cluster lighting ............. 161 Function/notes ............................. 145
Outside temperature display .......... 161 Indicator lamp ................................ 195
Overview .......................................... 34 Language
Speedometer ................................. 161 Display (vehicles with steering
Tachometer ................................... 161 wheel buttons) ............................... 169
Warning and indicator lamps ........... 35 Lashing points and tie downs
Instrument cluster lighting .............. 161 Permissible tensile load ................. 287
Interior lighting ................................... 87 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
Front ................................................ 87 anchors ................................................ 51
Index 13
License plate lamp Load securing aids

Replacing bulbs ............................... 93 Carrier systems ............................. 217
License plate lamp (Chassis Cab) Loading guidelines
Replacing bulbs ............................... 93 Important safety notes .................. 213
Light sensor ......................................... 83 Loading rails
Lighting Installing cargo tie-down rings ....... 217
see Lights Maximum tensile strength ............. 287
Lights Loads
Activating/deactivating daytime Securing ........................................ 215
running lamps (vehicles with Transporting .................................. 213
steering wheel buttons) ................. 170 Locator lighting
Activating/deactivating daytime Setting (vehicles with steering
running lamps (vehicles without wheel buttons) ............................... 171
steering wheel buttons) ................. 163 Locking
Activating/deactivating High- see Central locking
beam Assist (vehicles with steer- Locking and unlocking manually ....... 65
ing wheel buttons) ......................... 170 Locking centrally
Activating/deactivating High- see Central locking
beam Assist (vehicles without LOW RANGE ....................................... 147
steering wheel buttons) ................. 163 LOW RANGE transmission ratio ....... 147
Activating/deactivating surround Low-beam headlamps
lighting (vehicles with steering Display message ............................ 185
wheel buttons) ............................... 171 Driving abroad ............................... 134
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 83 Replacing bulbs ............................... 90
Bulb failure indicator ........................ 82 Switching on/off .............................. 82
Cornering light function ................... 85 Lumbar support ................................... 75
Driving abroad ............................... 134
Fog lamps ........................................ 83 M
Hazard warning lamps ..................... 85
Headlamp range .............................. 84 M+S tires ............................................ 250
High beam flasher ............................ 84 Maintenance ...................................... 226
High-beam headlamps ..................... 84 Malfunctions
Highbeam Assist .............................. 86 Message memory (on-board com-
Important safety notes .................... 82 puter) ............................................. 175
Light switch ..................................... 82 Maximum speed
Low-beam headlamps ...................... 82 Speed limitation ............................. 133
Parking lamps .................................. 82 Menu (vehicles with steering
Rear fog lamp .................................. 83 wheel buttons)
Setting the exterior lighting Audio ............................................. 166
delayed switch-off (vehicles with Operation ....................................... 165
steering wheel buttons) ................. 171 Settings ......................................... 167
Switching the daytime running Telephone ...................................... 173
lamps on/off (switch) ...................... 82 Menu (vehicles without steering
Turn signals ..................................... 84 wheel buttons)
see Changing a bulb Overview ........................................ 162
see Interior lighting Message
Limited Warranty ................................ 23 see Display message
Load distribution ............................... 215
14 Index
Message memory (on-board com- Off-road driving

puter) .................................................. 175 Checklist after driving off-road ...... 138
Mirrors Checklist before driving off-road .... 138
Exterior mirrors ................................ 80 Important safety notes .................. 137
Rear-view mirror .............................. 80 Rules for driving off-road ............... 138
Mobile navigation devices ................ 212 Oil
Mobile phone see Engine oil
Important safety notes .................. 211 Oil sensor
Pre-installation ............................... 211 Display message ............................ 191
Type approval/frequency .............. 276 On-board computer (vehicles with
Mobile phone steering wheel buttons)
see Mobile phone Audio menu ................................... 166
Mounting wheels Checking the oil level ..................... 221
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 272 Display message ............................ 175
Mounting a new wheel ................... 271 Illumination submenu .................... 170
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 268 Menu overview .............................. 165
Raising the vehicle ......................... 268 Operating ....................................... 163
Removing a wheel .......................... 270 Operation menu ............................. 165
Removing and mounting the spare Settings menu ............................... 167
wheel ............................................. 274 Standard display ............................ 166
Securing the vehicle against roll- Telephone menu ............................ 173
ing away ........................................ 268 Trip computer menu ...................... 173
On-board computer (vehicles with-
N out steering wheel buttons)
Checking the oil level ..................... 221
Navigation Display message ............................ 175
Fittings for PND mobile navigation General notes ................................ 162
devices .......................................... 212 Setting the clock ............................ 163
Notes on breaking-in a new vehi- Standard display ............................ 162
cle ....................................................... 118 Operating Instructions
Before the first journey .................... 23
O Limited Warranty ............................. 23
Occupant safety Operating safety
Air bags ........................................... 45 Limited Warranty ............................. 23
Belt warning ..................................... 45 Operating safety and vehicle
Children in the vehicle ..................... 49 approval
Important safety notes .................... 41 Attachments and bodies .................. 28
Introduction to the restraint sys- Changing the engine power out-
tem .................................................. 41 put ................................................... 27
Pets in the vehicle ........................... 54 Correct use ...................................... 25
Restraint system warning lamp ........ 41 Declaration of conformity ................ 27
Seat belt .......................................... 42 Equipment and conversions ............. 28
Odometer Important safety notes .................... 26
Display (vehicles with steering Information about body/equip-
wheel buttons) ............................... 166 ment mounting directives ................ 28
Display (vehicles without steering Notes on operating the vehicle ........ 26
wheel buttons) ............................... 162 Qualified specialist workshop .......... 27
Registering your vehicle ................... 28
Index 15
Operator's Manual Passenger compartment heating

General notes .................................. 23 see Climate control
Vehicle equipment ........................... 23 Perimeter lamp
Outline lamp Replacing bulbs ............................... 93
Replacing bulbs ............................... 94 Perimeter/side marker lamp
Outside temperature display ........... 161 Changing bulbs ................................ 91
Overhead control panel ...................... 38 Pets in the vehicle ............................... 54
Overrevving range ............................. 161 Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-
Overrun cutoff ................................... 132 tions) .................................................. 239
Power assistance for the steering
P Display message ............................ 194
Warning lamp ................................. 204
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 236 Power supply
Paper holder ...................................... 208 Battery isolating switch ................. 118
Parking ............................................... 129 Switching off .................................. 119
Important safety notes .................. 129 Switching on .................................. 119
Parking brake ................................ 130 Power take-off
Wheel chock .................................. 131 Engine speed setting ..................... 153
see PARKTRONIC Power washers .................................. 235
Parking aid Power windows
see PARKTRONIC see Side windows
Parking assistance Preparing for a journey
see PARKTRONIC Checks in the vehicle ..................... 120
Parking brake Visual check of the vehicle exte-
Display message ............................ 184 rior ................................................. 120
Notes/function .............................. 130 Protection of the environment
Parking brake General notes .................................. 25
see Parking brake Pulling away ...................................... 121
Parking lamps
Replacing bulbs ............................... 91 Q
Switching on/off .............................. 82
PARKTRONIC QR code
Deactivating/activating ................. 152 Rescue card ..................................... 30
Driving system ............................... 150 Qualified specialist workshop ........... 27
Function/notes ............................. 150
Important safety notes .................. 150 R
Radiator cover ..................................... 29
Range of the sensors ..................... 150
Radio
Roll-back warning .......................... 152
Changing stations (vehicles with
Trailer towing ................................. 152
steering wheel buttons) ................. 166
Warning display ............................. 151
see separate operating instructions
Partition sliding door
Radio-wave reception/transmis-
sion in the vehicle
Opening/closing .............................. 71
Declaration of conformity ................ 27
Passenger compartment air-condi-
Rain and light sensor
tioning system
Setting the sensitivity (vehicles
see Climate control
with steering wheel buttons) ......... 171
16 Index
Windshield wiper .............................. 96 Refueling

Range (vehicles with steering Fuel filler flap ................................. 127
wheel buttons) .................................. 173 Important safety notes (fuel) ......... 126
Rear bench seat Refueling procedure (fuel) ............. 127
Installing/removing (Passenger see Fuel
Van) ................................................. 77 Releasing the parking lock man-
Stowage compartment (crewcab) .. 208 ually (automatic transmission) ........ 126
Rear compartment Remote control
Activating/deactivating climate Changing the operating duration
control ........................................... 102 (auxiliary heating) .......................... 111
Setting the air vents ...................... 107 Replacing the battery (auxiliary
Rear door heating ) ........................................ 112
Child-proof locks .............................. 54 Switching on/off (auxiliary heat-
Important safety notes .................... 69 ing) ................................................ 111
Opening/closing from inside ........... 71 Synchronizing (auxiliary heating) ... 111
Opening/closing from the out- Replacing bulbs
side .................................................. 70 Important safety notes .................... 89
Rear fog lamp Replacing the battery (auxiliary
Replacing bulbs ............................... 92 heating remote control) .................... 112
Switching on/off .............................. 83 Replacing the fuel filter .................... 203
Rear fog lamp (Chassis Cab) Reporting safety defects .................... 28
Replacing bulbs ............................... 93 Rescue card ......................................... 30
Rear interior light Reserve fuel
Replacing bulbs ............................... 95 Display message ............................ 190
Rear view camera Restraint system
Cleaning instructions ..................... 237 Display message ............................ 184
Important safety notes .................. 153 Introduction ..................................... 41
Switching on .................................. 153 Warning lamp ................................. 199
Rear window defroster Warning lamp (function) ................... 41
Problem (malfunction) ................... 105 Reverse warning feature .................. 121
Switching on/off ........................... 105 Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 24
Rear window wiper Roof carrier
Switching on/off .............................. 97 Maximum payload .......................... 287
Rear-compartment air-condition- Notes ............................................. 217
ing system Roof load (roof carrier) ..................... 287
see Climate control
Rear-compartment heating S
see Climate control
Rear-view mirror Safety
Anti-glare mode ............................... 80 Children in the vehicle ..................... 49
Refilling Operating safety .............................. 26
DEF filler neck ............................... 128 see Occupant safety
Important safety notes (Diesel Safety system
Exhaust Fluid – DEF) ...................... 128 see Driving safety systems
Refilling procedure (Diesel Seat belts
Exhaust Fluid – DEF) ...................... 128 Adjusting the height ......................... 44
Refrigerant ......................................... 286 Cleaning ......................................... 239
Correct usage .................................. 43
Index 17
Display message ............................ 184 Setting the air distribution ............... 103
Fastening ......................................... 44 Setting the airflow ............................ 103
Important safety guidelines ............. 42 Setting the clock
Introduction ..................................... 42 Vehicles with steering wheel but-
Releasing ......................................... 45 tons ............................................... 169
Warning lamp ................................. 203 Vehicles without steering wheel
Warning lamp (function) ................... 45 buttons .......................................... 163
Seat heating ......................................... 79 Settings
Seats Resetting all (vehicles with steer-
Adjusting lumbar support ................ 75 ing wheel buttons) ......................... 167
Adjusting the front-passenger Resetting submenus (vehicles
seat .................................................. 75 with steering wheel buttons) ......... 167
Adjusting the head restraint ............ 78 Short journeys (diesel particle fil-
Armrest ............................................ 78 ter) ...................................................... 133
Cleaning the cover ......................... 239 Side impact air bag ............................. 46
Correct driver's seat position ........... 74 Side marker lamp
Folding seat ..................................... 76 Changing bulbs ................................ 91
Important safety notes .................... 74 Side windows
Rear bench seat ............................... 77 Cleaning ......................................... 236
Seat heating .................................... 79 Hinged side windows ....................... 72
Setting the driver's seat ................... 75 Important safety information ........... 72
Swivel seat ....................................... 75 Opening/closing .............................. 72
Twin front-passenger seat ................ 76 Overview .......................................... 72
Securing loads Problem (malfunction) ..................... 73
Important safety notes .................. 215 Resetting ......................................... 73
Selector lever Sliding door
Cleaning ......................................... 239 Cleaning ......................................... 238
see Automatic transmission Closing assist ................................... 68
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 237 Important safety notes .................... 67
Service center Opening/closing from the inside ..... 67
see Qualified specialist workshop Opening/closing from the out-
Service interval display side .................................................. 67
Calling up the service due date ...... 227 SmartKey
Exceeding a service due date ........ 227 Changing the battery ....................... 63
Notes ............................................. 227 Changing the locking system set-
Service due date (automatic dis- tings ............................................... 172
play) ............................................... 227 Checking the battery ....................... 63
Service products Display message ............................ 194
Brake fluid ..................................... 284 Door central locking/unlocking ....... 61
Coolant (engine) ............................ 285 Important safety notes .................... 61
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) ............. 281 Loss ................................................. 64
Engine oil ....................................... 282 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 64
Fuel ................................................ 278 Snow chains ...................................... 251
Important safety notes .................. 278 Sockets .............................................. 211
Power steering fluid ....................... 284 Spare wheel
Refrigerant ..................................... 286 General notes ................................ 273
Transmission oil ............................. 284 Important safety notes .................. 273
Washer fluid ................................... 286
18 Index
Removing/mounting ...................... 274 Stowage space under the rear

Special seat belt retractor .................. 49 bench seat ..................................... 208
Specialist workshop ............................ 27 Stowage space under the twin co-
Speed, controlling driver's seat ................................... 207
see Cruise control Summer tires ..................................... 250
Speedometer Switch unit
Digital (vehicles with steering see Control panel
wheel buttons) ............................... 169 Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 58
Digital (vehicles without steering Switching the heater booster func-
wheel buttons) ............................... 162 tion on/off ......................................... 112
Selecting display unit (vehicles Switching the surround lighting
with steering- wheel buttons) ........ 168 on/off (on-board computer) ............. 171
Sprinter dealer Swivel seat ........................................... 75
see Qualified specialist workshop
Standing lamps T
Replacing bulbs (rear) ...................... 92
Standing lamps (Chassis Cab) Tachometer ........................................ 161
Replacing bulbs (rear) ...................... 93 Tail lamps
Start-off assist Replacing bulbs ............................... 92
Display message ............................ 182 Tail lamps (Chassis Cab)
Starting (engine) ................................ 120 Replacing bulbs ............................... 93
Station Tank content
see Radio Fuel gauge ..................................... 161
Steering wheel Range (vehicles with steering
Adjusting ......................................... 79 wheel buttons) ............................... 173
Button overview ............................... 37 Reserve fuel warning lamp ............. 201
Cleaning ......................................... 239 Technical data
Step Capacities ...................................... 278
see Electrical step Cargo tie-down points .................... 287
Stickers Cargo tie-down rings ...................... 287
General safety notes ........................ 25 Loading rails .................................. 287
Stowage spaces Roof carrier .................................... 287
see Stowage spaces and stowage Tires/wheels ................................. 273
compartments Trailer tow hitch ............................. 288
Stowage spaces and stowage com- Vehicle data ................................... 286
partments Telephone (on-board computer)
Eyeglasses compartment ............... 206 Accepting an incoming call ............ 174
Glove box ....................................... 205 Display messages .......................... 194
Important safety notes .................. 205 Numbers from the phone book ...... 174
Paper holder .................................. 208 Operating ....................................... 173
Stowage compartment above the Redialing ........................................ 174
windshield ..................................... 207 Rejecting or ending a call .............. 174
Stowage compartment in the cen- Temperature
ter console ..................................... 207 Outside temperature ...................... 161
Stowage compartment in the Setting (climate control) ................ 103
dashboard ...................................... 206 Setting the unit (vehicles with
Stowage space above the head- steering wheel buttons) ................. 168
liner ............................................... 207
Index 19
Theft deterrent systems Tires

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 58 Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 266
Immobilizer ...................................... 58 Average weight of the vehicle
Tow-away alarm ............................... 59 occupants (definition) .................... 265
Tightening torques for wheel nuts/ Bar (definition) ............................... 265
wheel bolts ........................................ 272 Changing a wheel .......................... 267
Time Characteristics .............................. 264
Setting the time (vehicles with Checking ........................................ 249
steering wheel buttons) ................. 169 Curb weight (definition) ................. 266
Setting the time (vehicles without Definition of terms ......................... 264
steering wheel buttons) ................. 163 Direction of rotation ...................... 267
Timer Distribution of the vehicle occu-
Activating ....................................... 115 pants (definition) ............................ 266
Auxiliary heating ............................ 114 DOT (Department of Transporta-
Overview ........................................ 114 tion) (definition) ............................. 265
Setting the heating level (auxiliary DOT, Tire Identification Number
heating) ......................................... 116 (TIN) ............................................... 264
Setting weekday, time and oper- GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
ating duration (auxiliary heating) ... 115 (definition) ..................................... 265
Switching immediate heating GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (defi-
mode on/off (auxiliary heating) ..... 115 nition) ............................................ 265
Timer (auxiliary warm-air heater) GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-
Deactivating departure times ......... 116 inition) ........................................... 265
Setting the departure time ............. 116 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
Tire pressure ing) (definition) .............................. 265
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 254 Important safety notes .................. 248
Checking manually ........................ 254 Increased vehicle weight due to
Display messages (vehicles with optional equipment (definition) ...... 265
steering wheel buttons) ................. 193 Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 265
Display messages (vehicles with- Labeling (overview) ........................ 262
out steering wheel buttons) ........... 176 Load bearing index (definition) ...... 266
Maximum ....................................... 254 Load index ..................................... 263
Notes ............................................. 253 Load index (definition) ................... 265
Recommended ............................... 251 M+S tires ....................................... 250
Setting the unit (vehicles with Maximum load on a tire (defini-
steering wheel buttons) ................. 169 tion) ............................................... 266
Tire label ........................................ 252 Maximum loaded vehicle weight
Tire pressure loss warning system .. 256 (definition) ..................................... 265
Tire pressure monitor Maximum permissible tire pres-
Checking the tire pressure elec- sure (definition) ............................. 266
tronically ........................................ 256 Maximum tire load ......................... 264
Display message ............................ 193 Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 266
Function/notes ............................. 254 Optional equipment weight (defi-
Indicator lamp ................................ 202 nition) ............................................ 266
Restarting ...................................... 256 PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-
Warning lamp ................................. 256 inition) ........................................... 266
Tire pressure table ............................ 257 Replacing ....................................... 267
Service life ..................................... 249
20 Index
Sidewall (definition) ....................... 266 Trailer loads ................................... 288

Snow chains .................................. 251 Towing away
Speed rating (definition) ................ 265 Important safety guidelines ........... 244
Storing ........................................... 267 In the event of malfunctions .......... 245
Structure and characteristics With both axles on the ground ....... 246
(definition) ..................................... 264 Trailer
Summer tires ................................. 250 Brake force booster malfunction ... 197
TIN (Tire Identification Number) Trailer coupling
(definition) ..................................... 266 see Towing a trailer
Tire bead (definition) ...................... 266 Trailer loads and drawbar nose-
Tire pressure (definition) ................ 266 weights ............................................... 158
Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 265 Trailer towing
Tire size designation, load-bearing Blind Spot Assist ............................ 145
capacity, speed rating .................... 262 PARKTRONIC ................................. 152
Tire tread ....................................... 249 Permissible trailer loads and
Tire tread (definition) ..................... 266 drawbar noseweights ..................... 158
Total load limit (definition) ............. 266 Transmission
Traction (definition) ....................... 266 see Automatic transmission
TWR (permissible trailer drawbar Transmission oil ................................ 284
noseweight) (definition) ................. 266 Transport
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Loading guidelines ......................... 213
Standards (definition) .................... 265 Vehicle ........................................... 247
Wear indicator (definition) ............. 266 Transport by rail ................................ 134
Wheel rim (definition) .................... 265 Transportation
Wheel/tire combinations ............... 273 Rail ................................................ 134
Top Tether ............................................ 52 Transporting
Touchshift (automatic transmis- Load distribution ............................ 215
sion) .................................................... 124 Securing a load .............................. 215
Tow-away alarm Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-
Arming/deactivating ........................ 59 tions) .................................................. 239
Deactivating ..................................... 59 Trip computer (on-board com-
Operation ......................................... 59 puter) .................................................. 173
Tow-starting Trip odometer
Emergency engine starting ............ 247 Display (vehicles with steering
Important safety notes .................. 244 wheel buttons) ............................... 166
Towing Display (vehicles without steering
If the vehicle is stuck ..................... 246 wheel buttons) ............................... 162
Installing/removing the towing Resetting ....................................... 161
eye ................................................. 245 see Trip computer (on-board computer)
With a raised front or rear axle ...... 246 Turn signals
Towing a trailer Replacing bulbs (front) ..................... 91
Axle load, permissible .................... 288 Replacing bulbs (rear) ...................... 92
Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 238 Switching on/off .............................. 84
Coupling up a trailer ...................... 156 Turn signals (Chassis Cab)
Decoupling a trailer ....................... 157 Replacing bulbs (rear) ...................... 93
Driving tips .................................... 154 Twin front-passenger seat
Important safety notes .................. 154 Stowage compartment .................. 207
Notes on retrofitting ...................... 288
Index 21
Two-way radios VIN ...................................................... 276

Type approval/frequency .............. 276 Voltage supply
TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) (defi- Fuses ............................................. 247
nition) ................................................. 266
Type plate W
Vehicle identification number
Warning
(VIN) .............................................. 276
Stickers ........................................... 25
Warning and indicator lamp
U
Power assistance for the steering .. 204
Unlocking Warning and indicator lamps
From inside the vehicle (central Brakes ........................................... 197
unlocking button) ............................. 65 Check Engine ................................. 201
USB port ............................................. 212 Coolant .......................................... 200
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) ............. 198
V Distance warning function ............. 195
Electrical step ................................ 204
Vehicle
ESP® .............................................. 195
Data acquisition ............................... 30
Display message ............................ 194 ESP® function ................................ 199
Electronics ..................................... 276 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 195
Equipment ....................................... 23 Overview .......................................... 35
Individual settings (vehicles with Seat belt ........................................ 203
steering wheel buttons) ................. 167 Warning lamp .................................... 242
Limited Warranty ............................. 23 Warning triangle ................................ 242
Loading .......................................... 259 Warning- and indicator lamps
Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 61 ABS ................................................ 196
Lowering ........................................ 272 Air filter .......................................... 202
Maintenance .................................... 24 ASR ................................................ 195
Operating safety .............................. 26 BAS ................................................ 196
Parking for a long period ................ 131 Battery charge ............................... 199
Pulling away ................................... 121 Brake wear .................................... 199
Raising ........................................... 268 Bulbs .............................................. 203
Registration ..................................... 28 Doors ............................................. 203
Reporting problems ......................... 28 Engine oil level ............................... 200
Securing from rolling away ............ 129 Preglow .......................................... 202
Towing away .................................. 244 Reserve fuel ................................... 201
Transporting .................................. 247 Tire pressure monitor .................... 202
Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 61 Water separator ............................. 203
Vehicle battery Windshield washer fluid ................. 203
see Battery (vehicle) Warranty .............................................. 23
Vehicle bodies ..................................... 28 Washer fluid
Body/equipment mounting direc- Adding ........................................... 225
tives for trucks ................................. 28 Capacities ...................................... 286
Vehicle data ....................................... 286 Display message ............................ 194
Vehicle identification number .......... 276 Indicator lamp ................................ 203
Vehicle identification plate .............. 276 Notes ............................................. 286
Wiping with ...................................... 96
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 241
22 Index
Wheels Setting a limit speed ...................... 133

Changing a wheel .......................... 267 Wiper blades
Checking ........................................ 249 Cleaning ......................................... 236
Cleaning ......................................... 236 Replacing ......................................... 97
Important safety notes .................. 248 Workshop
Installing the adapter (spare see Qualified specialist workshop
wheel) ............................................ 270
Interchanging/changing ................ 267
Mounting a wheel .......................... 268
Removing a wheel .......................... 270
Removing and mounting the spare
wheel ............................................. 274
Snow chains .................................. 251
Storing ........................................... 267
Tightening torque ........................... 272
Wheel/tire combinations ............... 273
Window curtain air bag ....................... 47
Windows
see Side windows
Windshield
Cleaning ......................................... 236
Defrosting ...................................... 104
Windshield heating
Switching on/off ........................... 105
Windshield washer fluid
Adding ........................................... 225
Indicator lamp ................................ 203
Windshield wipers
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 98
Rain and light sensor ....................... 96
Rear window wiper .......................... 97
Replacing the wiper blades .............. 97
Setting the sensitivity (vehicles
with steering wheel buttons and
rain/light sensor) ........................... 171
Switching on/off .............................. 96
Wiping with windshield washer
fluid ................................................. 96
Winter diesel ..................................... 279
Winter driving
Slippery road surfaces ................... 136
Snow chains .................................. 251
Winter operation
General notes ................................ 250
Radiator cover ................................. 29
Winter tires
M+S tires ....................................... 250
Introduction 23
Operating Instructions Service and vehicle operation

Before the first journey Warranty
These instructions, the Maintenance or Service The Limited Warranty for your vehicle is in
Booklet and the additional equipment-specific accordance with the warranty terms in the Ser-
instructions are integral parts of the vehicle. vice and Warranty Information booklet.
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all Your authorized Sprinter dealer will replace and
times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass on all repair all factory-installed parts in accordance
documents to the new owner. with the terms of the following warranties:
Before you first drive off, read these documents RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
carefully and familiarize yourself with your vehi-
RExhaust System Warranty
cle.
REmission Systems Warranty
For your own safety and a longer vehicle life,
follow the instructions and warning notices in RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-
these Operating Instructions. Failure to observe setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island
the instructions may lead to damage to the vehi- and Vermont Emission Control System War-
cle or personal injury. ranty
Vehicle damage caused by a failure to observe RState Warranty Enforcement Laws ("Lemon
the instructions is not covered by the New Vehi- Laws")
cle Limited Warranty. Replacement parts and accessories are covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories
Warranties. You can obtain these from any
Limited warranty authorized Sprinter dealer.
! Follow the instructions in this Operator's i Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Manual about the proper operation of your Information booklet, contact an authorized
vehicle as well as about possible vehicle dam- Sprinter dealer for a replacement. The new
age. Damage to your vehicle that arises from Service and Warranty Information booklet will
culpable contravention of these instructions be posted to you.
is not covered by the Limited Warranty of the
distributor named on the inside of the front
cover. Customer information for California
In California you are entitled to demand that
your vehicle be exchanged or that the purchase
Vehicle equipment or leasing price be refunded if Mercedes-Benz
These Operating Instructions describe all mod- USA, LLC and/or authorized workshops or ser-
els and standard and optional equipment of your vice centers are not able, after several justifiable
vehicle that were available at the time of going repairs, to rectify major damage to or malfunc-
to print. Country-specific variations are possi- tions of the vehicle as covered by the contrac-
ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped tual warranty provisions. Customers who pur-
with all of the described functions. This also chase or lease a vehicle can have the vehicle
applies to systems and functions relevant to repaired within a period of 18 months after
safety. The equipment in your vehicle may there- delivery or after a mileage of up to 29,000 km
fore differ from that shown in the descriptions (equals approx. 18,000 miles), whichever
and illustrations. comes first, if:
The original purchase contract documentation (1) the same serious defect or damage which
for your vehicle contains a list of all of the sys- could lead to fatal or serious injuries to the
tems in your vehicle. occupants of the vehicle during driving has
If you have questions about equipment and been repaired at least twice and Mercedes-
operation, consult any authorized Sprinter Benz, LLC has been informed in writing of
Dealer. the necessity of such a repair.
(2) the same defect or damage, although less
serious than described in (1), has been
24 Introduction
repaired at least four times and Mercedes- 1-800-387-0100. This enables us, if necessary,
Benz has been informed of the necessity of to contact you at any time.
such a repair in writing. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all the
(3) the vehicle cannot be operated for more literature in the vehicle so that it is available for
than 30 calendar days due to repairs result- the next owner.
ing from the same or other major defects or If your vehicle was purchased as a used vehicle,
damage. please send us the "Notice of Purchase of Used
Please send written notification to: Car" from the Service and Warranty Information
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC booklet or phone the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center (USA) on hotline number
Customer Assistance Center 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or
One Mercedes Drive Customer Service (Canada) on
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 1-800-387-0100.
Maintenance Operating the vehicle outside of the

USA and Canada
The Service and Warranty Information booklet
describes all the necessary maintenance work When traveling abroad with your vehicle,
which should be performed at regular intervals. observe the following points:
Always bring the Service and Warranty Informa- RService facilities or replacement parts may
tion booklet with you when taking the vehicle to not be available immediately.
an authorized Sprinter dealer. Your customer RUnleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic
service advisor enters each service into the Ser-
converter may not be available. Leaded fuel
vice and Warranty Information booklet for you.
can cause damage to the catalytic converter.
RThe fuel may have a considerably lower
octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause
Roadside Assistance engine damage.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro- Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available in
gram provides you with technical assistance in Europe through our European Delivery Program.
the case of a breakdown. Your toll-free calls to Please consult an authorized Sprinter dealer for
the Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered further information, or write to one of the fol-
by our staff around the clock. 365 days a year. lowing addresses:
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) In the USA
(USA) Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
1-800-387-0100 (Canada) European Delivery Department
Further information can be found in the One Mercedes Drive
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance-Program Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"
section of the Service and Warranty Information In Canada
booklet (Canada). Both are located in your vehi- Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
cle document wallet. European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Change of address or owner
Please use the " Notice of Change of Address"
form in the Service and Warranty Information
booklet to inform us of a change of address, or
simply phone the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center (USA) on hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service (Canada) on
Introduction 25
Proper use Do not store or transport any substances in

the vehicle interior which are hazardous to
Observe the following information when oper- health or react aggressively.
ating your vehicle:
Rthe safety notes in these operating instruc- These instructions must also be observed for
tions vehicles where the cargo compartment is not
Rthe technical data in these Operating Instruc-
fully separated from the driver's cab.
tions Partition with door/window: always keep the
Rtraffic laws and regulations
door/window in the partition closed during
transport.
Rmotor vehicle laws and safety standards
Examples of substances that are hazardous to
There are various warning stickers affixed to the health and/or react aggressively:
vehicle. If you remove warning stickers, you and
RSolvents
others may fail to recognize the dangers. Leave
the warning stickers in their original position. RFuel
ROil and grease
G WARNING
RCleaning agents
Modifications to electronic components, their RAcids
software as well as wiring can impair their
function and/or the function of other net-
worked components. In particular, systems Protection of the environment
relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
result, these may no longer function as inten- Economic and environmentally aware
ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of driving
the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
accident and injury.
Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec- Daimler's declared policy is one of compre-
tronic components or their software. You hensive environmental protection.
should have all work to electrical and elec- The objectives are for the natural resources
tronic equipment carried out at a qualified that form the basis of our existence on this
specialist workshop. planet to be used sparingly and in a manner
that takes the requirements of both nature
The general operating permit for your vehicle and humanity into account.
could be rendered invalid if you carry out mod- You too can help to protect the environment
ifications to electronic components, their soft-
ware as well as wiring. by operating your vehicle in an environmen-
tally responsible manner.
G WARNING Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,
Gases and fluids from substances that con- transmission, brake and tire wear are affected
stitute a health hazard or react aggressively by these factors:
can escape even from securely closed con-
Roperating conditions of your vehicle
tainers. When transporting such substances
Ryour personal driving style
in the vehicle interior, your ability to concen-
trate or your health could be affected during You can influence both factors. You should
the journey. Malfunctions, short circuits or bear the following in mind:
electrical component system failures may
also result. There is a risk of an accident and
fire.
Z
26 Introduction
Operating conditions: Operating safety and vehicle approval

Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con- Important safety notes
sumption.
Ralways make sure that the tire pressures G WARNING
are correct. If you do not have the prescribed service/
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. maintenance work or any required repairs
Rremove roof racks once you no longer need
carried out, this can result in malfunctions or
system failures. There is a risk of an accident.
them.
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute
Always have the prescribed service/mainte-
nance work as well as any required repairs
to environmental protection. You should
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
therefore adhere to the service intervals.
Ralways have service work carried out at a Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning
qualified specialist workshop. Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material,
Personal driving style: which may require special handling and regard
for the environment. The guidelines must be
Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when observed during disposal.
starting the engine. In California, you can find more information on
Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle the Internet at www.dtsc.ca.gov.
is stationary.
Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance
Notes on operating the vehicle
from the vehicle in front.
Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:
braking. Rthe vehicle makes contact with the ground,
Rchange gear in good time and use each gear e.g. on a high curb or a loose road surface
Ryou drive too quickly over an obstacle, e.g. a
only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
curb, speed bump or pothole
Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.
Ra heavy object hits the underbody or chassis
Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump- component
tion. In these or similar situations, the vehicle body/
frame, the underbody, chassis components,
wheels or tires could be damaged even if this is
Environmental issues and recommen- not visible from the outside. Components that
have been damaged in this way can unexpect-
dations edly fail or no longer be able to assimilate the
When prompted by this Operator's Manual to loads occurring in the event of an accident. If the
dispose of materials, please try to regenerate underbody paneling is damaged, flammable
and recycle these materials. Observe all rele- material, such as leaves, grass or twigs, could
vant environmental guidelines and regulations collect between the underbody and underbody
when disposing of materials. This helps to pro- paneling. These materials could ignite if they
tect the environment. remain in contact with hot components of the
exhaust system for an extended period.
G WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk
of fire.
Introduction 27
When driving off road or on unpaved roads, Only connect equipment to a diagnostics con-
check the vehicle's underside regularly. In nection in the vehicle, which is approved for
particular, remove parts of plants or other your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
flammable materials which have become
trapped. In the case of damage, contact a
qualified specialist workshop. Changing the engine power output
Have the vehicle checked and repaired immedi- ! Increases in engine power can:
ately at a qualified specialist workshop. If you Rchange the emission values
become aware when continuing the journey that Rcause malfunctions
driving safety has been effected, stop as soon as
possible in accordance with the traffic condi- Rcause consequential damage
tions. In such cases, consult a qualified special- The operating reliability of the engine is not
ist workshop. guaranteed in all cases.
Any tampering with the engine management
system in order to increase the engine power
Declaration of conformity output will lead to the loss of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty and other warranty entitle-
Radio-based vehicle components ments.
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com- If you sell the vehicle, inform the purchaser
ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is about the changes to the engine power output of
subject to the following two conditions: 1) These the vehicle. If you do not inform the buyer, this
devices may not cause harmful interference. 2. may constitute a punishable offense under
This device must accept any interference national legislation.
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation. Changes or modifications
not expressly approved by the party responsible Qualified specialist workshops
for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment." An authorized Sprinter Dealer is a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
A qualified specialist workshop has the neces-
comply with Industry Canada license-exempt
sary specialist knowledge, tools and qualifica-
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol-
tions to correctly carry out the work required on
lowing two conditions: 1) These devices may not
the vehicle.
cause interference, and 2) these devices must
accept any interference received, including This is especially the case for work relevant to
interference that may cause undesired opera- safety. Observe the notes in the Maintenance or
tion of the device". Service Booklet.
The following work should always be carried out
at qualified specialist workshop:
Diagnostics connection Rwork relevant to safety
Rservice and maintenance work
The diagnostics connection is only intended for
the connection of diagnostic equipment at a Rrepair work
qualified specialist workshop. Rmodifications as well as installations and
alterations
G WARNING Rwork on electronic components
If you connect equipment to a diagnostics For this reason, we recommend an authorized
connection in the vehicle, it may affect the Sprinter Dealer.
operation of vehicle systems. As a result, the
operating safety of the vehicle could be affec-
! Only have work carried out on the engine
electronics and its associated parts, such as
ted. There is a risk of an accident. control units, sensors, actuating components
and connector leads, at a qualified specialist
Z
28 Introduction
workshop. Vehicle components may other- NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington,
wise wear more quickly and the vehicle's DC 20590.
operating permit may be invalidated. You can find more information on vehicle safety
at:
http://www.safercar.gov
Problems with your vehicle
If you experience problems with your vehicle,
particularly problems which could jeopardize Registering your vehicle
vehicle safety, consult an authorized Sprinter Mercedes-Benz may ask its authorized Sprinter
dealer to have the problems diagnosed and rec- dealers to carry out technical inspections on
tified. If the problem is not resolved to your sat- certain vehicles. This is always the case if the
isfaction, consult an authorized Sprinter dealer quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a
again or write to one of the following addresses. result of the inspection. Mercedes-Benz can
In the USA only inform you about vehicle checks if it has
Customer Assistance Center your registration data.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Your registration data is not stored if:
One Mercedes Drive Ryou did not purchase your vehicle at an
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 authorized Sprinter Dealer
In Canada Ryour vehicle has never been inspected at an
Customer Relations Department authorized Sprinter Dealer
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. It is advisable to register your vehicle with an
98 Vanderhoof Avenue authorized Sprinter Dealer. Inform an author-
ized Sprinter dealer as soon as possible about
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 any change of address or vehicle ownership.
Reporting malfunctions relevant to Attachments, bodies, equipment and

safety conversions
USA only:
Information about body/equipment
The following text is published as required of all
manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Fed- mounting directives
eral Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the ! For safety reasons, have add-on equipment
"National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of manufactured and installed according to the
1966". Sprinter body/equipment mounting direc-
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect tives in force. These body/equipment mount-
which could cause a crash or could cause injury ing directives ensure that the chassis and the
or death, you should immediately inform the body form one unit and that maximum oper-
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration ating and road safety is achieved.
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz We recommend for safety reasons that:
USA, LL.
Ryou carry out no other modifications to the
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety vehicle.
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order Ryou obtain the agreement of the distributor
a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA named on the inside of the front cover for
cannot become involved in individual problems any deviations from the approved body/
between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz equipment mounting directives.
USA, LL. Approval from certified inspection agencies
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle or official approvals cannot rule out risks to
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 your safety.
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// Please observe the information concerning
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts (Y page 29).
Introduction 29
Further information can be obtained at any Notes on the radiator

authorized Sprinter Dealer.
Even seemingly small changes to the vehicle,
G WARNING such as attaching a radiator trim for winter driv-
The function of systems or components can ing, is not permitted. Do not cover up the radi-
ator. Do not use thermal mats, insect protection
be affected by conversions or modifications
covers or anything similar.
to the vehicle. They might not function prop-
Otherwise, the values of the diagnostic system
erly anymore and/or jeopardize the opera- may be affected. Some of these values are
tional safety of the vehicle. There is an legally prescribed and must always be correct.
increased risk of an accident and injury.
Conversions or modifications should always Information on the cargo compartment
be carried out at qualified specialist work- floor
shop.
! The wooden or plastic cargo area floor fitted
If you intend to make modifications to your vehi- at the factory is an integral component of the
cle, we strongly recommend that you contact vehicle structure. The vehicle body could be
the distributor named on the inside of the front damaged if you have the load area floor
cover. There you will receive all the necessary removed. This then affects the securing of
information and a charge may be levied. loads and the maximum loading capacity of
the lashing points is no longer guaranteed.
You alone accept the responsibility if body man-
ufacturers or dealers make modifications that Therefore, do not have the load area floor
affect the final certification of the engine, the removed.
vehicle or the equipment. This also applies to
the identification and documentation of modifi-
cations to the affected vehicle components. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
You are responsible for certification and confir-
mation that: ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-
Rall the applicable standards and regulations ces, as well as control units and sensors for
that are affected by the vehicle modification these restraint systems, may be installed in
are met the following areas of your vehicle:
Rthe modified vehicle fulfills the vehicle safety Rdoors
standards and emissions laws and regula- Rdoor pillars
tions Rdoor sills
Rthe modifications or installation of accesso-
Rseats
ries does not affect the safety of the vehicle
Rcockpit
We are not responsible for the final certification,
Rinstrument cluster
product liability or warranty claims which result
from the modifications. This applies to: Rcenter console
Rthe modified components, assemblies or sys- Do not install accessories such as audio sys-
tems tems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs
or welding. You could impair the operating
Rany resulting noncompliance with any of the
efficiency of the restraint systems.
emissions laws and regulations or the motor
vehicle safety standards Have aftermarket accessories installed at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Rany consequences arising from the changes
that make the vehicle less safe or even render H Environmental note
it defective
We supply reconditioned assemblies and
We do not assume responsibility as the final- parts which are of the same quality as new
stage manufacturer or for the consequential
product liability. parts. The same New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty applies as for new parts.
Z
30 Introduction
The operating safety of the vehicle could be Data stored in the vehicle
jeopardized if you use parts, tires and wheels as
well as accessories relevant to safety which Information from electronic control
have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This units
could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant
systems, e.g. the brake system. Only use genu- There are electronic control units installed in
ine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal qual- your vehicle. Some of these are necessary for
ity. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that your vehicle to operate safely, while some offer
have been specifically approved for your vehi- support during driving (driver assistance sys-
cle. tems). In addition, your vehicle offers comfort
We test genuine Sprinter parts, as well as con- and entertainment functions that are also made
version parts and accessories that have been possible by electronic control units.
specifically approved for the type of vehicle, for: Electronic control units contain data storage
RReliability
systems that can temporarily or permanently
save technical information concerning the vehi-
RSafety
cle's condition, component stress and mainte-
RSuitability nance requirements as well as technical events
Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes- and malfunctions.
Benz is unable to assess other parts. Therefore, This information generally documents the con-
we accept no responsibility for the use of such dition of a component, a module, a system or the
parts in Sprinter vehicles, even if they have been surroundings, for example:
officially approved or independently approved ROperating conditions of system components
by a testing center.
(e.g. levels, battery status, tire pressure)
In some countries, certain parts are only offi- RStatus messages concerning the vehicle or its
cially approved for installation or modification if
individual components (e.g. wheel revolution
they comply with legal requirements. All genu-
number / speed, deceleration in movement,
ine Sprinter parts satisfy these requirements.
lateral acceleration, display showing fastened
Make sure that all parts are suitable for your
belts)
vehicle.
RMalfunctions and defects in key system com-
Always specify the vehicle identification number
ponents (e.g. lights, brakes)
(VIN) and engine number when ordering genuine
Sprinter parts (Y page 276). RInformation about events leading to vehicle
damage
RSystem responses in special driving situa-
QR code for rescue card tions (e.g. air bag deployment, intervention of
stability control systems)
RAmbient conditions (e.g. temperature, rain
The QR Code stickers are affixed to the B-pillar
sensor)
on the driver's and front-passenger side.
In addition to performing the actual control unit
In the event of an accident the rescue services
function, these data are used by manufacturers
use the QR Code to quickly find the rescue card
to detect and rectify malfunctions and to opti-
for your vehicle. The current rescue card con-
mize vehicle functions. Most of these data are
tains the most important information on your
volatile and processed only in the vehicle itself.
vehicle, e.g. the electric cable routes, in a com-
Only a small part of the data is stored in event or
pact form.
malfunction memories.
Further information can be found at http://
When you use services, the technical data from
www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.
the vehicle can be read out by service network
employees or third parties. Service activities
include repairs, maintenance, warranty claims
and quality assurance measures. The data are
read out via the connection for OBD (on-board
diagnostics) in the vehicle, which is required by
law. The relevant offices in the service network
or third parties collect, process and use the
Introduction 31
data. These data document the vehicle's tech- This allows you to use selected apps on your
nical states, are used to help in finding malfunc- smartphone, such as navigation or music play-
tions and improving quality and are sent to the back. There is no additional interaction between
manufacturer where necessary. In addition, the the smartphone and the vehicle, particularly
manufacturer is subject to product liability. The active access to vehicle data. The type of addi-
manufacturer needs technical data from vehi- tional data processing is determined by the pro-
cles for this purpose. vider of the app being used. Whether you can
Malfunction memories in the vehicle can be configure settings for it and, if so, which ones,
reset by a service center during repair or service depends on the app and your smartphone's
work. operating system.
You can incorporate data into the vehicle's com-
fort and infotainment functions yourself as part
of the selected equipment. Service provider
These include:
Wireless network connection
RMultimedia data such as music, films or pho-
tos for playback in an integrated multimedia If your vehicle has a wireless network connec-
system tion, it enables data to be exchanged between
RAddress book data for use in conjunction with your vehicle and other systems. The wireless
an integrated hands-free system or an inte- network connection is enabled by either an in-
grated navigation system vehicle transmitter and receiver or your own
RNavigation destinations that have been
mobile end device (e.g. smartphone). Online
functions can be used via this wireless connec-
entered
tion. These include online services and applica-
RData about using Internet services tions/apps provided by the manufacturer or
These data can be saved locally in the vehicle or other providers.
are located on a device that you have connected
to the vehicle. If these data are saved in the Manufacturer's own services
vehicle, you can delete them at any time. These
data are sent to third parties only at your In the case of the manufacturer's online serv-
request, particularly when you use online services, the manufacturer describes the functions
ices in accordance with the settings that you in a suitable place and the associated informa-
have selected. tion subject to data protection legislation. Per-
You can save and change comfort settings/ sonal data can be used in the provision of online
customizations in the vehicle at any time. services. Data are exchanged via a secure con-
Depending on the equipment, these settings nection (e.g. using the IT system specially pro-
include: vided for this purpose by the manufacturer).
Collecting, processing and using personal data
RSeat and steering wheel position settings beyond the provision of services is permitted
RSuspension and climate control settings only on the basis of a statutory permit or decla-
RCustom settings such as interior lighting ration of consent.
If your vehicle is equipped appropriately, you You can usually activate and deactivate the serv-
can connect your smartphone or another mobile ices and functions (some of which are subject to
terminal to the vehicle. You can control this by charge). In many cases, this also applies to the
means of the control elements integrated in the vehicle's entire data connection. However, this
vehicle. The smartphone's picture and sound does not apply in particular to legally prescribed
can be output via the multimedia system. Spe- functions and services such as the "eCall" emer-
cific items of information are also sent to your gency call system.
smartphone.
Depending on the type of integration, such infor- Services from third parties
mation includes:
If it is possible to use online services from other
RGeneral vehicle information providers, these services are the responsibility
RPosition data of the provider in question and subject to that
provider's data protection conditions and terms
Z
32 Introduction
of use. The manufacturer has no influence over

the content exchanged here.
For this reason, please ask the service provider
for information about the type, extent and pur-
pose of the collection and use of personal data
when services are provided by third parties.
Cockpit 33
Cockpit
At a glance
Function Page Function Page
: Door control panel 39 G PARKTRONIC warning dis-
play 150
; Light switch 82
H Opens/closes the right-hand
= Combination switch side window 72
• turn signals 84
• high-beam headlamps 84 I Stowage compartment (jack
and vehicle tool kit) 241
• windshield wipers 96
• rear window wiper 97 J Glove box 205
? Cruise control lever 139 K Center console 37
A Steering wheel without or L Selector lever (automatic
with buttons 37 transmission) 123
B Instrument cluster 34 M Ignition lock 119
C Stowage compartment N Further control panels 39
• 3.5 mm audio jack 212 O Steering wheel buttons 37
• USB port 212
P Engages/releases the park-
D Timer for the auxiliary warming brake 135
air heater (auxiliary heating) 114
Q Horn
E • Stowage compartment
with interior light 87 R Opens the hood 219
• Overhead control panel 38 S Steering wheel buttons 37
F Rear-view mirror 80
34 Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
Displays and controls
At a glance
Instrument cluster on vehicles without steering wheel buttons
Instrument cluster in vehicles with steering-wheel buttons

: Speedometer 161 B Reset button 9 34
; Tachometer 161 C Menu button 4
= f, g Brightens/dims the • changes standard display 162
instrument cluster lighting 161 • selects menus 163
? Fuel gauge with fuel filler flap D Service button Ë

location indicator 161 Checks the engine oil level 221
A Display
Vehicles without steering
wheel buttons 162
Vehicles with steering wheel
buttons 163
Instrument cluster 35
Indicator and warning lamps
At a glance
Instrument cluster on vehicles without steering wheel buttons
Instrument cluster in vehicles with steering-wheel buttons

: Speedometer with warn- b Brake fluid level too low 197
ing and indicator lamps EBD malfunctioning 196
d ESP® warning lamp 195 Trailer brake force booster
malfunction 197
ASR warning lamp 195
4 Engine oil level warning 200
% Coolant level too low 200
; Check Engine indicator lamp 201
? Coolant temperature too
high 200 % Preglow 120
6 Restraint systems malfunc- Preglow system malfunction 202
tion 41 ; Indicator and warning
Ä Indicator lamp, distance lamps
warning 195 G Left-hand turn signal 84
· Warning lamp, distance ! ABS malfunction 196
warning 195
h Tire pressure loss or the tire
Ã Warning and indicator lamps, pressure monitor is malfunc-
Lane Keeping Assist 146 tioning (USA only) 202
Tire pressure loss (Canada
only) 256

¦ Fluid level too low in wind- : Water in the fuel 203
shield washer/headlamp
At a glance
cleaning system 203 m Fuel filter dirty 203
å DEF supply low or contami- # The charging process is mal-

nated/diluted 161 functioning 199
Exhaust gas aftertreatment b Bulb defective 203
malfunction 198
= Tachometer with warning
Ä Indicator lamp, distance and indicator lamps
warning 195
c Parking brake applied 135
· Warning lamp, distance
warning 195 L Low-beam headlamps on 82
Ã Warning and indicator lamps, K Working speed governor
Lane Keeping Assist 146 (ADR) on 153
1 Door or hood open 203 Ð Power steering assistance
Electrically operated step malfunction 204
malfunction 204 K High-beam headlamps on
# Brake pads/linings worn 199 (vehicle without steering
wheel buttons) 84
+ LOW RANGE active 147
å DEF supply low or contami-
K High-beam headlamps on nated/diluted 161
(vehicle with steering wheel Exhaust gas aftertreatment
buttons) 84 malfunction 198
J Right-hand turn signal 84 | Reserve fuel 201
: ASR malfunction 55 Fuel filler cap open 201
BAS malfunction 196 h ESP® malfunction 195
h ESP® malfunction 195 7 Fasten seat belts 203
È Dirt accumulation in air filter 202
6 Reserve fuel 161
Fuel filler cap open 201
i Corresponding messages may also be

shown in the display (Y page 175).
Center console 37
Steering wheel buttons Center console
At a glance
Function Page
: Display 163
On-board computer opera-
tion
; Selects a submenu or adjusts Function Page
the volume 163
: Stowage compartment 206
W Up/increases the vol-
ume ; Audio 10 or Audio 15 (see the
X Down/reduces the vol- separate operating instruc-
ume tions)
Using the telephone 173 = Air-conditioning control
6 Accepts a call/starts panel 99
dialing Paper holder1 208
~ Ends a call/rejects an
incoming call ? Center console control
panel
= Scrolls from one menu to
another 163 c Switches the left/right-hand
V Forwards seat heating on/off 79
U Back z Switches the windshield
Scrolls within a menu 163 heating on/off 105
9 Forwards | Switches the rear window
: Back defroster on/off 105
f Activates/deactivates
PARKTRONIC 152
£ Switches the hazard warning
lamps on/off 85
1 Only on vehicles without rear-compartment climate control.

38 Overhead control panel
Function Page Overhead control panel

à Activates/deactivates ASR 55
At a glance
Ã Central locking
Ä 65
æ Activates/deactivates the
distance warning function 142
j Activates/deactivates Lane
Keeping Assist 146
k Activates/deactivates Blind
Spot Assist 143
A Stowage compartment Function Page
B Cup holder with: 209 : Microphone for the mobile
• Ashtray 210 phone 211
• Cigarette lighter 210 ; Switches the reading lamp
C 12-V socket 211 on and off, right 87
= Switches the automatic inte-
rior lighting on and off 87
? • Eyeglasses compartment
or 206
• Anti-Theft Alarm system
(ATA) 58
A Switches the interior lighting
on and off 87
B Switches the reading lamp
on and off, left 87
Further control panels 39
Door control panel Further control panels

Control panel between the light
At a glance
switch and the steering wheel
Function Page
: Adjusts the exterior mirrors 80
; Selects an exterior mirror 80 Function Page
= Opens/closes the left-hand y Switches the auxiliary heat-

side window 72 ing on/off 109
? Opens/closes the right-hand ± Switches the heater booster

side window 72 function on/off 112
E Sets the working speed
F 153
E Switches the working speed
governor (ADR) on/off 153
´ Ventilates the cargo com-
· partment 117
40 Further control panels
Control panel between the steering

wheel and the ignition lock
At a glance
Function Page
l Switches the central rear
k compartment lighting on/off 87
; Engages/disengages all-
wheel drive 147
m Activates/deactivates LOW
RANGE transmission ratio 147
Occupant safety 41
Useful information ever, seat belts and air bags generally do not
protect against objects penetrating the vehicle
from the outside.
This Operator's Manual describes all models as
well as standard and optional equipment of your Information on restraint system operation can
vehicle that were available at the time of going be found under "Triggering of the Emergency
to print. Country-specific variations are possi- Tensioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 47).
Safety
ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped See "Children in the vehicle" for information on
with all of the described functions. This also children traveling with you in the vehicle as well
applies to systems and functions relevant to as on child restraint systems (Y page 49).
safety.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops (Y page 27). Important safety notes
G WARNING
Occupant safety Modifications to the restraint system may
cause it to no longer work as intended. The
Restraint system introduction restraint system may then not perform its
The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi- intended protective function and may fail in an
cle occupants coming into contact with parts of accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.
the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even
The restraint system can also reduce the forces fatal injury.
to which vehicle occupants are subjected during
an accident. Never modify parts of the restraint system.
The restraint system comprises: Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic
components or their software.
RSeat belt system
RAir bags If it is necessary to modify components of the
RChild restraint system restraint system to accommodate a person with
RChild seat securing systems disabilities, contact an authorized Sprinter
The components of the restraint system work in dealer for details. USA only: contact our Cus-
conjunction with each other. They can only tomer Assistance Center at 1‑877‑762‑8267 for
deploy their protective function if, at all times, all details.
vehicle occupants:
Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly
(Y page 43) Restraint system warning lamp
Rhave the seat and head restraint adjusted The functions of the restraint system are
properly (Y page 74) checked after the ignition is switched on and at
As the driver, you also have to make sure that regular intervals while the engine is running.
the steering wheel is adjusted correctly. Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in
Observe the information relating to the correct good time.
driver's seat position (Y page 74). The 6 restraint system warning lamp on the
You also have to make sure that an air bag can instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is
inflate properly if deployed (Y page 45). switched on. It goes out no later than a few sec-
An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat onds after the vehicle is started. The compo-
belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag nents of the restraint system are in operational
increases the level of protection for vehicle readiness.
occupants in the event of an accident. For exam-
ple, if, in the event of an accident, the protection
offered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bags
are not deployed. When an accident occurs, only
the air bags that increase protection in that par-
ticular accident situation are deployed. How-
Z
42 Occupant safety
A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extrac-
system warning lamp: ted any further.
Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switched The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens the
on seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt close
Rdoes not go out after a few seconds against the body. However it does not pull the
vehicle occupant back in the direction of the
Rgoes out but then lights up again while the
Safety
backrest.
engine is running, for example
The Emergency Tensioning Device does not cor-
G WARNING rect an incorrect seat position or the routing of
an incorrectly fastened seat belt.
If the restraint system is malfunctioning,
restraint system components may be trig- When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps to
reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on the
gered unintentionally or may not deploy as vehicle occupant.
intended during an accident. This can affect The seat belt force limiters are synchronized
for example the Emergency Tensioning with the front air bags which absorb part of the
Device or the air bag. This poses an increased deceleration force. This can reduce the force
risk of injury or even fatal injury. exerted on the vehicle occupants during an acci-
Have the restraint system checked and dent.
repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as The Emergency Tensioning Device of the front-
passenger seat is triggered independently of the
soon as possible.
lock status of the seat belt.
Important safety notes

Seat belts
The use of seat belts and child restraint systems
Introduction is required by law in:
Rall 50 states
Seat belts are the most effective means of
restricting the movement of vehicle occupants Rthe U.S. territories
in the event of an accident or the vehicle rolling Rthe District of Columbia
over. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants Rall Canadian provinces
coming into contact with parts of the vehicle
Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle
interior or being ejected from the vehicle. Fur-
occupants should correctly fasten their seat
thermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle
belts before starting the journey.
occupant in the best position in relation to the
air bag. G WARNING
The seat belt system comprises: If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot
RSeat belts perform its intended protective function. An
REmergency Tensioning Devices for the front incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause
seat belts injuries, for example, in the event of an acci-
The seat belt system also includes a seat belt dent or when braking or changing direction
force limiter for the relevant seat if the vehicle abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury
is equipped with a front air bag.
or even fatal injury.
On vehicles with a front-passenger bench
seat, only the seat belt of the outer front- Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
passenger seat has a seat belt force limiter. their seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-
The seat belt system does not include an Emer- ting properly.
gency Tensioning Device and a seat belt force
limiter if the vehicle does not have a driver's air
bag.
If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outlet
quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt
Occupant safety 43
The components of the restraint system work in system manufacturer's installation and oper-
conjunction with each other. They can only ating instructions
deploy their protective function if, at all times, all
vehicle occupants: G WARNING
Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly The seat belts may not perform their intended
(Y page 43) protective function if:
Safety
Rhave the seat and head restraint adjusted Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely
properly (Y page 74) dirty, bleached or dyed
G WARNING Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or
The seat belt does not offer the intended level extremely dirty
of protection if you have not moved the back- Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt
rest to an almost vertical position. When brak- anchorages or inertia reels have been modi-
ing or in the event of an accident, you could fied.
slide underneath the seat belt and sustain Seat belts may be damaged in an accident,
abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This although the damage may not be visible, e.g.
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal due to splinters of glass. Modified or damaged
injury. seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident.
Adjust the seat properly before beginning Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices
your journey. Always ensure that the backrest could accidentally trigger or fail to deploy
is in an almost vertical position and that the when necessary. This poses an increased risk
shoulder section of your seat belt is routed of injury or even fatal injury.
across the center of your shoulder. Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-
sioning Devices, belt anchorages and inertia
G WARNING reels. Make sure that the seat belts are
Persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannot undamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-
wear the seat belt correctly without an addi- ing an accident, have the seat belts checked
tional and suitable restraint system. If the immediately at a qualified specialist work-
seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot per- shop.
form its intended protective function. An
incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause Only use seat belts that have been approved for
injuries, for example, in the event of an acci- your vehicle by the sales organization named on
the inside cover.
dent or when braking or changing direction
abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury
Proper use of the seat belts
or even fatal injury.
For this reason, always secure persons under Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable additional restraint (Y page 42).
systems. All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seat
belt correctly before beginning the journey. Also
If a child younger than twelve years old and make sure that all vehicle occupants are always
under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicle
vehicle: is in motion.
When fastening the seat belt, always make sure
Ralways secure the child in a child restraint that:
system suitable for this vehicle. The child
restraint system must be appropriate to the Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is inserted only
age, weight and size of the child into the belt buckle belonging to that seat
Ralways observe the instructions and safety Rthe seat belt is pulled tight across your body
notes on "Children in the vehicle" Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter
(Y page 49) in addition to the child restraint coat.
Z
44 Occupant safety
Rthe seat belt is not twisted

Only then can the forces which occur be dis-
tributed over the area of the belt.
Rthe shoulder section of the belt is routed
across the center of your shoulder
The shoulder section of the seat belt should
Safety
not touch your neck or be routed under your

arm or behind your back. Where possible,
adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height.
Rthe lap belt is taut and passes across your lap
as low down as possible
The lap belt must always be routed across
your hip joints and not across your abdomen.
This applies particularly to pregnant women.
If necessary, push the lap belt down to your
hip joint and pull it tight using the shoulder
section of the belt.
Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, poin- Basic illustration
ted or fragile objects
X Adjust the seat (Y page 74).
If you have such items located on or in your The seat backrest must be in an almost
clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, store upright position.
these in a suitable place.
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from belt outlet =
Ronly one person is using a seat belt
and engage belt tongue ; into belt
Infants and children must never travel sitting buckle :.
on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event X If necessary, pull up on the shoulder section
of an accident, they could be crushed of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your
between the vehicle occupant and seat belt. body.
Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if
the seat belt is also being used by one of the
vehicle's occupants
Also ensure that there are never objects
between a person and the seat, e.g. cushions.
Seat belts are only intended to secure and
restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the
"Loading guidelines" for securing objects, lug-
gage or loads (Y page 213).
Fastening and adjusting seat belts

Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(Y page 42) and the notes on correct use of seat The shoulder section of the seat belt must
belts (Y page 43). always be routed across the center of the shoul-
der. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary.
X To raise: slide belt outlet = up.
The belt outlet will engage in various posi-
tions.
X To lower: hold belt outlet release ? and slide
belt outlet = down.
X Let go of belt outlet release ? in the desired
position and make sure that the belt outlet
engages.
Occupant safety 45
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are Air bags
equipped with a special seat belt retractor to
securely fasten child restraint systems in the Introduction
vehicle. Further information can be found under
"Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 49). The installation point of an air bag can be rec-
ognized by the SRS/AIRBAG or AIRBAG mark-
ing.
Safety
Releasing seat belts
An air bag complements the correctly fastened
! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. The
Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be air bag provides additional protection in appli-
trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. cable accident situations.
This could damage the door, the door trim Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The
panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts different air bag systems function independ-
can no longer fulfill their protective function ently from one another (Y page 47).
and must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe- However, no system available today can com-
cialist workshop. pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.
X Press the release button in the belt buckle, It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury
hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the belt caused by an air bag due to the high speed at
back. which the air bag must be deployed.
Belt warning for drivers and front pas- Important safety notes
sengers
G WARNING
The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru- If you do not sit in the correct seat position,
ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occu-
pants must wear their seat belts. It may light up the air bag cannot protect as intended and
continuously or flash. In addition, there may be could even cause additional injury when
a warning tone. deployed. This poses an increased risk of
Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt has injury or even fatal injury.
already been fastened, the 7 seat belt warn- To avoid hazardous situations, always make
ing lamp lights up for 6 seconds after each time sure that all of the vehicle's occupants:
the ignition is switched on. After the engine has
been started, it goes out once the driver has Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly,
fastened the seat belt. including pregnant women
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened when the Rare sitting correctly and maintain the great-
engine is started, an additional warning tone will est possible distance to the air bags
sound. This warning tone stops after a maximum
of six seconds or once the driver's seat belt is Rfollow the following instructions
fastened. Always make sure that there are no objects
If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph between the air bag and the vehicle's occu-
(25 km/h) once and the driver's seat belt is not pants.
fastened, a warning tone sounds. The warning
tone sounds for 60 seconds or until the driver's RAdjust the seats properly before beginning
seat belt is fastened. your journey. Always make sure that the seat
If the driver's seat belt is unfastened during the is in an almost upright position. The center of
journey, the seat belt warning is activated again. the head restraint must support the head at
about eye level.
RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats
as far back as possible. The driver's seat posi-
tion must allow the vehicle to be driven safely.
ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside.
This allows the air bag to be fully deployed.
Z
46 Occupant safety
RAlways lean against the backrest while driv- function correctly. There is an increased risk
ing. Do not lean forward or lean against the of injury.
door or side window. You may otherwise be in
the deployment area of the air bags. Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects
RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front to it.
of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dash-
Safety
board, for example. Your feet may otherwise G WARNING

be in the deployment area of the air bag. Sensors to control the air bags are located in
RFor this reason, always secure persons less
the doors. Modifications or work not per-
than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint sys-
tems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot formed correctly to the doors or door panel-
be worn correctly. ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the
If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also function of the sensors being impaired. The air
observe the following notes: bags might therefore not function properly
RAlways secure children under twelve years of
anymore. Consequently, the air bags cannot
age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable protect vehicle occupants as they are
child restraint systems. designed to do. There is an increased risk of
RChild restraint systems should be installed on injury.
the rear seats. Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
RAlways secure a child in a rearward-facing Always have work on the doors or door pan-
child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-
The front-passenger front air bag cannot be shop.
deactivated.
RAlways observe the instructions and safety
notes on "Children in the vehicle" Front air bags
(Y page 49) and on the "Child restraint sys-
tem on the front-passenger seat"
(Y page 52) in addition to the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation and oper-
ating instructions.
Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent
an air bag from functioning correctly. Before
starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting
from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make
sure that:
Rthere are no people, animals or objects
between the vehicle occupants and an air bag
Rthere are no objects between the seat, door Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the steer-
and B-pillar ing wheel. Front-passenger front air bag ;
Rthere are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, deploys in front of and above the glove box and
hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks the center console.
Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-
attached to the vehicle within the deployment tional head and thorax protection for the occu-
area of an air bag, e.g. to doors or side win- pants in the front seats.
dows
Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in Side impact air bags
the pockets of your clothing. Store such
objects in a suitable place Depending on the vehicle's equipment, some
front seats are equipped with a side impact air
G WARNING bag; see the AIRBAG label on the outer side of
If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects the seat backrest.
such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer
Occupant safety 47
G WARNING When deployed, the window curtain air bag

enhances the level of protection for the head.
Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre- However, it does not protect the chest or arms.
vent deployment of the air bags integrated If the restraint system control unit detects a side
into the seats. Consequently, the air bags impact, the window curtain air bag is deployed
cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are on the side on which the impact occurs.
Safety
designed to do. This poses an increased risk If the system determines that they can offer
of injury or even fatal injury. additional protection to that provided by the
Only use seat covers that have been approved seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be
deployed in other accident situations
for your vehicle by the sales organization (Y page 47).
named on the inside front cover.
Deployment of Emergency Tensioning

Devices and air bags
G WARNING
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has
been deployed. There is a risk of injury.
Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a
deployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop as soon as possible.
Side impact air bags : deploy next to the outer
bolster of the seat backrest.
G WARNING
When deployed, the side impact air bag offers
additional thorax protection. However, it does A deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-
not protect the: tection and cannot provide the intended pro-
RHead tection in an accident. There is an increased
RNeck risk of injury.
RArms Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special-
If the restraint system control unit detects a side ist workshop in order to have a deployed air
impact, the side impact air bag is deployed on bag replaced.
the side on which the impact occurs.
It is important for your safety and that of your
Window curtain air bags passenger to have deployed air bags replaced
and to have any malfunctioning air bags
repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags
continue to perform their protective function for
the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash.
G WARNING
Emergency Tensioning Devices that have
deployed pyrotechnically are no longer opera-
tional and are unable to perform their inten-
ded protective function. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Have pyrotechnically triggered Emergency
Tensioning Devices replaced immediately at a
Window curtain air bags : are integrated into
the side of the roof frame above the front doors. qualified specialist workshop.
Z
48 Occupant safety
If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered If the restraint system control unit detects a
or air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang, more severe accident, further components of
and some powder may also be released. The the restraint system are activated independ-
6 restraint system warning lamp lights up. ently of each other in certain frontal collision
Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hear- situations:
ing. The powder that is released generally does RFront air bags
Safety
not constitute a health hazard, but it may cause RWindow curtain air bag on the side on which
short-term breathing difficulties in people with the impact occurs
asthma or other respiratory problems. Provided
it is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicle The activation threshold of the Emergency Ten-
immediately or open the window in order to pre- sioning Devices and the air bags is determined
vent breathing difficulties. by evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration or
acceleration which occurs at various points in
Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in
Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material, nature. Deployment should take place in good
which may require special handling and regard time at the start of the collision.
for the environment. National guidelines must
be observed during disposal. In California, see The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration
www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ and the direction of the force are essentially
Perchlorate/index.cfm. determined by:
Rthe distribution of forces during the collision
Method of operation Rthe collision angle
Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle
During the first stage of a collision, the restraint
Rthe characteristics of the object with which
system control unit evaluates important physi-
cal data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel- the vehicle has collided
eration, such as: Factors which can only be seen and measured
after a collision has occurred do not play a deci-
Rduration
sive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor do
Rdirection they provide an indication of air bag deploy-
Rintensity ment.
Based on the evaluation of this data, the The vehicle can be deformed considerably, with-
restraint system control unit triggers the Emer- out an air bag being deployed. This is the case if
gency Tensioning Devices during a frontal or only parts which are relatively easily deformed
rear collision. are affected and the rate of deceleration is not
An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be high. Conversely, air bags may be deployed even
triggered, if: though the vehicle suffers only minor deforma-
tion. This is the case if, for example, very rigid
Rthe ignition is switched on
vehicle parts such as longitudinal body mem-
Rthe components of the restraint system are bers are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs
operational. You can find further information as a result.
under "Restraint system warning lamp" If the restraint system control unit detects a side
(Y page 41) impact or if the vehicle rolls over, the applicable
Rthe seat belt buckle tongue has engaged in components of the restraint system are
the belt buckle of the respective front seat deployed independently of each other depend-
The Emergency Tensioning Device of the front- ing on the apparent type of accident.
passenger seat is triggered independently of the RSide impact air bag on the side of impact,
lock status of the seat belt. independently of the Emergency Tensioning
Device and the use of the seat belt
RWindow curtain air bag on the side of impact,
independently of the use of the seat belt and
independently of whether the front-
passenger seat is occupied
Children in the vehicle 49
REmergency Tensioning Devices, if the system In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
determines that deployment can offer addi- ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
tional protection in this situation
an accident and injury.
RWindow curtain air bags on the driver's and
front-passenger side in certain situations When leaving the vehicle, always take the
when the vehicle rolls over, if the system SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
Safety
determines that deployment can offer addi- leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
tional protection to that provided by the seat
belt G WARNING
i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. If persons, particularly children are subjected
The different air bag systems work independ- to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
ently of each other. cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
How the air bag system works is determined fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
by the severity of the accident detected,
especially the vehicle deceleration or accel- vehicle.
eration and the apparent type of accident:
RFrontal collision
G WARNING
RSide impact If the child restraint system is subjected to
RRollover
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
dren may burn themselves on these parts,
particularly on the metal parts of the child
Children in the vehicle restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
Important safety notes you, always ensure that the child restraint
Accident statistics show that children secured system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-
in the rear seats are safer than children secured tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, we restraint system has been exposed to direct
strongly advise that you install a child restraint sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
system on a rear seat. Children are generally child in it. Never leave children unattended in
better protected there.
the vehicle.
If a child younger than twelve years old and
under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
vehicle: their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting
Ralways secure the child in a child restraint properly. Particular attention must be paid to
system suitable for this vehicle. The child children.
restraint system must be appropriate to the Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
age, weight and size of the child (Y page 42) and the notes on correct use of seat
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety belts (Y page 43).
notes in this section in addition to the child A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
restraint system manufacturer's installation proper seat belt positioning for children over
instructions 41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where a
G WARNING three-point seat belt can be properly fastened
without a booster seat.
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
Rrelease the parking brake. Special seatbelt retractor
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the G WARNING
parking position P.
If the seat belt is released while driving, the
Rstart the engine. child restraint system will no longer be
Z
50 Children in the vehicle
secured properly. The special seat belt retrac- You can obtain further information about the
tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a correct child restraint system from any author-
ized Sprinter Dealer.
portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot
be immediately refastened. There is an G WARNING
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. If the child restraint system is installed incor-
Safety
Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten- rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as
tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate intended. The child cannot then be restrained
the special seat belt retractor and secure the in the event of an accident, heavy braking or
child restraint system properly. sudden changes of direction. There is an
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driver's Make sure that you observe the child restraint
seat belt, are equipped with a special seat belt
retractor. When activated, the special seat belt system manufacturer's installation instruc-
retractor ensures that the seat belt cannot tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,
slacken once the child seat is secured. that the base of the child restraint system is
Installing a child restraint system: always resting completely on the seat cush-
X Make sure you observe the child restraint
ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under
system manufacturer's installation instruc- or behind the child restraint system. Only use
tions. child restraint systems with the original cover
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt out- designed for them. Only replace damaged
let. covers with genuine covers.
X Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle.
Activating the special seat belt retractor:

G WARNING
If the child restraint system is installed incor-
X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia
reel retract it again. rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in
While the seat belt is retracting, you should the event of an accident, heavy braking or a
hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt sudden change in direction. The child
retractor is enabled. restraint system could be thrown about, strik-
X Push the child restraint system down so that ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased
the seat belt is tight and does not loosen. risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Removing the child restraint system and deac- Always install child restraint systems prop-
tivating the special seat belt retractor: erly, even if they are not being used. Make
X Make sure you observe the child restraint sure that you observe the child restraint sys-
system manufacturer's installation instruc- tem manufacturer's installation instructions.
tions.
X Press the release button of the seat belt You will find further information on stowing
buckle and guide the seat belt tongue back objects, luggage or loads under "Loading guide-
towards the belt sash guide. lines" (Y page 213).
The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.
G WARNING
Child restraint systems or their securing sys-
Child restraint system tems which have been damaged or subjected
to a load in an accident can no longer protect
The use of seat belts and child restraint systems as intended. The child cannot then be
is required by law in: restrained in the event of an accident, heavy
Rall 50 states braking or sudden changes of direction. There
Rthe U.S. territories is an increased risk of injury, possibly even
Rthe District of Columbia fatal.
Rall Canadian provinces
Replace child restraint systems which have If the child and the child restraint system
been damaged or subjected to a load in an together weigh more than 65 lbs (29 kg), only
accident as soon as possible. Have the secur- use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint sys-
ing systems on the child restraint system tems with which the child is also secured with
checked at a qualified specialist workshop, the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child
before you install a child restraint system restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if
Safety
again. available.
The securing systems of child restraint systems Always comply with the manufacturer's instal-
are: lation and operating instructions for the child
Rthe seat belt system restraint system used.
Rthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-
type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged
Rthe Top Tether anchorage
correctly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
i If it is absolutely necessary to install a child rings
restraint system on the front-passenger seat, ! When installing the child restraint system,
always observe the information on "Child make sure that the seat belt for the middle
restraint systems on the front-passenger seat does not get trapped. The seat belt could
seat" (Y page 52). otherwise be damaged.
All child restraint systems must meet the fol-
lowing standards:
RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 225
RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 210.2
Confirmation that the child restraint system cor-
responds to the standards can be found on an
instruction label on the child restraint system.
This confirmation can also be found in the instal-
lation instructions that are included with the
child restraint system.
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte- X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
rior and on the child restraint system. system on both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
rings :.
ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur- specially designed child restraint systems on
ing system the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
rings : for a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
G WARNING restraint system are installed between the seat
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems cushion and the seat backrest:
do not offer sufficient protection for children Ron the outer left and right seat on rear bench
whose weight combined with the child seats with 3 seats
restraint system is greater than 65 lbs (29 kg) Ron the outer left seat on rear bench seats with
and who are secured using the safety belt 2 seats

integrated in the child restraint system. In the Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may also
be used and can be installed using the vehicle's
event of an accident, a child might not be seat belt system. Install the child seat according
restrained correctly. This poses an increased to the manufacturer's instructions.
risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Z
52 Children in the vehicle
Top Tether
Introduction
Top Tether provides an additional connection
between the child restraint system secured with
a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) system and the vehicle.
Safety
This helps reduce the risk of injury even further.

If the child restraint system is equipped with a
Top Tether belt, this should always be used.

X Move head restraint : up.
G WARNING
X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
If the Top Tether belt has been incorrectly system with Top Tether. Always comply with
secured, e.g. to an eyelet in the cargo com- the child restraint system manufacturer's
partment, the child restraint system is not installation instructions when doing so.
correctly kept in place. It therefore cannot X Route Top Tether belt ? under head
perform its intended protective function in the restraint : between the two head restraint
event of an accident. There is an increased bars.
risk of injury. X Hook Top Tether hook = into Top Tether
anchorage ;.
Only secure the Top Tether hook to the Top
Make sure that:
Tether anchorage intended for this purpose.
RTop Tether hook = is hooked into Top
Tether anchorage ; as shown.
Top Tether anchorages RTop Tether belt ? is not twisted
X Tension Top Tether belt ?. Always comply
with the child restraint system manufactur-
er's installation instructions when doing so.
X If necessary, move the head restraint back
down again slightly (Y page 78). Make sure
that you do not interfere with the correct rout-
ing of Top Tether belt ?.
Child restraint system on the front-

passenger seat
Example: rear bench seat with three seats General notes
Top Tether anchorages ; are on the bench seat
legs on the rear side of the respective rear bench Accident statistics show that children secured
seat. in the rear seats are safer than children secured
in the front-passenger seat. For this reason,
Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install
the child restraint system on a rear seat.
Rearward-facing child restraint system

The front-passenger front air bag cannot be
deactivated. Always install a rearward-facing
child restraint system on a suitable rear seat.
Always observe the child restraint system man-
ufacturer's installation and operating instruc- G WARNING

tions.
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
Forward-facing child restraint system
Rrelease the parking brake.
If it is absolutely necessary to install a forward-
facing child restraint system on the front- Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
Safety
passenger seat, always move the front- parking position P.
passenger seat as far back as possible. The Rstart the engine.
entire base of the child restraint system must
always rest on the seat cushion of the front- In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
passenger seat. The backrest of the child ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
restraint system must lie as flat as possible an accident and injury.
against the backrest of the front-passenger When leaving the vehicle, always take the
seat. The child restraint system must not be
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
subjected to a load by the head restraint. Adjust
the head restraint position accordingly. Always leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
make sure that the shoulder belt strap is cor-
rectly routed from the vehicle belt outlet to the G WARNING
shoulder belt guide on the child restraint sys- If persons, particularly children are subjected
tem. The shoulder belt strap must be routed
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
forward and down from the vehicle belt outlet. If
necessary, adjust the vehicle belt outlet and the cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
front-passenger seat accordingly. fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
Always observe the child restraint system man- vehicle.
ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-
tions. G WARNING
If the child restraint system is subjected to
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
Override features/Child-proof locks dren may burn themselves on these parts,
Important safety notes particularly on the metal parts of the child
restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
G WARNING If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
If children are traveling in the vehicle, they you, always ensure that the child restraint
could: system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-
Ropen doors, thus endangering other people tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
or road users restraint system has been exposed to direct
sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming
child in it. Never leave children unattended in
traffic
the vehicle.
Roperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Always activate the child-proof locks and
override feature if children are traveling in the
vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Child-proof locks for rear doors (Y page 54).
Z
54 Driving safety systems
Child-proof locks for the rear door Driving safety systems

Overview
In this section, you will find information about
the following driving safety systems:
Safety
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

RASR (Acceleration Skid Control)
RBAS (Brake Assist System)
REBD (Electronic Brake Force Distribution)
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Rear door
: Child safety bolt
2 Door secured – then make sure that the If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are
child-proof locks are working properly. inattentive, the driving safety systems can nei-
3 Door released ther reduce the risk of accident nor override the
laws of physics. Driving safety systems are
The child-proof lock on the doors enable you to merely aids designed to assist driving. You are
secure each door individually. responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
A door with an activated child-proof lock cannot front, for vehicle speed, braking in good time
be opened from the inside. If the vehicle is and for staying in your lane. Always adapt your
unlocked, the door can be opened from the out- driving style to the prevailing road and weather
side. conditions and maintain a sufficient, safe dis-
tance from other road users. Drive carefully.
Please note that the driving safety systems
Pets in the vehicle described only work optimally when:
Rthere is adequate contact between the tires
G WARNING and the road surface
Ryou use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow
If you leave animals unattended or unsecured
chains if necessary, when the road conditions
in the vehicle, they could press buttons or
are wintry
switches, for example.
Pay particular attention to the information
As a result, they could: regarding tires, tire tread and winter operation
Ractivate vehicle equipment and become under "Wheels and tires" (Y page 248).
trapped, for example
Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
endangering other road users
Unsecured animals could also be flung around Important safety notes
the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud- Observe the important safety guidelines for the
den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi- driving safety system (Y page 54).
cle occupants. There is a risk of an accident
and injury. G WARNING
Never leave animals unattended in the vehi- If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when
cle. Always secure animals properly during braking. The steerability and braking charac-
the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans- teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-
port box. ally, further driving safety systems are deac-
tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-
ding and accidents.
Driving safety systems 55
Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme- Vehicles without steering wheel buttons: if ASR
diately at a qualified specialist workshop. is malfunctioning, the : indicator lamp lights
up while the engine is running and the engine
If ABS is malfunctioning, other systems will also power may be reduced (Y page 196).
fail, including driving safety systems. Observe ASR significantly improves traction, i.e. the
the information relating to the ! warning transmission of power from the tires to the road
Safety
lamp (Y page 196). surface, and thus increases the vehicle's driving
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that stability. If the driving wheels start to spin, ASR
the wheels do not lock when you brake. This brakes individual drive wheels and limits the
allows you to continue steering the vehicle when engine torque. ASR thus significantly assists you
braking. when pulling away and accelerating, especially
on wet or slippery roads.
ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph
(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions. If traction on the road surface is not sufficient,
ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you even ASR will not allow you to pull away without
difficulty. The type of tires and total weight of the
only brake gently.
vehicle as well as the gradient of the road also
The yellow ! warning lamp in the instrument play a crucial role.
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched
If ASR intervenes, the d warning lamp in the
on. The lamp goes out when the engine starts
instrument cluster flashes.
running.
Braking Activating/deactivating ASR
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a G WARNING

pulsating in the brake pedal. If deactivated, ASR will not attempt to stabi-
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication lize the vehicle during pulling away and accel-
of hazardous road conditions and functions as a eration. There is an increased risk of skidding
reminder to take extra care while driving. and of an accident.
X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
Only deactivate ASR in the situations descri-
brake pedal with force until the braking sit-
uation is over. bed in the following.
X To make a full brake application: depress
the brake pedal with full force.
! If you deactivate ASR, ESP® will still inter-
vene to stabilize the vehicle. Frequent braking
automatically triggered by ESP® can damage
the brake system.
ASR (acceleration skid control) For this reason, deactivate ASR only briefly
and when absolutely necessary.
General notes
Observe the important safety guidelines for the
driving safety system (Y page 54).
ASR can neither reduce the risk of an accident
nor suspend the laws of physics if the driver
does not pay attention when pulling away or
accelerating. ASR is only an aid. Always adapt
your driving style to suit the prevailing road and
weather conditions.
If you activate or deactivate the all-wheel drive
in a vehicle with this option, ASR will be deacti-
vated for the duration of the activation/deacti- When ESP® is intervening and the d warning
vation process. lamp in the instrument cluster is flashing, leave
Z
56 Driving safety systems
ASR on. In this case, only depress the acceler- EBD (electronic brake force distribu-
ator pedal as far as required when pulling away. tion)
X Press the à button.
If ASR is deactivated, the d warning lamp G WARNING
in the instrument cluster lights up. If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can
ASR is automatically activated when the engine lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the
Safety
is started. risk of skidding and an accident.

It may be best to deactivate ASR briefly in the You should therefore adapt your driving style
following situations:
to the different handling characteristics. Have
Rwhen using snow chains
the brake system checked at a qualified spe-
Rin deep snow cialist workshop.
Ron sand or gravel
If you deactivate ASR: EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure
to the rear wheels. This enables EBD to improve
Rengine torque is not limited and the drive
handling during braking.
wheels are able to spin. The spinning wheels
will then achieve a cutting effect for better Observe the information on warning and indica-
traction. tor lamps (Y page 196).
Rtraction control remains active through brake
intervention. If a drive wheel attains its tire
traction limit because one side of the road is ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
slippery, for example, that wheel is braked.
The traction is then increased in this situation. Important safety notes
Ractive brake intervention by ESP® to increase
driving stability remains active. The d
G WARNING
warning lamp in the instrument cluster If ESP® is malfunctioning it will not provide
flashes when ESP® is intervening. any vehicle stabilization. There is an increased
risk of skidding or of an accident.
Exercise caution when continuing to drive.
BAS (Brake Assist System) Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist
G WARNING workshop.
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance
! Do not run the vehicle on a roller dynamom-
in an emergency braking situation is eter (e.g. for performance tests). If you must
increased. There is a risk of an accident. operate the vehicle on a roller dynamometer,
In an emergency braking situation, depress please consult a qualified specialist workshop
the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents in advance. You could otherwise damage the
drive train or the brake system.
the wheels from locking.
If you activate or deactivate the all-wheel drive
Vehicles without steering wheel buttons: if the in a vehicle with this option, ESP® will be deac-
BAS driving safety system is malfunctioning, tivated for the duration of the activation/deac-
the : warning lamp lights up while the tivation process.
engine is running (Y page 196). If ESP® is malfunctioning, the h indicator
BAS operates in emergency braking situations. lamp lights up while the engine is running and
If you depress the brake quickly, BAS automat- the engine power may be reduced
ically increases the brake pressure, thereby (Y page 195).
reducing the stopping distance.
The brakes will function as usual once you
i Only use wheels with the recommended tire
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly.
Emergency exit 57
4ETS (Electronic Traction System) On vehicles with steering wheel buttons: the
d indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
! A function or performance test should only flashes and the message Crosswind Assist
be carried out on a two-axle dynamometer. Intervention appears in the multifunction dis-
Before you operate the vehicle on such a play.
dynamometer, please consult a qualified Crosswind Assist is active above a vehicle speed
workshop. You could otherwise damage the
Safety
of 50 mph (80 km/h) when the vehicle is driving
drive train or the brake system. straight ahead or cornering gently.
4ETS is only active when all-wheel drive is acti-
vated (Y page 147).
4ETS ensures permanent drive for all four Emergency exit
wheels, and together with ESP® it improves the
vehicle's traction. Emergency exit window
If a driven wheel spins due to lack of traction:
G WARNING
RWhen pulling away, make use of the traction
The emergency exit window cannot be locked
control integrated in ESP®. Depress the
accelerator pedal as far as necessary. in place. You risk injury if you exit the vehicle
RWhile driving, slowly take your foot off the through the emergency exit window.
accelerator pedal. RMake sure that nobody becomes trapped,
In wintry driving conditions, always use winter both when closing and when opening the
tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains emergency exit window.
(Y page 251). This is the only way to get the full RThe opened emergency exit window must
benefit from the all-wheel drive system.
be held in place by another person.
Crosswind Assist Pay attention to traffic conditions.
Crosswind Assist does not work if ESP® is deac- G WARNING

tivated or disabled because of a malfunction.
If the emergency exit window is unlocked
Crosswind Assist does not react:
while driving, it could open and slam shut and
Rin the event of severe jolts and vibrations, e.g. consequently fall down. There is a risk of an
as a result of uneven surfaces or potholes. accident and injury.
Rif the vehicle loses traction, e.g. on snow or
ice or when hydroplaning. Before starting off, make sure that the emer-
Rto large and sudden steering movements by
gency exit window is locked and the locking
the driver. pins are undamaged.
Crosswind Assist is operational again as soon as
the driving conditions return to normal. ! Make sure there is sufficient clearance
when opening the emergency exit window.
Crosswind Assist detects strong crosswind Hold the open window in position. You could
gusts that can impair the road holding of your otherwise damage the emergency exit win-
vehicle when driving straight ahead. Crosswind dow.
Assist intervenes depending on the direction
and strength of the crosswind.
A stabilizing brake application helps you to keep
the vehicle on track.
Information appears in the instrument cluster In
the event that Crosswind Assist intervenes
noticeably.
On vehicles without steering wheel buttons:
the d indicator lamp in the instrument clus-
ter flashes.
Z
58 Theft deterrent locking system
RThe window handles must not be used as

hooks, e.g. to hang up light objects, bags or
items of clothing.
RBear in mind the vehicle height and the imme-
diate surroundings when you leave the vehi-
cle via the emergency exit window. Particu-
Safety
larly children and smaller adults may require

assistance when exiting the vehicle.
Theft deterrent locking system

The emergency exit window is intended for use Immobilizer
in an emergency only and must not be opened X To activate: remove the key from the ignition
unless the vehicle is stationary. The emergency
exit window is the first window behind the driv- lock.
er's seat on the driver's side. It is marked by the X To deactivate: turn the key to position 2 in
"Emergency Exit" label. the ignition lock.
X To open: position both handles : vertically. The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from
This will break locking pins ;. being started without the correct key.
The window is unlocked. Always take the key with you and lock the vehi-
X Swing the window outward by the handles cle when leaving the vehicle. If you leave the key
and hold it in this position. Make sure there is in the vehicle, anyone can start the engine.
sufficient clearance when doing so.
i The immobilizer is always deactivated when
X To close: close the window. you start the engine.
X Position both handles : horizontally. Make In the event that the engine cannot be started
sure that the locks = are inside in front of the when the starter battery is fully charged, the
window frame. immobilizer may be faulty. Contact an author-
The window is locked. ized Sprinter dealer or call 1-877-762-8267
X Replace locking pins ; at the latest before (in USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
starting on a new journey.
You can obtain information on this at any
qualified specialist workshop. ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
In an emergency, or after an accident, the vehi-
cle occupants can exit the vehicle through the X To arm: close all doors.
emergency exit window. X Lock the vehicle with the key.
Observe the following notes to make sure that The indicator lamp in the central locking but-
the emergency exit window can be used safely in ton (Y page 65) flashes.
the event of an emergency: X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the key.
RBefore beginning a journey, inform the vehicle

The indicator lamp in the central locking but-
ton (Y page 65) goes out.
occupants of the emergency exit window and
explain how to use it. Make sure to explicitly i Cargo Van and Passenger Van only:
point out the risks described here. Unless you open a door within 40 seconds
ROnly vehicle occupants who know how to use after unlocking the vehicle:
the emergency exit window are permitted to Rthe vehicle will be locked again
sit next to it. Rthe anti-theft alarm system will be armed
RAccess to the emergency exit window must again
remain unobstructed. Do not place any large
or heavy objects on or in front of the seats
next to the emergency exit window.
Theft deterrent locking system 59
If the alarm system is armed, a visual and audi- X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
ble alarm is triggered by the following: X Press button :.
RUnlocking the vehicle from inside When the button is released, indicator
ROpening a door lamp ; in the button lights up for about five
seconds.
ROpening the hood
X Lock the vehicle.
Safety
i The alarm is not switched off, even if you The tow-away alarm is disarmed.
immediately close the open door that has trig- The tow-away alarm remains disarmed until you
gered it, for example. lock the vehicle again.
X To stop the alarm: press the % button on Disarm the tow-away alarm when locking your
the remote control. vehicle and:
or Rloading and/or transporting the vehicle, on a
X Insert the key into the ignition lock. ferry or car transporter, for example
The alarm stops. Rparking on a moving surface, e.g. a split-level
garage
This will prevent false alarms.
Tow-away alarm
Operation Interior motion sensor
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
inclination of the vehicle changes when the tow- Operation
away alarm is armed. This can be the case if the If the armed interior motion sensor detects
vehicle is raised on one side, for example. motion in the vehicle interior, a visual and acous-
tic alarm is triggered. This can happen if some-
Arming and disarming one reaches into the vehicle interior, for exam-
ple.
The tow-away alarm is automatically armed
approximately 20 seconds after you lock the
vehicle. Arming
The tow-away alarm is automatically deactiva- X Close the side windows.
ted when you unlock the vehicle. X Make sure that nothing (such as mascots or
coat hangers) are hanging on the rear-view
Disarming mirror or on the grab handles on the head-
liner.
X Lock the vehicle.
The interior motion sensor is armed after
approximately 40 seconds.
Switching off
X Unlock vehicle.
The interior motion sensor automatically
switches off.
Z
60 Theft deterrent locking system
Disarming
Safety
X Remove the key from the ignition lock.

X Press button :.
When the button is released, indicator
lamp ; in the button lights up for about five
seconds.
X Lock the vehicle.
The interior motion sensor is deactivated.
The interior motion sensor remains deactivated
until you lock the vehicle again.
Deactivate the interior motion sensor when
locking your vehicle:
Rwith people or animals remaining inside
Rwith the side windows remaining open
Rwhen transporting it on a ferry or car trans-
porter, for example
Key 61
Useful information G WARNING

If you attach heavy or large objects to the
This Operator's Manual describes all models as SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-
well as standard and optional equipment of your tionally turned in the ignition lock. This could
vehicle that were available at the time of going
to print. Country-specific variations are possi- cause the engine to be switched off. There is a
ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped risk of an accident.
with all of the described functions. This also Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the
applies to systems and functions relevant to SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before
Opening and closing

safety. inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
workshops (Y page 27). Do not keep the key with remote control:
Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone
or another key with remote control
Key Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil
Important safety notes Rin metallic objects, e.g. metal cases
This can affect the key's functionality.
G WARNING
When the double locks are activated, the
doors can no longer be opened from the Key functions of the remote control
inside. People in the vehicle can no longer get
out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a General notes
risk of injury. The vehicle is equipped with either two or four
Therefore, do not leave any people unsuper- remote controls with a folding key or four
vised in the vehicle, particularly children, eld- mechanical keys. In this Operator's Manual,
both the mechanical keys and the keys with
erly people or people in need of special assis- remote control are referred to as keys. The
tance. Do not activate the double lock when remote control key has a range of up to 32 ft
people are in the vehicle. (10 m). Use the remote control of the key only
when in immediate proximity of the vehicle. This
G WARNING prevents theft.
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- Remote controls that are not included in the
scope of delivery for the vehicle must be pro-
grammed before use. Further information can
Rrelease the parking brake. be obtained at any authorized Sprinter Dealer.
Rshift the automatic transmission out of park The key's remote control locks/unlocks the
position P or shift manual transmission into driver's door and/or the following centrally if
the factory settings have not been changed:
neutral.
Rthe driver's and the front-passenger door
Rstart the engine.
Rthe sliding doors
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- Rthe rear doors
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury. i If the driver's or front-passenger door is not
closed, the corresponding door is not locked.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the If a sliding door or a rear door is not closed
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never properly, none of the rear doors are locked.
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
If there is a key is in the ignition lock, the remote
control is inoperative. When locking or unlock-
ing the vehicle with the remote control, always
pay attention to the indicator lamp signaling.
Also check the locking knobs of the doors.
Z
62 Key
Unlocking/locking the vehicle with the X To lock centrally: press the & button.
remote control The turn signal lamps flash three times when
the theft deterrent locking system is armed
and all the doors are closed.
X Check the locking knobs on all the doors.
The locking knobs must all be in the lowered
position.
Unlocking/locking the vehicle with the

Opening and closing
mechanical key or the folding key

The anti-theft alarm system (ATA) is triggered if
you unlock and open the driver's door or the rear
door with the mechanical key or the folding key.
Remote control with an integrated folding key The alarm can be stopped in the following two
ways:
: 5 To unlock the sliding doors and the
rear door X Press the % or & button on the remote
; % To unlock the driver's door only or control.
unlock the vehicle centrally or
= & To lock the vehicle centrally X Insert the key into the ignition lock.
? Key release button
A Battery check lamp
X To unlock the driver's door: press the %
button.
The turn signals flash once. The theft deter-
rent locking system is deactivated.
X To unlock the sliding doors and the rear
door: press the 5 button.
The turn signals flash once.
X To unlock centrally: unlock the driver's
door.
X Press the % button again within two sec-
Driver's door
onds.
The turn signals flash once.
i If the surround lighting has been switched
on using the on-board computer
(Y page 171), it goes on when the vehicle is
unlocked.
If you do not open a Cargo Van or Passenger
Van within approximately 40 seconds of
unlocking:
Rthe vehicle is locked again.
Rthe theft deterrent locking system is armed
again.
Rear door
1 Locked
2 Unlocked
Key 63
X To unlock the driver's or rear door: press for the environment. Check with your local gov-
the key release button on the remote control. ernment’s disposal guidelines. California resi-
The key folds out. dents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
X Insert the key fully into the door lock and turn HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.
it to position 2. We recommend that you have batteries
The door is unlocked. changed at a qualified specialist workshop.
X To lock the vehicle: lock all doors except the
driver's door and, if necessary the rear door, Checking the batteries
from inside. To do this, press down the door
Opening and closing

locking buttons. XPress the % or & button for longer than
X Press the key release button on the remote two seconds.
control. If battery indicator lamp (Y page 61) lights up
The key folds out. briefly, the batteries in the remote control still
have sufficient charge. Otherwise, change the
X Insert the key fully into the driver's door lock
batteries immediately.
and turn it to position 1.
The driver's door is locked. i If the remote control is checked within the
signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing
the & or % button:
Rlock or
Remote control battery
Runlock the vehicle
Changing batteries
G WARNING
You need a CR 2025 2 3 V cell battery, which can
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-
be obtained from any qualified specialist work-
ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in shop.
severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal When changing the batteries, do not press any
injury. of the buttons on the remote control.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
immediately.
Batteries contain dangerous
substances. It is against the
law to dispose of them with
the household rubbish. They
must be collected separately
and recycled to protect the
environment. X Press release button ;.
Dispose of batteries in an The key folds out.
X Remove battery compartment cover : in the
environmentally friendly
direction of the arrow.
manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified spe-
cialist workshop or a special
collection point for used bat-
teries.
The key batteries contain perchlorate material,

which may require special handling and regard
Z
64 Key
X Remove the batteries from the battery tray.

X Insert the new batteries into the battery tray
with the positive pole facing upwards. Use a
lint-free cloth to do so.
X Align battery compartment cover : and push
it on until it audibly engages.
X Check the function of all the remote control
buttons on the vehicle.
Opening and closing
Problems with the key/remote control

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
It is no longer possible to The doors are not closed properly.
lock the vehicle using X Close the doors properly and lock the vehicle again.
the remote control.
The turn signals do not The central locking system has malfunctioned.
flash when the vehicle is X Lock the vehicle using the folding key (Y page 61).
locked.
X Have the central locking system checked as soon as possible at a
It is no longer possible to The key battery is weak or discharged.
lock or unlock the vehi- X Point the remote control at the driver's door handle from very close
cle using the remote range and press the % or & button.
control.
If this does not work:
X Replace the key battery (Y page 63).
or
X Lock the vehicle using the folding key (Y page 61).
The remote control is faulty.

X Lock the vehicle using the folding key (Y page 61).
X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
The key cannot be The steering lock has jammed mechanically.

turned in the ignition X Remove the key and insert it again into the ignition lock. Turn the
lock. steering wheel from side to side while doing so.
Central locking 65

The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low.
started using the key. X Switch off all non-essential consumers, such as interior lighting, and
try to start the engine again.
If this does not work:
X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 233).
or
Opening and closing

X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 243).
or
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
You have lost a key. X Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the mechanical locks replaced.
Central locking fatal. Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle.
You can open a locked front door from the inside
G WARNING at any time. You can open a locked sliding door
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, or rear door from the inside if it has been previ-
they could: ously unlocked from inside.
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Locking and unlocking manually
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
RStart the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never Central locking buttons
leave children or animals unattended in the Use the central locking buttons to centrally
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of lock/unlock either the entire vehicle or just the
reach of children. sliding doors and rear doors from the inside.
G WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
Z
66 Driver's door and front-passenger door
X To lock/unlock the entire vehicle: press Activating automatic locking when driv-
the upper Ã central locking button when ing
the doors are closed.
When the entire vehicle is locked, the indica- X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
tor lamp in the Ã central locking button lock when the doors are closed.
lights up. X For the entire vehicle: press the upper Ã
i If the key has been removed or is in position central locking button until the indicator lamp
0 in the ignition lock, the indicator lamp in the in the button flashes four times.
Ã central locking button remains lit for X For the sliding doors and rear doors only:
Opening and closing
five seconds. press the lower Ä central locking button

X To lock/unlock the sliding doors and rear until the indicator lamp in the upper Ã
doors: press the lower section of the Ä button flashes four times.
central locking button when the doors are
closed. Deactivating automatic locking when
When the sliding doors and rear doors are driving
locked, the indicator lamp in the upper Ã
central locking button lights up. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
lock when the doors are closed.
X For the entire vehicle: press the upper Ã
Automatic locking central locking button until the indicator lamp
in the button flashes twice.
General notes X For the sliding doors and rear doors only:
press the lower Ä central locking button
The vehicle locks automatically as standard until the indicator lamp in the upper Ã
once a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) has been button flashes twice.
reached. Depending on the vehicle's equip-
ment, the doors may be locked automatically
once the ignition is switched on. Information on
the functions of the automatic locking mecha- Driver's door and front-passenger
nism of your vehicle can be obtained from any door
If the automatic locking when driving function is ! Only open the doors when road and traffic
activated, there is a risk of being locked out conditions permit. Make sure that there is
when the vehicle is pushed or towed. sufficient clearance when opening the doors.
For this reason, deactivate the automatic lock- Otherwise, you could damage your vehicle or
ing when driving function: other vehicles.
Rbefore pushing the vehicle
Rbefore towing the vehicle
If activated, automatic locking is deactivated
when the vehicle is unlocked or locked using the
central locking button.
Automatic locking is reactivated after the igni-
tion is switched off or a door is opened with the
vehicle stationary.
You can open the driver's or front-passenger

door from the inside at any time, even if it is
locked.
Sliding door 67
X Pull door handle :. X To open: pull door handle :.

Locking knob ; pops up. The sliding door opens.
The door opens. X Push back the sliding door using door han-
dle : until it engages.
X Check the sliding door detent.
Sliding door X To close: slide the sliding door firmly for-
wards by handle : until it closes.
Opening and closing

G WARNING
Opening/closing from the inside
If the open sliding door is not engaged, it could
move on its own if the vehicle is on a slope.
This could trap you or other persons. There is
a risk of injury.
Always make sure that the open sliding door is
engaged.
! Only open the doors when road and traffic

conditions permit. Make sure that there is
sufficient clearance when opening the doors.
Otherwise, you could damage your vehicle or
other vehicles.
The sliding door of your vehicle can be equipped Interior door handle on the sliding door
with an electrical access step. Observe the The sliding door is equipped with an active
notes on the electrical step when opening and retainer, which engages the door at the end stop
closing the sliding door (Y page 68). when opened.
i You can also lock the sliding door in place
around halfway when opening and closing.
Opening and closing from the outside The door does not have to be opened fully
when getting into or out of the vehicle. The
intermediate detent does not fully engage the
sliding door.
X To unlock: pull locking knob = upwards.
Only this sliding door unlocks. The other
doors remain locked.
X To open: press button :.
X Slide the sliding door by handle ; back to the
stop.
X Check the sliding door detent.
The sliding door must be engaged.
X To close: slide the sliding door firmly for-
The sliding door is equipped with an active
wards by door handle ; until it engages.
retainer, which engages the door at the end stop
when opened. X To lock: press locking knob = down.
Only the sliding door is locked. All other doors
i You can also lock the sliding door in place that were previously unlocked remain
around halfway when opening and closing. unlocked.
The door does not have to be opened fully
when getting into or out of the vehicle. The
intermediate detent does not fully engage the
sliding door.
Z
68 Electrical step
Electrical closing assist Electrical step : automatically extends when

the sliding door is opened and retracts when it is
If your vehicle is equipped with electrical closing closed.
assist, you will require less force to close the Electrical step : is equipped with an obstruc-
sliding door. tion detection device on the front side. If the
step comes into contact with an obstacle while
it is extending, it stops.
Electrical step After you have removed the obstacle, you must
first close the sliding door and open it once
Opening and closing
again so that the step can extend completely.

! Always observe the ground clearance of the i If the electrical step obstructs loading, you
vehicle and avoid obstacles. On vehicles with can prevent the step from extending when
a step, ground clearance is further restricted. opening the sliding door via obstacle detec-
Obstacles can damage the vehicle. tion. The electrical step can then remain
If you must drive over obstacles, drive espe- retracted and a forklift or other lifting equip-
cially slowly and carefully. If necessary, have ment can be moved nearer to the cargo com-
another person direct you. partment.
If you do not use the grab handle and the step, Vehicles without steering-wheel buttons: if
you could injure yourself when getting in and out the 1 indicator lamp in the instrument clus-
of the vehicle. ter lights up and a warning tone sounds, elec-
In order to reduce risks: trical step : is malfunctioning (Y page 204).
Rdraw the passengers' attention to the electri- Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: if the
cal step. Wait until the electrical step is fully Electrical Step message is shown in the dis-
extended. play and a warning tone sounds, electrical
step : is malfunctioning (Y page 194).
Rdo not jump out of the vehicle.
If electrical step : is malfunctioning, the step
Ronly use the grab handle and step. Only they
may only partially extend/retract or may not
are designed for such a load. extend/retract at all. If a malfunction does
Rkeep grab handles, access steps and entry occur, you will have to retract and lock electrical
sills free from dirt, e.g. mud, clay, snow and step : manually before continuing the journey
ice. (Y page 68).
Before passengers get out of the vehicle, let
them know that electrical step : might not be
Operation and obstacle detection extended.
Emergency release
! Driving with the step extended may result in
it being damaged.
If the electrical step does not retract auto-
matically, you will have to push it in and lock it
into place manually before continuing your
journey.
Electrical step
The sliding door of your vehicle can be equipped
with an electrical step.
X When getting in and out of the vehicle, use the
grab handles and electrical step :.
Rear doors 69
Rear doors
G WARNING
If you open a rear door, you could:
Rendanger other people or road users
Rbe caught by oncoming traffic
Opening and closing

This is particularly the case if you open the
rear door more than 90°. There is a risk of an
accident and injury.
X Pull R-clips ; on both rods : on the under-
side of the step out of their respective pins. Only open the rear doors when traffic condi-
X Remove washers = and detach both rods :. tions permit. Always make sure that the rear
doors are properly locked.
G WARNING
If you open the rear doors 90°, the rear lights
are no longer visible. The vehicle will then be
difficult for other road users to see or will not
be seen by them at all, particularly if it is dark
or visibility is poor. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
You should therefore ensure in this and simi-
lar situations that the vehicle is visible from
X Fold rods : into the housing in the step. the rear in accordance with the relevant
X Push the step into its housing. national regulations, by using the warning tri-
angle, for instance.
! Make sure that there is sufficient clearance

when opening the rear doors. You could oth-
erwise damage the vehicle and objects in
close range of the rear doors.
You can lock the rear doors at an angle of 90°,
180° and 270°. Always make sure that the open
rear door is correctly engaged in the detent.
i When securing the step for the first time,

you must pierce a film with the R-clips.
X Insert R-clips ; into the step as far as they
will go through the holes on both sides of the
housing.
The step is secured in its housing.
Z
70 Rear doors
Opening/closing from the outside Opening the rear doors to an angle of

180° or 270°
Opening the right-hand rear door
Opening and closing
Door retainer (example: right rear door)

X Pull handle :. X Open the rear door to about 45°.
X Swing the rear door to the side until it X Pull and hold door retainer : in the direction
engages. of the arrow.
X Open the rear door more than 90°, so that the
Opening the left-hand rear door door retainer cannot engage.
X Release the door retainer and open the door
to an angle of 180° or 270°.
X Make sure that the right-hand rear door is

open and engaged.
X Pull release handle : in the direction of the Magnetic door retainer
arrow. XWith the rear door opened to an angle of
X Swing the rear door to the side until it 270°, push it against magnetic door
engages. retainer ; on the side wall.
When the magnet on the rear door is in con-
tact with magnetic door retainer ;, the rear
door is held in this position.
i Vehicles with 270° pivoting rear doors:
If door retainer : malfunctions while loading,
you can swivel it 180° against the spring force
and onto the door and engage it. The door
retainer remains in this position and will not
swivel back to its original position.
Before closing the door, release door
retainer : from the detent and return it to its
original position.
Partition sliding door 71
Closing the rear doors from the outside Partition sliding door
X Pull the rear door away from magnetic door Important safety notes
retainer.
X Close the left-hand rear door firmly from the G WARNING
outside.
If the open partition sliding door is not
X Close the right-hand rear door firmly from the
engaged, it could move automatically while
outside.
the vehicle is in motion. This could trap you or
other persons. There is a risk of an accident
Opening and closing

and injury.
Opening/closing from the inside
Close the partition sliding door before every
journey and make sure that it is engaged.
Opening/closing the partition sliding

door from the cab
Release the lever on the inside of the right rear door

A white section on latch ; indicates that the
rear door is unlocked.
i You can only open the locked rear doors
from the inside if the child-proof locks have
not been activated.
X To unlock: slide latch ; to the left.
X To open: turn the key counter-clockwise =.
You will see a white marking. The sliding door is unlocked.
X Slide the sliding door to the stop in the direc-
Only the rear door unlocks. All other doors
that were previously locked remain locked. tion of arrow ;.
X To close: slide the sliding door in the direc-
X To open: pull opening lever : and open the
unlocked rear door. tion of arrow : until it engages.
The sliding door can be locked using the key.
X Swing the rear door to the side until it
engages.
X To close: make sure that the left-hand rear
door is closed.
X Pull the rear door firmly by the door handle to
close it.
X To lock: slide latch ; to the right.
The white section is no longer visible.
Only the rear door is locked. All other doors
that were previously unlocked remain
unlocked.
Z
72 Side windows
Opening/closing the partition sliding G WARNING

door from the cargo compartment If children operate the side windows they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
Activate the override feature for the rear side
windows. When leaving the vehicle, always
take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi-
cle. Never leave children unsupervised in the
Opening and closing
vehicle.
G WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected
X To unlock: press the catch in the direction of cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
arrow =. fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
The sliding door is unlocked.
vehicle.
X Slide the sliding door to the stop in the direc-
tion of arrow :.
X To close: slide the sliding door in the direc-
tion of arrow ; until it engages. Opening/closing the side window
Side windows
G WARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts
could become trapped between the side win-
dow and the door frame as the side window
moves. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody touches the side win- Control panel (example: driver's door)
dow during the opening procedure. If some- : Power window, left
body becomes trapped, release the switch or ; Power window, right
pull the switch to close the side window again. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.
X Press or pull button : or ; until the corre-
G WARNING sponding side window has reached the
While closing the side windows, body parts in desired position.
the closing area could become trapped. There If you press the switch beyond the pressure
is a risk of injury. point and then release it, the window opens
When closing make sure that no parts of the automatically. To stop the movement, press or
body are in the closing area. If somebody pull the switch again.
becomes trapped, release the switch or press
the switch to open the side window again.
Side windows 73
Resetting the side windows

You must reset the side windows if there has
been a malfunction or an interruption in the volt-
age supply.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.
X Pull the two power window switches and hold
for approximately one second after closing
the side window.
Opening and closing

Problems with the side windows
If you cannot completely open or close a side
window:
If there are no objects or leaves in the window
guide that prevent the sliding sunroof from clos-
ing, there has been a malfunction or the on-
board voltage has been interrupted.
X Reset the side window (Y page 73).
Z
74 Seats
Useful information rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-

ing or in the event of an accident, you could
This Operator's Manual describes all models as slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
well as standard and optional equipment of your abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
vehicle that were available at the time of going poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
to print. Country-specific variations are possi-
ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped injury.
with all of the described functions. This also Adjust the seat properly before beginning
applies to systems and functions relevant to your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
safety. is in an almost vertical position and that the
Read the information on qualified specialist shoulder section of your seat belt is routed
workshops (Y page 27).
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
across the center of your shoulder.
G WARNING
Seats
If head restraints are not installed and adjus-
Important safety notes ted correctly, they cannot provide protection
as intended. There is an increased risk of
G WARNING injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do event of an accident or when braking.
the following while driving: Always drive with the head restraints instal-
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, led. Before driving off, make sure for every
steering wheel or mirrors vehicle occupant that the center of the head
Rfasten the seat belt restraint supports the back of the head at
about eye level.
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- Your seat must be adjusted in such a way that
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt you can wear the seat belt correctly.
before starting the engine. Observe the following points:
RPosition the backrest in an almost vertical
G WARNING position so that you are sitting virtually
If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could upright. Do not drive with the backrest
move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in reclined too far back.
RYour arms should be slightly bent when you
motion. This could cause you to lose control of
are holding the steering wheel.
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
RAvoid seat positions that prevent the seat belt
Always make sure that the driver's seat is from being routed correctly. The shoulder
engaged before starting the engine. section of the belt must be routed over the
middle of your shoulder and be pulled tight
G WARNING against your upper body. The lap belt must
always pass across your lap as low down as
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
possible, i.e. over your hip joints.
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
RAdjust the head restraint so that it supports
seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury. the back of the head at eye level.
Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one RThe distance from the pedals should be such
has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. that you can depress them fully.
If you swap over the head restraints for the front
G WARNING and rear seats, you will not be able to adjust the
The seat belt does not offer the intended level height and angle of the head restraints to the
correct position.
of protection if you have not moved the back-
Seats 75
Use the head restraint pad to adjust the head X Turn handwheel = towards the rear.
restraint so that it is as close as possible to the The seat backrest tilts towards the rear.
back of your head. X To adjust the seat height: press or pull
Before the journey, make sure the head lever ? repeatedly until you have reached
restraints have been correctly set for each of the the desired seat height.
vehicle's passengers (Y page 78). X To adjust the seat angle: turn handwheel A
towards the front.
The front of the seat cushion tilts down.
Driver's and front-passenger seat X Turn handwheel A towards the rear.
The front of the seat cushion tilts up.
i The lumbar support allows you to use the
backrest to increase the support provided to

the lumbar spine.
When the lumbar support is correctly adjus-
ted, it reduces strain on your back while driv-
ing.
X To adjust the lumbar support: turn hand-
wheel ; up.
This increases the support provided to the
lumbar region.
X Turn handwheel ; down.
This reduces the support provided to the lum-
bar region.
The seat suspension must be adapted to your
body weight. Adjust the seat suspension only
while the seat is unoccupied.
: Seat fore-and-aft adjustment X To adjust the seat suspension: take your
; Lumbar support adjustment weight off the seat.
= Seat backrest adjustment X Using handwheel B, set your body weight
? Seat height adjustment (40 to 120 kg) for optimum seat suspension.
A Seat cushion angle adjustment The seat suspension will become more rigid
B Seat suspension adjustment the higher you set the weight. It will then not
C Seat suspension lock move as far.
i Depending on the seat model, some adjust- If the seat moves up and down frequently and to
ments may not be available. a great extent, you can lock the seat in the lower
range.
You can find information on rotating the front
seats under "Swiveling front seats" X To engage the seat suspension lock: turn
(Y page 75). lever C up.
X To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position:
When it next moves, the seat will lock in posi-
tion.
pull lever : up.
X To release the seat suspension lock: turn
X Slide the seat forward or back.
lever C to the right.
X Release lever :.
The seat can now move up and down again.
X Slide the seat forward or back until you hear it
engage.
X To adjust the backrest: turn handwheel =
Swiveling front seats
towards the front.
The seat backrest moves to a vertical posi- G WARNING
tion.
If the driver's and front-passenger seats are
not engaged facing the direction of travel
Z
76 Seats
while driving, the restraint systems may not Twin front-passenger seat
be able to provide the intended protection.
There is an increased risk of injury, possibly
even fatal.
Engage the driver's and front-passenger seats
so they are facing the direction of travel
before starting the engine.
! When rotating the seats, make sure that

there is sufficient space to do so.
Move the seat forward or back first. This will
help to avoid contact with other parts of the

interior.
X To fold a seat cushion forwards: lift the seat
Push the handbrake lever down to the stop.
cushion out of front anchorage :.
The parking brake or handbrake lever could
X Pull the seat cushion forwards slightly and out
otherwise be damaged.
of rear anchorage ;.
X Fold the rear edge of the seat cushion up.
i You can stow various articles in the space
under the twin front-passenger seat.
X To fold the seat cushion back: fold down
the seat cushion by the rear edge.
X Slide the seat cushion under the seat back-
rest into rear anchorage ;.
X Push down on the seat cushion at the front
until it engages in front anchorage :.
Seat release (example: front-passenger seat)

Folding seat
The driver's seat and front-passenger seat can
be rotated by 50° and 180°. G WARNING
The seats engage when facing in the direction of If the key is inserted in the partition sliding
travel as well as when facing in the opposite door, it may come into contact with the per-
direction and also engage at an angle of 50° to
the door. son on the folding seat. There is a risk of
injury.
X Make sure that the parking brake has been
engaged and that the handbrake lever has Always remove the key from the partition slid-
been pushed down to the stop (Y page 130). ing door before a person sits on the folding
X Adjust the steering wheel to provide the nec- seat.
essary space to rotate and adjust the driver's
seat (Y page 79).
X Before rotating, push the front-passenger
seat forwards (Y page 75).
X To rotate the seat: push lever : on the rear
of the seat towards the center of the vehicle
and rotate the seat slightly inwards.
The rotation device is released.
X Release lever :.
X Turn the seat about 50° towards the outside
or inside to the desired position.
Seats 77
Install the rear bench seat as described. Only

use rear bench seats that are approved for
your vehicle by the distributor named on the
inside cover page.
! For safety reasons, the four-seat rear bench

must only be removed or installed at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
Keep the seat bench mounting recesses in the
vehicle floor free from dirt and foreign objects.

Folding seat without sidebag
Locking mechanism lever on the feet of the bench

seat
Folding seat with sidebag X To remove the rear bench seat: swing all
X Remove key : from the partition sliding levers : of the bench seat completely
door. upwards.
X Folding seat without sidebag: pull grip of The bench seat moves back into the seat
catch ; in the direction of the arrow and fold mounting recesses on the vehicle floor.
seat cushion = up or down. X Lift the bench seat upwards out of the seat
Folding seat with sidebag: press grip of mounting recesses.
catch ; in the direction of the arrow and fold
seat cushion = up or down.
X Release grip ; of seat cushion = in the cor-
responding end position.
X Move the seat cushion = until it engages.
Grip ; of the catch must lie completely on
the seat frame.
Rear bench seat (Passenger Van)

G WARNING
If the rear bench seat is not installed as descri- i Do not exceed the maximum permissible
number of seats for models registered as
bed or an unsuitable rear bench seat is instal- passenger vehicles.
led, the seat belts may not provide protection
as intended. There is an increased risk of
injury.
Z
78 Seats
X To install the rear bench seat: observe the

prescribed installation position of the bench
seat.
Install the two-seat bench seat only on the
driver's side.
X Check mounting shells ; on the vehicle
floor.
X Position the bench seat in the direction of
travel in corresponding mounting shells ;.
X Slide the bench seat forwards until you hear
the locking mechanisms engage.
X Check levers : on the anchorages of the
bench seat. Head restraint (example: luxury head restraint on

the front-passenger seat)
All levers : must be flush to the vehicle floor.
: Release button
; Head restraint position
= Head restraint angle (luxury head restraints
Head restraints only)
G WARNING X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
If the head restraints are not installed or not desired position.
X To lower: press release button : and slide
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-
the head restraint down to the desired posi-
tection as intended. There is an increased risk
tion.
of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
X To adjust the angle: hold the front part of the
event of an accident or when braking. luxury head restraint by the lower edge and
Always drive with the head restraints instal- tilt it to the desired position.
led. Before driving off, make sure for every X To remove: pull the head restraint up to the
vehicle occupant that the center of the head stop.
restraint supports the back of the head at X Press release button : and pull out the head
about eye level. restraint.
X To insert: insert the head restraint so that the
Do not change over the head restraints for the
rod with the detents is on the left when viewed
front and rear seats. Otherwise, it will not be
in the direction of travel.
possible to correctly adjust the height and angle
of the head restraints. X Press and hold release button :.
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close as X Push the head restraint down until it engages.
possible to your head.
Armrests
Steering wheel 79
X To set the armrest angle: fold the armrest At level 1, the seat heating remains in continu-
upwards by more than 45° ;. ous operation.
The armrest is released. X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in
X Fold armrest = forwards to the stop. the ignition lock.
X Slowly fold the armrest upwards to the X To switch on: press the c button repeat-
desired position. edly until the desired heating level has been
X To fold the armrest up: if necessary, fold the set.
armrest upwards : by more than 90°. X To switch off: press the c button repeat-
edly until all indicator lamps go out.
If the indicator lamps of the current heating level
Seat heating in the c button flash, the seat heating has

switched off automatically. In this case, too
G WARNING many electrical consumers are switched on or
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can the battery charge is not sufficient. The seat
cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to heating will automatically switch back to the
current heating level when enough on-board
become very hot. The health of persons with voltage is available again.
limited temperature sensitivity or a limited
ability to react to high temperatures may be
affected or they may even suffer burn-like Steering wheel
injuries. There is a risk of injury.
Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on G WARNING
repeatedly.
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
! When you leave your seat, do not place any- the following while driving:
thing on the seat and switch off the seat heat- Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
ing. Do not switch the seat heating on when steering wheel or mirrors
the seat is not occupied, e.g. when driving
without a front passenger. The seat heating Rfasten the seat belt
may otherwise overheat, causing damage to There is a risk of an accident.
the seat. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
G WARNING
If the steering wheel is unlocked while the
vehicle is in motion, it could change position
unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Before starting off, make sure the steering
The three red indicator lamps in the c button wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering
show the activated heating level 1 to 3. wheel while the vehicle is in motion.
The system automatically switches down from
level 3 to level 2 after approximately G WARNING
five minutes. Children could injure themselves if they
The system automatically switches down from adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of
level 2 to level 1 after approximately injury.
ten minutes.
Z
80 Mirrors
When leaving the vehicle, always take the X Anti-glare mode: push anti-glare lever : in
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never the direction of the arrow.
The steering wheel can still be adjusted if the Exterior mirrors

key has been removed.
G WARNING
The additional mirrors in the exterior mirrors
reduce the size of the image. Objects visible in
the mirrors are closer than they appear. You

could misjudge the distance from road users
driving behind you when changing lanes, for
instance. There is a risk of an accident.
You should therefore always determine the
actual distance from road users driving
behind you, e.g.:
Rby looking over your shoulder
Rby looking in the main mirror in the exterior
mirror.
: Steering column fore-and-aft adjustment

; Steering column height
Adjusting manually
= Lever X Before starting off, manually adjust the exte-
X To set the steering wheel: swing lever = rior mirrors in such a way that you can get a
down until it engages. good overview of road and traffic conditions.
The steering wheel is unlocked.
X Move the steering wheel to the desired posi- Adjusting electrically
tion.
X Pull lever = up to the stop.
The steering wheel is locked again.
Mirrors
Rear-view mirror
Button and switch for mirror adjustment

X Before pulling away, turn the key to position 2
in the ignition lock (Y page 119).
X Press switch ; to position 1 for the left-hand
exterior mirror or to position 2 for the right-
hand exterior mirror.
X Press button : up or down, to the right or
left.
Mirrors 81
Adjust the exterior mirrors in such a way that

you can get a good overview of road and traf-
fic conditions.
i The exterior mirrors are automatically
heated at low outside temperatures.
Z
82 Exterior lighting
Useful information Light switch
This Operator's Manual describes all models as Operation

well as standard and optional equipment of your
ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the described functions. This also
applies to systems and functions relevant to
safety.
Exterior lighting
Lights and windshield wipers
1 Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytime

Important safety notes running lamps
For reasons of safety, we recommend that you 2 $ Lights off
drive with the lights switched on even during the 3 T Parking lamps, license plate and
daytime. There may be differences in operation instrument cluster lighting
due to legal requirements and voluntary recom- 4 L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
mendations in some countries. 5 N Fog lamps
6 R Rear fog lamp
If you hear a warning tone when you leave the
Bulb failure indicator vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
The bulb failure indicator is only an aid. You are X Turn the light switch to $ or Ã.
responsible for the proper functioning of the or
vehicle lighting. Insufficient or non-functioning
X If the rear fog lamp is switched on: press the
vehicle lighting puts the operating safety of the
vehicle at risk. light switch in to the stop.
For this reason, check the condition and func- The turn signals, high-beam headlamps and the
tion of your vehicle's lighting system and, if nec- high-beam flasher are operated using the com-
essary, that of the trailer before each journey. bination switch (Y page 84).
The bulb failure indicator monitors all of the
exterior lighting lamps, except the perimeter Low-beam headlamps
lamp and the trailer lighting. If a bulb fails, either
the b(Y page 35) indicator lamp lights up, or X To switch on: turn the key to position 2 in the
you will see a corresponding message in the ignition lock or start the engine.
display (Y page 185). X Turn the light switch to position L.
The L indicator lamp in the instrument
i Depending on the equipment, the bulb fail- cluster lights up.
ure indicator can fail for all lamps with the
exception of the turn signal lamps.
Daytime running lamps
You can activate/deactivate the daytime run-
ning lamps function using the on-board com-
puter.
This is not possible in countries where daytime
running lamps are a legal requirement.
Exterior lighting 83
The daytime running lamps function must be X To switch on automatic headlamp mode:
activated using the on-board computer: turn the light switch to Ã.
Rvehicles with steering wheel buttons Key in position 1 in the ignition lock: the park-
(Y page 170) ing lamps switch on or off automatically
depending on the ambient light.
Rvehicles without steering wheel buttons
(Y page 163) When the engine is running: if you activate the
"daytime running lamps" function using the
X To switch on: turn the light switch to the
on-board computer, the daytime running
$ position. lamps are switched on. The parking lamps and
The low-beam headlamps, parking lamps and low-beam headlamps also switch on or off
license plate lamp are switched on when the automatically, depending on the ambient
engine is running. The L indicator lamp in light.
the instrument cluster lights up.
When the low-beam headlamps are switched
i USA only: on, the L indicator lamp in the instrument
If you turn the light switch to the T or L cluster lights up.

position, the parking lamps or low-beam
headlamps switch on. If you turn the light
switch to the Ã position, the daytime run- Fog lamps/rear fog lamp
ning lamps remain switched on.
G WARNING
i Canada only: If you suspect that driving conditions will be
If you turn the light switch to the L posi- foggy, turn the light switch to L before you
tion, the low-beam headlamps are switched start your journey. Your vehicle may other-
on. If you turn the light switch to the T or
Ã position, the daytime running lamps wise not be visible and you could endanger
remain switched on. yourself and others.
Automatic headlamp mode G WARNING

In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
G WARNING only switch from position Ã to L with
When the light switch is set to Ã, the low- the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
beam headlamps may not be switched on Switching from Ã to L will briefly
automatically if there is fog, snow or other switch off the headlamps. Doing so while driv-
causes of poor visibility due to the weather ing in low ambient lighting conditions may
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an result in an accident.
accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock
L. or start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L or T.
Automatic headlamp mode is only a driving aid. i If your vehicle is only equipped with one rear
You are responsible for the vehicle lighting at all fog lamp, you must turn the light switch to
times. L.
Depending on ambient light, the rain and light
sensor automatically switches on the parking i When the light switch is set to Ã you
lamps, low-beam headlamps and the license cannot switch on the front and rear fog lamps.
plate lamp. This excludes weather-related X To switch on the front fog lamp: pull the
impairments to visibility, such as snow, fog or light switch out to the first detent.
spray. The green N indicator lamp on the light
If there is fog, snow or spray, turn the light switch lights up.
switch quickly from Ã to L. You could
otherwise briefly interrupt operation of the
headlamps.
Z
X To switch on the rear fog lamp: pull the light High-beam headlamps and high-beam
switch out to the second detent. flasher
The yellow R indicator lamp on the light
switch lights up.
X To switch off the front and rear fog lamps:
push in the light switch to the stop.
The R and N indicator lamp on the light
switch go out.
Combination switch
Turn signal lamp
: High-beam headlamps
; High-beam flasher
X To switch on the high-beam headlamps:
switch on the low-beam headlamps
(Y page 82).
X Press the combination switch forwards :.
The K indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up.
i In the Ã position, the high-beam head-
lamps are only switched on when it is dark and
: To indicate a right turn the engine is running.
; To indicate a left turn X To switch off the high-beam headlamps:
move the combination switch back to its nor-
X To indicate: press the combination switch in mal position.
desired direction : or ; until it engages. The K indicator lamp in the instrument
The combination switch automatically returns cluster goes out.
to its original position after large steering
X To switch on the high-beam flasher: turn
movements.
the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
X To indicate briefly: press the combination
X Pull the combination switch briefly in direc-
switch briefly in desired direction : or ;.
The corresponding turn signal flashes three tion of arrow ;.
times.
Headlamp range adjustment

Exterior lighting 85
The headlamp range control is used to adapt the You should therefore ensure in this and simi-
downward angle of the headlamp beams in lar situations that the vehicle is visible from
accordance with the load on your vehicle. The
cone of light from the headlamps changes if the rear in accordance with the relevant
seats are occupied or if the cargo compartment national regulations, by using the warning tri-
is being loaded or unloaded. This can impair vis- angle, for instance.
ibility and cause glare to oncoming traffic.
You can only adjust the headlamp range while
the engine is running.
X Turn headlamp range control : to the cor-
responding position. The road ahead should
be lit up for 40 m to 100 m and the low-beam
headlamps should not cause glare to oncom-
ing traffic.
Select position g if the vehicle is unladen.

Cornering lamps
Hazard warning lamp switch
The cornering lamps improve the illumination of
the road over a wide angle in the direction you X To switch on/off: press the £ hazard
are turning, enabling better visibility in tight warning lamp switch.
bends, for example. If you have indicated a turn while the hazard
The cornering light function switches on warning lamps are switched on, only the turn
automatically, if: signal lamps on the side of the vehicle selected
Ryou are traveling at a speed of less than will light up.
25 mph (40 km/h) and you switch on a turn The hazard warning lamps switch on automati-
signal or turn the steering wheel. cally if:
Ryou are traveling at a speeds of between Ran air bag is deployed.
25 mph (40 km/h) and 43 mph (70 km/h) and Ryou brake sharply and bring the vehicle to a
turn the steering wheel. halt from a speed of more than 45 mph
The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short (70 km/h).
time, but is automatically switched off after no If the hazard warning lamps have been switched
more than 3 minutes. on automatically, press the £ hazard warn-
i If reverse gear is engaged the lamp on the ing lamp switch to switch them off.
opposite side of the vehicle switches on i The hazard warning lamps work even when
instead. the ignition is switched off.
Hazard warning lamps Headlamp cleaning system

G WARNING The headlamps are cleaned automatically with a
The rear exterior light will be covered if you: high-pressure water jet if the "Wipe with washer
fluid" function is activated (Y page 96) while
Ropen the rear doors by 90° the low-beam headlamps are on and the engine
Ropen the rear dropside. is running.
The vehicle will then be difficult for other road You can find information on refilling washer fluid
in the "Maintenance and care" section
users to see or will not be seen by them at all, (Y page 225).
particularly if it is dark or visibility is poor.
Z
Highbeam Assist Activating/deactivating Highbeam

Assist
General notes
X To activate: switch on the Highbeam Assist
You can use this function to set the headlamps function using the on-board computer
to change between low beam and high beam (Y page 170).
automatically. The system recognizes vehicles X Turn the light switch to the Ã position.
with their lights on, either approaching from the
X Press the combination switch beyond the
opposite direction or traveling in front of your
pressure point in the direction of arrow :
vehicle, and consequently switches the head-
lamps from high beam to low beam. (Y page 84).
Highbeam Assist is active.
Once the system no longer detects any other
vehicles, it reactivates the high-beam head- The _ or indicator lamp in the
lamps. multifunction display lights up when it is dark
The system's optical sensor is located behind and the light sensor activates the low-beam
the windshield near the overhead control panel. headlamps.

If you are driving at speeds above approx-
Important safety notes imately 22 mph (35 km/h) and no other road
users have been detected:
G WARNING The high-beam headlamps are switched on
Highbeam Assist does not recognize road automatically. The K indicator lamp in the
users: instrument cluster also lights up.
If you are driving at speeds below approx-
Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians imately 19 mph (30 km/h), other road users
Rwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists have been detected or the roads are ade-
Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier
quately lit:
The high-beam headlamps are switched off
In very rare cases, Highbeam Assist may fail to automatically. The K indicator lamp in the
recognize other road users who have lights, or instrument cluster goes out. The _ or
may recognize them too late. In this or similar
situations, the automatic high-beam head- indicator lamp in the multifunction
lamps will not be deactivated or will be acti- display remains lit.
X To deactivate: move the combination switch
vated regardless. There is a risk of an acci-
back to its normal position or move the light
dent.
switch to another position.
Always carefully observe the traffic conditions
and switch off the high-beam headlamps in The _ or indicator lamp in the
good time. multifunction display goes out.
Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road,

weather or traffic conditions. Highbeam Assist Headlamps fogged up on the inside
is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting
the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, vis- The headlamps may fog up on the inside if there
ibility and traffic conditions. is high atmospheric humidity.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be X Switch on the low-beam headlamps and drive
restricted if there is: off.
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or The level of moisture diminishes, depending
snow on the length of the journey and the weather
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else covering
conditions (humidity and temperature).
the sensors If the level of moisture does not diminish:
X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Interior lighting 87
Interior lighting Automatic control

Switching the dashboard lighting on/ The interior light comes on if you:
off Runlock the vehicle
Ropen the driver's or the front-passenger door
Overview Rremove the key from the ignition lock
The interior light switches off again automati-
cally.
If a door is left open, the interior lighting
switches off after approximately 20 minutes.
Switching the rear compartment

lighting on/off centrally (Passenger

Van)
Standard interior light

1 Interior light switched on
2 Interior light switched off
3 Automatic control system switched on
Rear compartment lighting switch

: To switch on the rear compartment lighting
; Automatic control
= To switch off the rear compartment lighting
You can switch the rear compartment lighting
on/off centrally on Passenger Vans that are
Interior lights in the overhead control panel equipped with convenience control.
: Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off There may also be a switch on the rear com-
; Switches the right-hand reading lamp partment lights that allows you to switch them
on/off on/off separately. If you switch off rear com-
= Right-hand reading lamp partment lighting =, the rear compartment
? Interior light light is switched off, regardless of the position of
its own switch.
A Switches the automatic control system on/
off If you move the rear compartment lighting
switch to center position ;, the automatic con-
B Switches the interior light on/off
trol system is switched on. When you open a
C Left-hand reading lamp door or unlock the vehicle, the rear compart-
If you manually switch on the interior lighting or ment lighting then goes on automatically. Once
reading lamps on the overhead control panel, the doors are closed, the rear compartment
they switch off automatically after 20 minutes. lighting switches off automatically after
20 minutes.
Z
88 Interior lighting
Switching the rear/cargo compart- Motion detector

ment lamp on/off
G WARNING
The motion detector sends the invisible infra-
red radiation emitted by LEDs (light emitting
diodes).
These LEDs are classified as class 1M lasers
and can damage the retina if you:
Rlook directly into the unfiltered laser beam
of the motion detector for an extended
period
Rlook directly into the laser beam of the
motion detector using optical instruments,
Interior light with switch (example: Cargo Van)

e.g. eyeglasses or a magnifying glass.
1 Automatic control
2 To switch off the interior lighting
There is a risk of injury.
3 To switch on the interior lighting Never look directly into the motion detector.
The load compartment lighting is also switched

on by the motion detector in the load compart-
ment on panel vans equipped with this feature.
If the motion detector detects a movement in
the cargo compartment when the vehicle is sta-
tionary, the cargo compartment lighting
switches on for approximately two minutes.
The cargo compartment lighting can be
switched on by the motion detector within
four seconds if:
Rthe rear interior light switch (Y page 87) is set
Interior light with switch (example: Passenger Van to automatic control.
with rear-compartment air conditioning) Rthe vehicle is stationary, the parking brake is
1 To switch on the interior lighting applied and the brake pedal is not being
2 To switch off the interior lighting depressed
3 Automatic control or
Rthe selector lever is in position P on vehicles
For Cargo Vans and Passenger Vans without
convenience control, the switch for the interior with automatic transmission and the brake
lighting is on the rear interior light in the cargo pedal is not being depressed and
compartment/vehicle interior. Rthe vehicle has not been locked from the out-
If you move the switch to automatic control, the side using the key
rear/cargo compartment lamps go on when you The motion detector switches off automatically
open a door or unlock the vehicle. They switch if no change is detected in the vehicle for several
off automatically after 20 minutes, or when you hours, e.g. if a door is opened, if the ignition key
close the doors. is turned, etc. This prevents the battery from
becoming discharged.
Changing bulbs 89
Changing bulbs ROnly use spare bulbs of the same type and
with the prescribed voltage
Important safety notes RProtect the bulbs from moisture when in use.
If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a
G DANGER qualified specialist workshop.
Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can get RHave the LEDs and bulbs of the following
an electric shock if you remove the cover of lamps changed at a qualified specialist work-
the Xenon bulb and touch the electrical con- shop:
tacts. There is a risk of fatal injury. - the additional turn signals in the exterior
Never touch the parts or the electrical con- mirrors

- the high-mounted brake lamp
tacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have work on
- LED daytime running lamps (Bi-Xenon
the Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified spe-
headlamps)
cialist workshop.
- Bi-Xenon lamps (Bi-Xenon headlamps)

- front fog lamps
G WARNING
If you require assistance changing bulbs, con-
Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot sult a qualified specialist workshop.
when operating. If you change a bulb, you
could burn yourself on these components.
There is a risk of injury. Front bulbs
Allow these components to cool down before
changing a bulb. Overview of bulb replacement – bulb
types
! Make sure the bulbs are always securely The following bulbs can be replaced. Bulb types
installed. can be found in the legend.
If your vehicle is equipped with Bi-Xenon bulbs,
you can recognize this by the following: the cone
of light from the Xenon bulbs moves from the
top to the bottom and back again when you start
the engine. For this to be observed, the low-
beam headlamps must be switched on before
starting the engine.
The bulbs and lamps are an essential compo-
nent of vehicle safety. You must therefore make
sure that these function correctly at all times.
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
RAlways switch off the vehicle's lighting sys-
tem before changing a bulb.
Vehicles with halogen headlamps
This will prevent a short circuit. : Turn signal lamp, parking lamp, side marker
RDo not touch the glass tube of new bulbs with lamp: NAK 3457
your bare hands. Always use a clean, lint-free ; Daytime running lamps: W21W
cloth or only touch the base of the bulb when
= Low-beam headlamps: H7 55W
installing.
? High-beam headlamps: H7 55W
Even minor contamination can burn into the
glass surface and reduce the service life of the
bulbs.
RDo not use a bulb that has been dropped or
that has scratches on its glass tube.
The bulb could explode.
ROnly use bulbs in closed lamps which have
been designed for this purpose.
Z
90 Changing bulbs
Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamps Example: halogen headlamps

: Turn signal lamp, parking lamp, side marker ; Low-beam headlamp bulb holder
lamp: NAK 3457 = Bulb holder for high-beam headlamp
; Cornering light function: H7 55W X Turn the corresponding socket with bulb ;
Vehicles with additional turn signals in the or = counter-clockwise and pull it out of the
exterior mirrors lamp.
Additional turn signal lamp: HPC 16WY X Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.
X Insert the new bulb in such a way that its base
Low-beam headlamps and high-beam fits into the recess of the bulb holder.
headlamps/cornering lamp X Insert the bulb holder with the bulb into the
lamp and turn it clockwise to tighten.
The bulb holder engages audibly.
X Place housing cover : into the opening and
turn in the opposite direction of the arrow.
X Close the hood.
Cornering light function/daytime run-

ning lamps
Example: halogen headlamps

X Switch off the lighting system.
X Open the hood (Y page 219).
X Turn housing cover : in the direction of the
arrow and remove it.

X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and
remove.
Changing bulbs 91
X Press the new bulb into bulb holder : and

screw it in clockwise.
X Insert bulb holder : into the lamp and turn it
clockwise to tighten.
X Close the hood.
Additional turn signal lamp (all-wheel-

drive vehicles)
X Bi-Xenon headlamps: turn bulb holder with

bulb ; counter-clockwise and remove it.
Halogen headlamps: press the spring

catches of the bulb holder together and
remove the bulb holder with bulb ;.
X Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.
X Press a new bulb into the bulb holder.
X Bi-Xenon headlamps: insert bulb holder with
bulb ; into the lamp and turn clockwise.
Additional turn signals (example: Cargo Van and
Halogen headlamps: insert the bulb holder Passenger Van)
with bulb ; into the lamp.
The bulb holder with bulb ; engages audibly. The additional turn signals are mounted on the
X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise to the
side of the vehicle's front wings.
stop. X Switch off the lighting system.
The cap audibly engages. X Undo screws : and remove lamp lens ;.
X Close the hood (Y page 220). X Applying light pressure to the bulb, turn it
counter-clockwise and remove it from the
Turn signal lamp bulb holder.
X Press the new bulb into the bulb holder and
X Position lamp lens ; and tighten screws :.

X Turn bulb holder : counter-clockwise and
remove it.
X Applying light pressure to the bulb, turn it
counter-clockwise and remove it from bulb
holder :.
Z
92 Changing bulbs
Rear bulbs (Cargo Van/Passenger Tail lamps

Van)
Overview of bulb types

X Open the rear door.
X Undo screws : and unclip the lamp lens in
the direction of the arrow.
X Pull the connector off the bulb holder.
Lights Bulb type

: High-mounted brake LED
lamp
; Brake lamp/tail lamp P21W/5W
= Turn signal lamp PY 21 W
? Tail lamps/standing R5W
lamps
A License plate lamp W5W
B Rear fog lamp (driver's P21W
side)
C Backup lamp P21W ; Retaining lugs
= Brake lamps
? Turn signal lamp
A Standing lamp/tail lamp
B Backup lamp
C Rear fog lamp
Changing bulbs 93
X Release retaining lugs ; and take the bulb Rear bulbs (Cab Chassis)
holder out of the tail lamp.
X Applying light pressure to the bulb, turn it Overview of bulb types
bulb holder.
X Press the connector into the bulb holder.
X Insert the lamp lens.
To do this, clip the bulb holder into the three
holes provided at the side and tighten
screws :.
License plate lamp

Chassis (example: Cab Chassis)
Lights Bulb type

: Perimeter lamp/stand- R5W
ing lamp
; Tail lamps R5W
= Brake lamps P 21 W
? Turn signal lamps PY 21 W
A Backup lamps P 21 W
X Switch off the lighting system. B Rear fog lamps (driver's P 21 W
X Insert a screwdriver or similar implement into side)
recess ; and carefully pry off lamp lens :.
X Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder. C License plate lamp R5W
X Insert a new bulb.
X Align lamp lens : and clip it in so that it Tail lamps
engages.
: Screws
; Lamp lens
= Perimeter lamp/standing lamp
? Turn signal lamp
A Brake lamps
B Tail lamps
Z
94 Changing bulbs
C Rear fog lamp Perimeter lamp (Cab Chassis)

D License plate lamp
E Backup lamp
X Undo screws : and remove lamp lens ;.
bulb holder.
X Position lamp lens ; and tighten screws :.
Additional lamps
Additional turn signal lamp on the roof
Type of lamp: W 5 W
X Undo screws : and remove the lamp unit.
X Turn bulb holder ; and remove it.
X Remove the bulb from bulb holder ;.
X Press the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Screw bulb holder ; into the lamp unit.
X Carefully position the lamp housing and
tighten screws :.
Type of lamp: P 21 W
X Switch off the lighting system. Courtesy lights, rear compartment
X Undo screws : and remove lamp lens ;.
bulb holder.
X Position lamp lens ; and tighten screws :
again.
Bulb type: W5W

X Press in the latching spring of courtesy
light : with a suitable implement, e.g. a
screwdriver.
X Pry off courtesy light :.
X Disconnect cable connector =.
X Unscrew bulb holder ;.
Changing bulbs 95
X Remove the bulb from bulb holder ;.

X Press the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Screw bulb holder ; into courtesy light :.
X Connect cable connector =.
The connector locking spring must engage.
X Align courtesy light : on the side and
engage.
Interior lighting
General notes Interior light with switch
! Have the bulbs in the overhead control Type of lamp: K 15 W

panel replaced at a qualified specialist work- X Switch off the interior lighting.
shop. You could otherwise damage the over- X Press in the catch spring of lamp housing :
head control panel. with a suitable object, and pry off lamp hous-
ing :.
Front interior light X Press the contact spring of bulb holder ;
outwards and remove bulb =.
X Insert new bulb =.
X Position lamp housing : on the left-hand
side and engage.
i Vehicles with LED lighting: if an LED is
faulty, consult a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Interior light without switch
Type of lamp: K 18 W
X Switch off the interior lighting.
X Press spring catch ; in the direction of the
arrow and lift off interior light :.
X Remove bulb = from the bulb holder.
X Align interior light : on the right-hand side
and engage the spring catch.
Interior light without switch
Type of lamp: K 15 W
Rear interior light
Interior light with switch X Press in the catch spring of lamp housing :
with a suitable object, and pry off lamp hous-
ing :.
X Open protective cover ?.
X Press the contact spring of bulb holder ;
outwards and remove bulb =.
Z
96 Windshield wipers
XFold protective cover ? back into place. If it is necessary to switch on the windshield
XPosition lamp housing : on the left-hand wipers in dry weather conditions, always use
side and engage. washer fluid when operating the windshield
wipers.
i Vehicles with LED lighting: if an LED is
faulty, consult a qualified specialist work- ! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the
shop. windshield after the vehicle has been washed
in an automatic car wash, wax or other resi-
Cargo compartment lamp dues may be the reason for this. Clean the
windshield using washer fluid after washing
the vehicle in an automatic car wash.
! Vehicles with rain/light sensor:
Switch the wipers off in dry weather. Other-
wise, dirt or optical effects may cause unde-
sired windshield wiper sweeps. This could
then damage the windshield wiper blades or

scratch the windshield.
The windshield will no longer be wiped properly
if the wiper blades are worn. Replace the wiper
blades twice a year (Y page 97), ideally in
spring and fall.
Type of lamp: W 10 W
X Undo screws : and remove the lamp lens.
X Press bulb ; into the bulb holder and
unscrew it counter-clockwise.
X Press new bulb ; into the bulb holder and
screw it in clockwise. Combination switch
X Position the lamp lens and tighten screws :. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
lock.
i Vehicles with LED cargo compartment X Turn the combination switch in the direction
lamp: if an LED is defective, consult a quali- of arrow ; to the appropriate setting
fied specialist workshop. depending on the intensity of the rain.
X Single wipe: push the combination switch
briefly to the pressure point in the direction of
Windshield wipers arrow :.
X To wipe with washer fluid: press the com-
Switching the windshield wiper bination switch beyond the pressure point in
on/off the direction of arrow :.
! Do not operate the windshield wipers when The detent positions of the combination switch
the windshield is dry, as this could damage correspond to the following wiper speeds:
the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has col- 0 Windshield wipers off
lected on the windshield can scratch the glass
if wiping takes place when the windshield is I Intermittent wipe
dry. II Normal wipe
III Rapid wipe
Windshield wipers 97
i Canada only: The rear window wiper switches on automati-

If the windshield wipers are switched on and cally if you engage reverse gear and the wind-
you stop the vehicle, the windshield wiper shield wipers are on.
speed is reduced. For example, if you have
selected level II and stop the vehicle, wiping
continues with intermittent wipe while the Replacing the wiper blades
vehicle is stationary. If intermittent wipe is
selected, the intervals become longer. G WARNING
Vehicles with a rain and light sensor: you If the windshield wipers begin to move while
can use level I as the universal setting. The you are changing the wiper blades, you could
rain and light sensor sets the appropriate wip- be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of
ing frequency automatically, according to the injury.
intensity of the rain. When you stop the vehi-
cle, levels III and II are switched down to Always switch off the windshield wipers and
level I automatically. ignition before changing the wiper blades.

The windshield wiper will return to the original
level when you drive faster than 5 mph ! Never open the hood if a windshield wiper
(8 km/h). arm has been folded away from the wind-
shield.
You can adjust the sensitivity of the rain and
light sensor using the on-board computer Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a
(Y page 171). wiper blade back onto the windshield/rear
window.
Information on checking the washer fluid level
can be found in the "Maintenance and care" Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when
section (Y page 225). you change the wiper blade. If you release the
windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade
and it falls onto the windshield, the windshield
may be damaged by the force of the impact.
Switching the rear window wiper on/ We recommend that you have the wiper
off blades replaced at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
! Only hold the wiper blade by the wiper arm.
You could otherwise damage the wiper rub-
ber.
The windshield will no longer be wiped properly
if the wiper blades are worn. Replace the wiper
blades twice a year, ideally in spring and fall.
Combination switch
: è Rear window wiper switch
2 ô To wipe with washer fluid
3 I To switch on intermittent wiping
4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping
5 ô To wipe with washer fluid
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
lock. Front windshield wiper arm with wiper blade
X Turn switch : to the corresponding position
Z
98 Windshield wipers
X Fold wiper arm = away from the windshield. X Slide new wiper blade : into the retainer on
X Set wiper blade : at right angles to the wiper wiper arm =.
arm. X Press new wiper blade : onto wiper arm =
X Press both retaining clips ; together in the until you hear retaining clips ; engage.
direction of the arrow and swing wiper X Fold wiper arm = back onto the windshield
blade : away from wiper arm =. again.
X Pull wiper blade : up and out of the retainer
on wiper arm =.
Problems with the windshield wipers

The windshield wiper Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wiper
jams. movement. The wiper motor has switched off.

X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and
traffic conditions.
X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the ignition
lock.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch on the windshield wipers again.
The windshield wiper There is a malfunction in the windshield wiper drive.

does not move at all. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
The windshield washer The spray nozzles are misaligned.
fluid from the spray noz- X Have the spray nozzles checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
zles no longer hits the
center of the wind-
shield/rear window.
Overview of climate control systems 99
Useful information Climate control is only operational when the

engine is running. The system only functions
optimally when the side windows are closed.
well as standard and optional equipment of your i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during
vehicle that were available at the time of going warm weather. In order to cool the vehicle
to print. Country-specific variations are possi- more rapidly, switch climate control to air-
ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped recirculation mode briefly. This will speed up
with all of the described functions. This also the cooling process and the desired interior
applies to systems and functions relevant to temperature will be reached more quickly.
safety.
i The integrated filter can filter out most par-
ticles of dust and completely filters out pollen.
A clogged filter reduces the airflow into the
vehicle interior. For this reason, you should
always observe the interval for replacing the
Overview of climate control systems filter, which is specified in the Maintenance
Booklet. As it depends on environmental con-
Important safety notes ditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval
Climate control
Observe the recommended settings on the fol- may be shorter than that stated in the Main-
lowing pages. Otherwise, the windows could fog tenance Booklet.
up.
Climate control regulates the temperature and
the humidity in the vehicle interior and filters
undesirable substances from the air.
Heating control panel
: Sets the temperature (Y page 103)

z Defrosts the windshield (Y page 104)
; K Sets the airflow (Y page 103)
= e Activates and deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 105)
100 Overview of climate control systems
? Sets the air distribution (Y page 103)

sz Defrosts the windshield (Y page 104)
Information on heating reached, turn the temperature control back

down in small steps.
Below, you can find a number of notes and rec- ROnly use the settings for defrosting the wind-
ommendations to help you use the heating opti- shield briefly, until the windshield is clear
mally. again.
RSet the temperature control to the middle ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if
level. Only change the temperature in small there are unpleasant outside odors or when in
increments. a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up
If you wish to heat up the vehicle interior as as no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-
quickly as possible, set the temperature con- recirculation mode. The indicator lamp in the
trol to the z maximum setting. When the h button comes on when the function is
desired interior temperature has been switched on.
Climate control
Control panel for the air-conditioning system
: Sets the temperature (Y page 103)

; Sets the airflow (Y page 103)
K Increases the airflow
I Reduces the airflow
= e Activates and deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 105)
? x Switches the reheat function (window air dehumidification) on and off (Y page 104)
A Sets the air distribution (Y page 103)
sz Defrosts the windshield (Y page 104)
B ¿ Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 103)
C Blower setting bar display
Overview of climate control systems 101
Optimum use of the air-conditioning ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" function
system briefly until the windshield is clear again.
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if
Below, you can find a number of notes and rec- there are unpleasant outside odors or when in
ommendations to help you use the air-condi- a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up
tioning system optimally. as no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-
RSwitch on the cooling with air dehumidifica- recirculation mode.
tion function. The indicator lamp above the ROnly use reheat mode until the windows are
rocker switch lights up. clear again.
RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). Only
change the temperature in small increments.
Rear-compartment heating control panel
Climate control
: i Switches rear-compartment heating on and off (Y page 102)
; K Sets the airflow (Y page 103)
= Sets the temperature (Y page 103)
Optimum use of rear-compartment

heating
For optimum climate control, set the tempera-
ture control to the middle level. Only change the
temperature in small increments.
102 Operating the climate control system
Control panel for rear-compartment air-conditioning system

Climate control
: Sets the airflow (Y page 103)

K Increases the airflow
I Reduces the airflow
; Sets the temperature (Y page 103)
= Blower setting bar display
? i Switches rear-compartment air-conditioning on and off (Y page 102)
Optimum use of rear-compartment air Vehicle with heating

conditioning X To switch on: set airflow control ; down to
at least level 1 (Y page 100).
For optimum climate control, set the tempera-
ture control to the middle level. Only change the X To switch off: set airflow control ; up to the
temperature in small increments. 0 position (Y page 100).
Vehicle with air conditioning
X To switch on: press the K button.
Operating the climate control system The blower speeds are shown in bars next to
Switching the climate control on/off the button.
X To switch off: press the I button and,
Important information after reaching the lowest blower speed, press
it again.
When the climate control is switched off, air
intake and air circulation also stop. Only use this
setting for a brief period. Otherwise, the win- Activating/deactivating rear-compart-
dows could fog up. ment climate control via the control
panel
Activating/deactivating climate con- X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.
trol via the control panel
Operating the climate control system 103
Vehicle with rear-compartment heating/ Increasing and reducing temperature in

rear-compartment air conditioning the rear compartment via the control
X To switch on/off: press the i switch. panel
If the indicator lamp in the button lights up,
the rear-compartment heating/rear-com- Only change the temperature in small incre-
partment air conditioning is switched on. ments.
X Switch on climate control (Y page 102).
X Turn rear-compartment temperature control
Switching the cooling with air dehu- = (Y page 101) or rear-compartment air-
conditioning system ; (Y page 102) clock-
midification function on/off wise to increase or counterclockwise to
reduce the temperature.
Important information
i Vehicles with additional air conditioning and
If you switch off the "Cooling with air dehumid- heating in the rear compartment: if you set
ification" function, the air inside the vehicle will the temperature control to the center posi-
not be cooled (in warm weather) or dehumidi- tion, only one of the two climate control sys-
fied. The windows could fog up more quickly. tems works in the rear compartment and in
The cooling with air dehumidification function is air-recirculation mode (Y page 105).
Climate control
only available when the engine is running. The
air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified
according to the temperature selected. Setting the air distribution
Condensation may appear on the underside of
the vehicle when in cooling mode. This is normal Air distribution settings
and not a sign that there is a malfunction.
The air distribution symbols have the following
meanings:
Switching on and off
m Directs air through the center and side
Vehicle with air conditioning air vents
X Press the ¿ button. s Directs air to the windshield and the air
If the indicator lamp in the button lights up, z vents
cooling with air dehumidification is switched q Directs air to the windshield, the air
on. vents and into the footwell
r Directs air to the air vents and into the
footwell
Setting the temperature
Adjusting
Increasing and reducing temperature in
the front compartment via the control X Switch on climate control (Y page 102).
panel X Set air-distribution control ? for the heating
(Y page 99) or air-conditioning system A
Only change the temperature in small incre- (Y page 100) to the corresponding symbol.
ments. Start at the center position, or at 72 ‡
(22 †).
Setting the airflow
X Turn temperature control : clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to reduce the X Switch on climate control (Y page 102).
temperature (Y page 100). X Vehicle with heating/rear-compartment
heating: set airflow control ; of the heating
(Y page 99) or of the rear-compartment heat-
ing (Y page 101) to the desired level.
X Vehicle with air conditioning/rear-com-
partment air conditioning: press the I
104 Operating the climate control system
button to reduce or the K button to Clearing condensation from the win-

increase the airflow. dows
The blower speeds are shown in bars next to
the buttons. Windows fogged up on the inside
You should only select this setting until the win-
dows are clear again.
Defrosting the windows
X Vehicle with window heating: switch on the
You can use the "defrosting" function to defrost front (Y page 105) and/or rear window
the windshield or to demist the inside of the defroster (Y page 105) .
windshield and the side windows. X Switch on climate control (Y page 102).
Only use the following settings until the win- X Switch off air-recirculation mode
dows are clear again. (Y page 105).
X Vehicle with window heating: switch on the
Vehicle with heating
front (Y page 105) and/or rear window
defroster (Y page 105) . X Set temperature control : to a higher tem-
X Switch on climate control (Y page 102). perature (Y page 99).
X Set airflow control ; to a higher blower set-
Climate control
Vehicle with heating

ting. It should be set at least to level two
X Set temperature control : and airflow con- (Y page 99).
trol ; to z (Y page 99). X Set air-distribution control ? to s z
X Set air-distribution control ? to s z (Y page 99).
(Y page 99). i If the windows still fog up, set the control as
X Close the center air vents (Y page 106) and described for defrosting (Y page 104).
the air outlets for the headroom and the rear Vehicle with air conditioning
compartment (Y page 107).
X Direct the side air vents towards the side win- X Activate cooling with air dehumidification
dows and open the defroster vents for the (Y page 103).
side windows (Y page 107). X Press the ¨ button (Y page 100).
Reheat mode is activated. The indicator lamp
Vehicle with air conditioning in the switch lights up.
X Set temperature control : to To deactivate reheat mode, press the ¨
z (Y page 100). button again. The indicator lamp in the button
X Press the K button until the maximum goes out.
blower output is reached.
All bars in the display next to the button light Windows fogged up on the outside
up.
X Set air-distribution control A to s z You should only select this setting until the
(Y page 100). windshield is clear again.
X Close the center air vents (Y page 106) and X Switch on the windshield wipers (Y page 96).
the air outlets for the headroom and the rear X Switch on climate control (Y page 102).
compartment (Y page 107). X Adjust air distribution to the footwell
X Direct the side air vents towards the side win- (Y page 103).
dows and open the defroster vents for the X Close the air vents (Y page 106).
side windows (Y page 107).
Operating the climate control system 105
Window heating Rear window defroster

Windshield heater
Rear window defroster switch

The rear window defroster consumes a lot of
Windshield heater switch power. You should therefore switch it off as
The windshield heater consumes a lot of power. soon as the window is clear. The rear window
Climate control
You should therefore switch it off as soon as the heating otherwise only switches off automati-
windshield is clear. Otherwise, the windshield cally after 12 minutes.
heating only switches off automatically after five X Start the engine.
minutes. X To activate and deactivate: press the |
X Start the engine. button.
X To switch on/off: press the z switch. The indicator lamp in the | button comes
The indicator lamp in the z button comes on when the rear window defroster is
on when the windshield heating is switched switched on.
on. If the indicator lamp in the | rear window
If the indicator lamp in the z windshield defroster button flashes, the on-board voltage is
heating button flashes, the on-board voltage is too low. The rear window defroster has switched
too low. The windshield heating has switched off off prematurely or cannot be activated.
prematurely or cannot be activated. X Switch off any consumers that are not
X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps or interior light-
required, e.g. reading lamps or interior lighting.
ing. If enough on-board voltage is available again
If the on-board voltage is sufficient again within within 30 seconds, the rear window heating
30 seconds, the windshield heating switches on automatically switches on again. It otherwise
again automatically. It otherwise remains remains switched off.
switched off.
Switching air-recirculation mode

on/off
When you switch on air-recirculation mode, the
windows could fog up more quickly, in particular
at low outside temperatures. Only switch on air-
recirculation mode for a short time.
You can deactivate the intake of fresh air if
unpleasant odors enter the vehicle from out-
side. The air inside the vehicle will only be cir-
culated.
106 Adjusting the air vents
Heating and air-conditioning system On vehicles with a rear-compartment air-condi-

tioning system, you can also adjust the air vents
Air-recirculation mode switches off automati- in the roof duct.
cally after about 10 to 30 minutes, depending on
the outside temperature. i For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjust the
sliders of the center air vents to the center
position.
X To activate/deactivate: press the e but-
ton. In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air
If the indicator lamp in the e button lights through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
up, air-recirculation mode is activated. please observe the following notes:
Rkeep the air inlet grille on the hood free of
Rear-compartment heating and rear- blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves.
Rnever cover the vents or the ventilation grilles
compartment air-conditioning system
in the vehicle interior.
On vehicles with rear-compartment heating and
a rear-compartment air-conditioning system,
you can activate or deactivate air-recirculation Setting the center air vents
mode for the rear-compartment climate control.
Climate control

X To activate: set the temperature control of
rear-compartment heating = (Y page 101) or
rear-compartment air conditioning system ;
(Y page 102) to the center position.
Only one of the two climate control systems in
the rear compartment is activated and is in
air-recirculation mode.
X To deactivate: turn the temperature control
of rear-compartment heating = (Y page 101)
or rear-compartment air-conditioning sys-
tem ; (Y page 102) clockwise or counter- : Center air vent, left
clockwise. Only change the temperature in
small increments. ; Center air vent, right
= Thumbwheel for center air vent, right
? Thumbwheel for center air vent, left
Adjusting the air vents X To open: turn thumbwheel = to the left or
thumbwheel ? to the right.
Important safety notes X To close: turn thumbwheel = to the right or
thumbwheel ? to the left.
G WARNING
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in
the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There
is a risk of injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
maintain a sufficient distance to the air out-
lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior.
The center and side air vents are adjustable.

Operating the auxiliary heating system 107
Setting the side air vents Adjusting the air vents in the roof duct
! Always leave at least one air vent open.
If the rear-compartment air conditioning is
switched on and all the air vents are closed,
the air-conditioning system may be damaged.
Side air vent (example: right-hand side of the vehi-

cle)
X To open: turn thumbwheel = of side air
vents : upward.
Climate control
X To close: turn thumbwheel = of side air On vehicles with rear-compartment air condi-
vents : downward. tioning, adjustable air vents are integrated into
the roof duct.
i If the ® symbol can be seen on thumb-
wheel =, defroster vent ; is open. X To adjust the airflow: open or close the air
flap in air vents : as needed.
X To adjust the air distribution: turn air
Adjusting air vents for the passenger vent : to the desired position.
compartment
Operating the auxiliary heating sys-
tem
G DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate
ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases
such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the
vehicle. This is the case, for example in
enclosed spaces or if the vehicle gets stuck in
Air vents (example: right-hand side of the vehicle) snow. There is a risk of fatal injury.
You can use the air vents to ventilate the vehicle Switch the auxiliary heating off in enclosed
interior on the left and right, in the rear and the spaces without extraction systems, e.g. in
headroom. garages. If the vehicle is stuck in snow and
X To open: for the right-hand side of the vehi- you have to leave the auxiliary heating run-
cle, turn thumbwheel ; to the left or for the ning, keep the exhaust pipe and the area
left-hand side of the vehicle, thumbwheel : around the vehicle free of snow. To ensure an
to the right.
adequate supply of fresh air, open a window
X To close: for the right-hand side of the vehi-
on the side of the vehicle that is not facing into
cle, turn thumbwheel ; to the right or for the
left-hand side of the vehicle, thumbwheel : the wind.
to the left.
Z
108 Operating the auxiliary heating system
G WARNING system when the engine is running and the out-

side temperature is low.
When the auxiliary heating is switched on,
You can use the auxiliary heating at an outside
parts of the vehicle can become very hot, e.g. temperature of up to 39 ‡ (4 †). At an outside
the exhaust system. temperature above 39 ‡ (4 †) the auxiliary
Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or heating system and the heater booster function
twigs may ignite if they come into contact switch off automatically.
with:
Rhot parts of the exhaust system Hot-water auxiliary heating
Rthe exhaust gas itself
There is a risk of fire.
Heating time
When the auxiliary heating is switched on, The heating time when operating the auxiliary
make sure that: heating with the vehicle is stationary without the
engine running depends on the outside temper-
Rno flammable materials come into contact ature and the electrical consumers switched on.
with hot vehicle components
Outside Heating Possible startup
Climate control
Rthe exhaust gas can escape from the tempera- time procedures
exhaust pipe unhindered ture
Rthe exhaust gas does not come into contact
Above 23‡ Approx. 6
with flammable materials. (Ò5 †) 20 minutes
! Turn on the auxiliary heating at least once a 23 ‡ Approx. 3

month for approximately 10 minutes. The (Ò5 †) to 40 minutes
auxiliary heating could otherwise be dam- 5‡
aged. (Ò15 †)
! Make sure that the flow of hot air is not Below 5‡ Approx. 2
blocked. The auxiliary heating will otherwise (Ò15 †) 50 minutes
overheat and switch off.
Your vehicle may be equipped with either an You can then switch on the auxiliary heating
auxiliary hot-water heater or an auxiliary warm- again.
air heater. Adjustment and operation of the: If you do not start the engine for a while, the total
Rhot-water auxiliary heater is done via the on- duration of heating is limited to a maximum of
board computer and with the auxiliary heating 120 minutes to protect the starter battery.
button in the control panel (Y page 109) or Switching on the auxiliary heating is then auto-
with the remote control (Y page 110). matically disabled. You can, for example, switch
Rauxiliary warm-air heater is done via the timer
on the auxiliary heating a maximum of two times
without the engine running if the outside tem-
above the overhead control panel
perature is Ò5 ‡ (Ò20 †). If you attempt to do it
(Y page 114).
again, the indicator lamps in the y
The auxiliary heating works independently of the (Y page 109) button flash alternately for about
engine and supplements the climate control two minutes indicating restarting lock. The aux-
system in the vehicle. The auxiliary heating iliary heating cannot be switched on without
heats the air in the vehicle interior to the tem- starting the engine.
perature set.
When the condition of charge of the starter bat-
If your vehicle is equipped with a hot-water aux- tery is sufficient again, the switch-on interlock
iliary heater, the auxiliary heating also keeps the will be deactivated. To charge the starter bat-
coolant warm. This way, the load on the engine tery, let the engine run. The engine run time
is minimized and fuel is saved. required to reach the necessary condition of
The heater booster function (Y page 112) of the charge depends on the outside temperature and
auxiliary heating supports the climate control on the electrical consumers switched on.
Outside tempera- Engine runtime interior to the temperature that you have set.
ture The blower switches to the first level.
X To deactivate the auxiliary heating: press
Above 32 ‡ (0 †) at least 10 minutes the upper section of the y switch.
32 ‡ (0 †) to 14 ‡ at least 15 minutes or
(Ò10 †) X Turn the key in the ignition lock to position 0.
The red indicator lamp in the button goes out.
Below 14 ‡ (Ò10 †) at least 20 minutes The auxiliary heating operates for another two
minutes and then switches off automatically.
Before switching on
X Check the fuel level and top up if necessary.
Selecting a switch-on time
The auxiliary heating is operated directly
using the vehicle's fuel. The tank must be at Important information
least a quarter full to ensure that the auxiliary You can use the on-board computer to define up
heating functions. to three switch-on times, one of which may be
X Switch on climate control (Y page 102). preselected.
The yellow indicator lamp in the y button
Climate control
X Set the temperature control to the desired
temperature (Y page 103). goes out after 30 minutes, if you:
X Set the air distribution as required Rhave selected the switch-on time and
(Y page 103). Rturn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock
X Open the center (Y page 106) and side air
vents (Y page 107) and set them to the middle On-board computer without steering
position. wheel buttons
i The auxiliary heating automatically switches
to heater booster mode after the engine is X Press the y button.
started. The y symbol flashes in the display.
or
Operating with the button (control X Press the 4 menu button on the instrument
panel) cluster repeatedly until the y symbol
flashes in the display.
X Use the f or g buttons on the instrument
cluster to select the switch-on time 1 to 3.
The switch-on time selected is displayed.
X Wait ten seconds for the standard display to
appear.
The switch-on time is selected. The yellow
indicator lamp in the y button lights up.
If you do not preselect a switch-on time, and
--:-- is shown in the display, this means that
the automatic switch-on mode is switched
off. The yellow indicator lamp in the y
button goes out.
i Switch the heater booster function on or off
with the ¢ button (Y page 112).
X To switch on auxiliary heating: press and
hold the upper section of the y button for
longer than two seconds.
The red indicator lamp in the button lights up.
The auxiliary heating heats or ventilates the
Z
On-board computer with steering wheel X Press the 9 button.

buttons The display shows the Minutes menu.
X Use the W and X buttons to set the
minutes.
X Press the V button.
The switch-on time is set and selected.
Operation with the remote control

Important information
You can switch the auxiliary heating on/off and
X Press the y button. set the operating duration using the remote con-
The Aux. heat submenu is shown in the dis- trol. You can use up to 4 remote control units on
play. the vehicle. These must be synchronized for the
If no switch-on time has been selected, the receiver in your vehicle (Y page 111).
selected switch-on time is highlighted or The remote control has a maximum range of
Timer off is highlighted. approximately 600 meters. This range is
Climate control
i You can also access the Aux. heat. sub- reduced by:
menu via the Settings menu (Y page 167). Rsources of interference
X Use the W or X button on the steering Rsolid objects between the remote control and
wheel to select the desired switch-on time. the vehicle
Use the Timer off setting to deactivate Rthe remote control being in an unfavorable
automatic switch-on. position in relation to the vehicle
X Press the V button on the steering wheel. Rtransmitting from an enclosed space
The switch-on time is selected. The yellow
indicator lamp in the y button lights up. Overview of the remote control
Setting the switch-on time

X Use the same method to select a switch-on
time as described in the "Preselecting a
switch-on time" section.
On-board computer without steering wheel
buttons
X Press the 9 reset button on the instrument
cluster.
The hour display flashes.
X Use the f and g buttons on the instrument
: Indicator lamp
cluster to set the hours.
; To confirm settings
X Press the 9 reset button
= To switch the remote control on/off, set the
The minute display flashes. operating duration or end or cancel settings
X Use the f and g buttons to set the minutes.
The switch-on time is set and selected. Indicator lamp : lights up in various ways to
show different operating modes:
On-board computer with steering wheel but-
tons Signaling Meaning
X Press the 9 button on the steering wheel. Lights up red Remote control switched on
The display shows the Hours menu.
X Use the W and X buttons on the steer- Data transfer
ing wheel to set the hours.
Signaling Meaning Changing the operating duration

X Switch on the remote control.
Flashes red Auxiliary heating switched X When indicator lamp : flashes red, press
off Ü and b simultaneously.
Lights up Auxiliary heating switched Indicator lamp : flashes green.
green on X Press the Ü button repeatedly until the
desired operating duration is shown.
Flashes green Change operating duration R20 minutes
active
Indicator lamp : flashes green twice.
Flashes alter- Remote control in synchro- R30 minutes
nately red and nizing mode Indicator lamp : flashes green three
green times.
R40 minutes
i When the remote control battery is weak, Indicator lamp : flashes green four times.
indicator lamp : flashes red rapidly. Replace X Press the b button.
the remote control battery (Y page 112).
During data transmission, indicator lamp :
Climate control
You can find information on further lamp sta- lights up red.
tuses in the "Problems with the hot-water aux- If indicator lamp : emits two long, green
iliary heater" section (Y page 113). flashes, the selected operating duration is
Switching the remote control on/off stored.
The remote control switches to standby mode
i If no adjustment is made to the operating
duration, indicator lamp : flashes six times
after ten seconds. Indicator lamp : goes out.
and the remote control goes into standby
X To switch on: press and hold the Ü button mode.
until indicator lamp : lights up red.
If a connection between the remote control Synchronizing the remote control
and the receiver in the vehicle has been estab- X Press the y auxiliary heating button in the
lished and indicator lamp :: control panel for longer than ten seconds
Rflashes red, the auxiliary heating is switched (Y page 109).
off. When you press and hold the y button, the
Rlights up green, the auxiliary heating is red indicator lamp lights up in the button.
switched on. When the red indicator lamp in the y but-
X To switch off: press and hold the Ü button flashes, the receiver in the vehicle is ready
ton until indicator lamp : goes out. for synchronizing.
X Press and hold the Ü remote control but-
Switching the auxiliary heating on/off ton until indicator lamp : lights up red.
X Switch on the remote control. If there is an active connection between the
remote control and the receiver, indicator
X To switch on: when indicator lamp : flashes lamp : flashes alternately red and green.
red, press the b button. The remote control is in synchronizing mode.
During data transmission, indicator lamp :
lights up red. i If you press the Ü button again on the
remote control after starting synchronization,
When indicator lamp : lights up green, the
you will only synchronize this remote control
auxiliary heating is switched on.
unit with the receiver. Any other remote con-
X To switch off: when indicator lamp : lights trol units that were synchronized will be
up green, press the b button. cleared. Indicator lamp : flashes alternately
During data transmission, indicator lamp : red and green (very slowly).
lights up red.
X Press the b button on the remote control.
When indicator lamp : flashes red, the aux- During data transmission, indicator lamp :
iliary heating is switched off. lights up red.
Z
When remote control indicator lamp : emits X To switch on/off: press the ¢ button.
two long green flashes, the remote control is If the indicator lamp in the button lights up,
synchronized. The indicator lamp in the y the heater booster function is switched on.
auxiliary heating button goes out. After switching off, the auxiliary heating oper-
ates for about another two minutes and then
Switching the heater booster function switches off automatically.
on/off
Replacing the remote control battery
G WARNING
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-
ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in
severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal
injury.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
Climate control
immediately.
Vehicles with auxiliary heating H Environmental note

Batteries contain dangerous
the household rubbish. They
must be collected separately
and recycled to protect the
environment.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally friendly
manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified spe-
Vehicles with heater booster function cialist workshop or a special
At outside temperatures of up to 39 ‡ (4 †) the collection point for used bat-
fuel-fired heater booster system heats the vehi- teries.
cle interior as quickly as possible when the
engine is running. If the indicator lamp on the remote control
The auxiliary heating automatically switches to flashes red rapidly, the remote control battery is
heater booster mode after the engine is started. discharged. You should replace the remote con-
At an outside temperature above 39 ‡ (4 †) the trol battery.
auxiliary heating system and the heater booster You need a battery of the type CR2430, which
function switch off automatically. can be obtained at any qualified specialist work-
If you switch off the engine without switching off shop.
the heater booster function, the system will be
switched on the next time the engine is started
(memory function).
i Switch the auxiliary heating on or off with
the y button (Y page 109).
X Remove battery =.
X Insert new, clean battery = into the battery
tray with the positive pole facing upwards.
Use a lint-free cloth to do so.
X Position battery cover ; so that mark : on
the raised area points between two
recesses ?.
X Turn battery cover ; using a suitable imple-
ment, e.g. a coin, clockwise to the stop.
X Check all the functions of the remote control
(Y page 110).
X Remove battery cover ; using a suitable
implement, e.g. a coin, by turning it counter-
clockwise.
X Check the seal on battery cover ; for dam-
age and, if necessary, replace.
Climate control
Problems with the hot-water auxiliary heating
The indicator lamp on The remote control battery is discharged. Data transmission is not
the remote control possible.
flashes red rapidly. X Replace the remote control battery (Y page 112).
The indicator lamp on There is no connection between the remote control and the receiver in
the remote control the vehicle.
flashes red and green in X Change your position in relation to the vehicle, e.g. hold the remote
rapid succession. control higher or to the side.
X Move closer.
If you cannot establish a connection and the auxiliary heating is
switched on, it can then only be deactivated using the y button
(Y page 109).
or
Several remote controls are being used at the same time.
X Switch on the remote control again after a short while
(Y page 111).
or
The remote control is not synchronized.
X Synchronize the remote control (Y page 111).
The indicator lamp on The remote control is being synchronized.

the remote control X Wait until the remote control synchronization process is complete
slowly flashes red and (Y page 111).
green alternately.
The remote control for The remote control battery is discharged.
the auxiliary heating can- X Replace the remote control battery (Y page 112).
not be switched on.
Z

The auxiliary heating The outside temperature is above 39 ‡ (4 †). The auxiliary heating
does not switch on. switches off automatically.
The auxiliary heating The fuel tank is less than Õ full. The auxiliary heating switches off
switches off automati- automatically.
cally and/or cannot be X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
switched on.
X Then, start the auxiliary heating several times until the fuel lines are
full.
or
The low-voltage protection system integrated in the control unit
switches off the auxiliary heating because the on-board voltage is less
than 10 V.
X Have the alternator and battery checked.
Climate control
or
The fuse is blown.
X Replace the fuse; see the "Fuse allocation" supplement.
X Have the cause of the blown fuse determined at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
or
A malfunction has occurred.
X Switch the ignition on and off twice.
If the auxiliary heating still cannot be switched on, the heating device
is faulty.
X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
The auxiliary heating is The coolant level is too low.
overheated. X Check the coolant level and add more coolant if necessary
(Y page 223).
Auxiliary warm-air heater Rset the operating duration to a range between

10 and 120 minutes or to continuous opera-
Operation with the timer tion
Rset the heating level (preselected tempera-
Timer overview ture) to a range between 10 and 30
Use the timer to:
Ractivate and deactivate immediate heating
mode
Rset up to three departure times
Setting the day, time and operating dura-

tion
You must reset the day, time, and default value
for the operating duration:
Rduring initial operation
Rafter a voltage supply interruption (e.g. if the
battery has been disconnected)
Rafter a malfunction
You can find information on malfunctions in the
"Problems with the auxiliary warm-air heater"
section (Y page 117).
Timer above the overhead control panel X Press the Û or â button until the Ñ
: Program column symbol in menu bar ; flashes.
G Sets preset position one to three for X Press the b button.
departure times (Y page 116) In program column :, the day selected
Sets weekday (Mon. – Sun.) (Y page 115) flashes.
Menu bar
Climate control
; X Press the Û or â button to set the
y Switches immediate heating mode desired day.
on/off (Y page 115) X Press the b button.
B Sets departure times (Y page 116) The day selected is stored. The hour setting of
Ñ Sets the day, time and the operating the clock flashes.
duration (Y page 115) X In the same way, set the hour and subse-
ß Sets the heating level (Y page 116) quently the minutes, then confirm by pressing
= Display panel for: time, heating level and the b button.
operating duration The time is stored. Program column : dis-
à Continuous operation mode active appears and the operating duration flashes.
ß Heating level set i The operating duration set is the default set-
? Selects options in program column : or ting for immediate heating mode. You can set
menu bar ; (forwards) the operating duration to a range between 10
Increases values and 120 minutes or to continuous operation.
A Confirms a selection or setting X Using the Û or â button, set the
B Status bar minute value or select the à symbol for
continuous operation.
y Heating mode activated
X Press the b button.
C Activates the timer
The operating duration is stored. The time is
Cancels or ends settings in a menu shown.
D Selects options in program column : or
menu bar ; (backwards) Switching immediate heating mode
Reduces values on/off
Activating the timer X To switch on: press the Û or â button
until the y symbol in the menu bar flashes.
The timer switches to standby mode after ten
seconds. The display goes off. X Press the b button.
The operation duration flashes in the display.
X Press and hold the Ü button until the
menu bar appears in the display and the time i You can preset the default value that is
is shown. shown (Y page 115).
X Using the Û or â button, set the
minute value (10 to 120) or select the à
symbol for continuous operation.
Z
X Press the b button. X Press the b button.

Immediate heating mode is activated. The The operating duration flashes.
time and the y symbol appear. X Press the Û or â button to set the
X To switch off: press the Û or â button minute value (10 to 120).
until the y symbol flashes in the menu bar, X Press the b button.
and then press the b button. The operating duration for the departure time
Immediate heating mode is deactivated. The is stored. The time and number of the selec-
y symbol disappears. ted preset are shown.
The auxiliary heating operates for another two i The preset that will be activated next in the
minutes and then switches off automatically. time sequence is underlined. Additionally, the
i If you switch off the ignition during immedi- day that is set appears.
ate heating (operating duration 10 – 120
minutes), you also switch off the immediate Deactivating departure times
heating mode. The auxiliary heating operates X Carry out the steps as described in the "Set-
for another two minutes and then switches off ting the departure times" section.
automatically.
If the y symbol in the status bar is shown:
If you have set continuous operation as the
operating duration and you switch off the igni- X Press the Û or â button until the off
Climate control
tion, the auxiliary heating switches off auto- message in the display panel is shown.
matically after about 15 minutes. If, in the X Press the b button.
remaining time, the ignition is switched on The departure time is deactivated. The time is
again, continuous operation of the auxiliary shown.
heating continues.
Setting the heating level
Setting a departure time
You can set the heating level to a range between
You can set three departure times with the 10 and 30.
timer. The heating level corresponds to a preselection
After a malfunction or if the battery has been temperature for the vehicle interior. This is a
disconnected, you must set the departure times guide value and may, depending on the outside
again. You can find information on malfunctions temperature, differ from the interior tempera-
in the "Problems with the auxiliary warm-air ture.
heater" section (Y page 117).
X Press the Û or â button until the ß
X Press the Û or â button until the B symbol in the menu bar flashes.
symbol in the menu bar flashes. X Press the b button.
X Press the b button. The heating level display flashes.
In the program column, the G numbers of X Using the Û and â buttons, set the
the presets appear. The selected preset desired heating level to a range between 10
flashes. and 30.
X Press Û or â to select the desired pre-
X Press the b button.
set. The heating level is set and the y symbol
X Press the b button. appears.
The preset is selected. The days are shown.
X Set the day and time as described in the "Set-
ting the day, time and operating duration"
The departure time is stored. The program
column disappears. In the display panel, the
on message and the y symbol appear.
Operating the cargo compartment air vents 117
Problems with the auxiliary warm-air heater

The auxiliary heating The outside temperature is above 39 ‡ (4 †). The auxiliary heating
does not switch on. switches off automatically.
The auxiliary heating The fuel tank is less than Õ full. The auxiliary heating switches off
switches off automati- automatically.
cally and/or cannot be X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
switched on.
X Then, start the auxiliary heating several times until the fuel lines are
full.
or
The low-voltage protection system integrated in the control unit
switches off the auxiliary heating because the on-board voltage is less
than 10 V.
Climate control
X Have the alternator and battery checked.
or
The fuse is blown.
X Replace the fuse; see the "Fuse allocation" supplement.
X Have the cause of the blown fuse determined at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Operating the cargo compartment air X To activate and ventilate: press the lower
vents section of the · switch.
The roof ventilator feeds fresh air into the
cargo compartment.
X To switch off: set the switch to the middle
position.
If your vehicle is equipped with a roof ventilator,

you can ventilate and extract air from the cargo
compartment.
X To activate and extract air: press the upper
section of the ´ switch.
The roof ventilator removes used air from the
cargo compartment.
Z
118 Driving
Useful information Driving
This Operator's Manual describes all models as Important safety notes

vehicle that were available at the time of going G WARNING
to print. Country-specific variations are possi- If you switch off the ignition while driving,
Driving and parking
ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped safety-relevant functions are only available
with all of the described functions. This also with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
applies to systems and functions relevant to for example, the power steering and the brake
safety.
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
Breaking-in notes
G WARNING
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) If the parking brake has not been fully
New or replaced brake pads and brake disks released when driving, the parking brake can:
only reach their optimum braking effect after a
Roverheat and cause a fire
few 100 miles (a few 100 kilometers). Until then,
compensate for this by applying greater force to Rlose its hold function.
the brake pedal. There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release
For the service life and economy of your vehicle the parking brake fully before driving off.
it is crucial that you break in the engine with due
care. If you park the vehicle for more than
RTherefore, protect the engine for the first three weeks:
1000 miles (1500 km) by driving at varying Rconnect the batteries to a trickle charger or
vehicle and engine speeds.
Rdisconnect the vehicle's starter battery or
RAvoid overstraining the vehicle and high
Rswitch off the electrical system using the bat-
engine speeds during this period, e.g. driving
at full throttle. Do not exceed Ø of the max- tery main switch (Y page 118) and
imum speed for each gear. Rdisconnect the vehicle's auxiliary battery
RDo not change down a gear manually in order Otherwise, you need to check the battery's con-
to brake. dition of charge every 3 weeks, since standby
RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal power consumption can drain the battery. If the
beyond the point of resistance (kickdown). battery voltage is lower than 12.2 V, the battery
RThe shift ranges 3, 2 or 1 should only be
must be charged. Otherwise, the battery may be
damaged by exhaustive discharging.
engaged when driving slowly, e.g. when driv-
ing in mountainous terrain. Be sure to observe the notes on disconnecting
and charging the batteries under "Battery"
After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase (Y page 228). You can obtain information about
the engine speed gradually and accelerate the trickle chargers from a qualified specialist work-
vehicle to full speed. shop.
i You should also observe these notes on
breaking-in if the engine or parts of the drive
train on your vehicle have been replaced. Battery isolating switch
! Make sure that the key is in position 0 in the
ignition lock and that at least five minutes
have passed before removing or reconnecting
Driving 119
the battery main switch. You could otherwise Switching on the power supply
damage components of the electrical system.
You can use the battery isolating switch to dis-
connect the power supply to all your vehicle's
consumers. This will prevent uncontrolled bat-
tery discharge caused by off-load current con-
Driving and parking

sumption.
If your vehicle is equipped with an auxiliary bat-
tery in the engine compartment, you will need to
disconnect both batteries. Only then is the elec-
trical system fully disconnected from the power
supply.
i Only switch the vehicle to de-energized
using the battery main switch if: X Insert the key into the ignition lock.
Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period X Press connector : onto ground pin ; until
Rit is absolutely necessary you feel it engage and the lock inhibitor is
released.
After the power supply has been activated,
Connector : must be in full contact with
you will need to reset the side windows
ground pin ;.
(Y page 73).
All consumers are reconnected to the DC
power supply.
Switching off the power supply
Key positions
Battery main switch to the left of the center con-

sole
X Remove the key from the ignition lock and g To insert and remove the key, lock the steer-
wait for at least five minutes. ing wheel
X Press button ; in the direction of the arrow
1 To unlock the steering wheel, power supply
and hold. for some consumers (e.g. the radio)
X Pull connector : from the ground pin. 2 To switch on the ignition. Power supply for
X Push connector : as far to the side as pos- all consumers, preglow and drive position
sible so that it cannot make contact with the 3 To start the engine
ground pin.
All starter battery consumers are disconnec- On vehicles with a battery main switch, you must
ted from the power supply. first switch on the power supply (Y page 118).
i To unlock the steering, move the steering
wheel slightly while turning the key to position
1.
Z
120 Driving
Preparing for a journey not slip or obstruct the pedals. Do not place
several floormats or carpets on top of one
Visual check of the vehicle exterior another.
X In particular, check the following components
on the vehicle, and on the trailer as necessary: G WARNING
Driving and parking
Rlicense plates, vehicle lighting, turn signals, Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage
brake lamps and wiper blades for dirt and of the pedals, e.g.:
damage
Rtires and wheels for firm seating, correct Rshoes with thick soles
tire pressure and general condition Rshoes with high heels
Rtrailer tow hitch for play and security Rslippers
The trailer coupling is one of the most There is a risk of an accident.
important vehicle parts with regard to road
safety. The separate instructions issued by Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
the manufacturer pertaining to operation, usage of the pedals.
care and maintenance should be observed.
Rthat contour markings on attachments and X Secure the load as per the loading guidelines
bodies are in good condition (Y page 213).
X Rectify any noticeable defects before com- X Stow luggage items securely. Secure the load
mencing the journey. as per the loading guidelines (Y page 213).
X Make sure that the floormats and carpets are
properly secured so that they cannot slip and
Checks in the vehicle obstruct the pedals.
X Close all doors.
Emergency equipment and first-aid kit
X Check the equipment to make sure that it is
accessible, complete and ready for use.
Starting the engine
The first aid and breakdown assistance equip-
ment is in the front door stowage compartments G WARNING
and behind the driver's seat.
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
Vehicle lighting gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
X Check the lighting system with the aid of a is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
second person. the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
X Replace defective bulbs (Y page 89). out sufficient ventilation.
! Do not depress the accelerator pedal when

starting the engine.
Before driving off
XBefore starting the engine, make sure that:
G WARNING Rall the doors are closed.
Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict Rall the vehicle occupants are wearing their
the clearance around the pedals or block a seat belts correctly.
depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the oper- Rthe parking brake is applied.
ating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a i If you depress the brake pedal before start-
risk of an accident. ing the engine, the pedal travel is short and
Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that pedal resistance is high.
they do not get into the driver's footwell. If you depress the brake pedal again after
starting the engine, pedal travel and resist-
When using floormats or carpets, make sure ance will be back to normal again.
that they are properly secured so that they do
Driving 121
Automatic door locking can be deactivated

(Y page 66).
Driving off
Driving and parking

G WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position D or R,
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is
a risk of an accident.
Gearshift pattern When engaging transmission position D or R,
j Park position with parking lock always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
k Reverse gear not simultaneously accelerate.
i Neutral
h Drive ! Only shift into reverse gear R when the vehi-
XMove the selector lever to position P. cle is stationary. Otherwise, you could dam-
The display in the instrument cluster shows P: age the transmission.
Ron vehicles with steering wheel buttons X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
(Y page 166) depressed.
Ron vehicles without steering wheel buttons
The selector lever lock is released.
(Y page 162) X Move the selector lever to position D or R.
On vehicles with a reverse warning feature,
i You can also start the engine in neutral N. when reverse gear is engaged a warning tone
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. sounds to alert other road users
The % preglow indicator lamp in the instru- (Y page 121).
ment cluster lights up briefly.
X Release the parking brake (Y page 130).
X Once the % preglow indicator lamp goes
The c indicator lamp in the instrument
out, turn the key to position 3 in the ignition cluster goes out.
lock and release it as soon as the engine is X Release the brake pedal.
running.
X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
i You can start the engine without preglow
when the engine is warm. i After pulling away or switching on the igni-
The preglow system is malfunctioning if the tion, the vehicle automatically locks centrally.
% preglow indicator lamp lights up for The locking knobs in the doors drop down.
approximately 1 minute: You can open the doors from the inside at any
Rafter the ignition is switched on time.
Rwhile the engine is running You can also deactivate the automatic locking
At extremely low outside temperatures you feature (Y page 66).
may then no longer be able to start the
engine. Have the malfunction rectified at a
qualified specialist workshop. Reverse warning device
i Depending on the equipment installed, the G WARNING
vehicle either automatically locks centrally
after switching on the ignition or after pulling Other road users may ignore or fail to hear the
away. The locking knobs in the doors drop warning tone of the reverse warning feature.
down. There is a risk of injury if you fail to ensure that
You can open the doors from the inside at any the area in which you are maneuvering is
time. clear.
Z
122 Driving
Make sure that there are no persons or X To reduce the volume of the warning tone:
objects in the area in which you are maneu- engage reverse gear twice in quick succes-
sion.
vering. It may be necessary to enlist the help
The warning tone is now quieter.
of a second person when maneuvering.
i The warning tone sounds at a normal vol-
Driving and parking
The reverse warning feature is a system ume by default. The volume of the warning
designed to assist you in ensuring the safety of tone has to be reduced each time you engage
other road users. reverse gear if necessary.
A warning signal sounds to alert other road
users when reverse gear is engaged. The volume
of the warning tone can be reduced for night-
time driving.
Problems with the engine

The engine does not There is air in the fuel system.
start. X Turn the key back to position 0 in the ignition lock before attempting
The starter motor can be to start the engine again.
heard. X Start the engine again.
Please bear in mind that lengthy and frequent starting attempts will
drain the battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
The engine does not The fuel tank has been run dry.
start. X Refuel the vehicle.
The starter motor can be
If you drive until the fuel tank is completely empty, air may get into the
heard. The reserve fuel
fuel system. If the engine does not start after refueling, bleed the fuel
warning lamp is lit and
system as follows:
the fuel gauge is at 0.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition for approximately
10 seconds.
X Start the engine continuously for a maximum of 60 seconds.
If the engine does not start:

X Wait approximately 2 minutes.
X Restart the engine continuously for a maximum of 60 seconds.
X If the engine still fails to start, do not continue trying to start it.
Automatic transmission 123

The vehicle cannot be The exhaust gas aftertreatment system is defective or an emissions-
driven at a speed relevant malfunction has occurred.
exceeding 5 mph This malfunction or defect can damage the exhaust gas aftertreat-
(8 km/h). ment.
Driving and parking

The yellow ; Check X Observe the messages in the display:
Engine lamp and the yel- Ron vehicles without steering-wheel buttons (Y page 177)
low å DEF indicator
Ron vehicles with steering wheel buttons (Y page 187).
lamp2 light up.
The engine does not The battery isolating switch is switched off.
start. X Switch on the power supply (Y page 119).
The starter motor cannot
be heard.
The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low. The battery is too weak or discharged.
start. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 243).
The starter motor cannot
be heard. If the engine cannot be jump-started, the starter motor is faulty.
The engine does not The battery is discharged or faulty.

start. X Check the battery for damage.
The starter motor cannot X Charge the battery (Y page 233).
be heard.
Automatic transmission Selector lever

G WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position D or R,
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is
When engaging transmission position D or R,
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
not simultaneously accelerate.
j Park position with parking lock
! Vehicles with automatic transmission may
roll only briefly in the neutral position N. Pro- k Reverse gear
longed rolling of the wheels, e.g. when being i Neutral
towed, will result in transmission damage. h Drive
Towing (Y page 244)
2 Only vehicles without steering-wheel buttons.
Z
124 Automatic transmission
The display in the instrument cluster shows the Changing gear

present selector lever position or the current
shift range: The 5-speed automatic transmission adapts to
Ron vehicles with steering wheel buttons
your individual driving style by continuously
adjusting its shift points. These shift point
(Y page 166)
adjustments take into account the current oper-
Ron vehicles without steering wheel buttons
Driving and parking
ating and driving conditions. If the operating or

(Y page 162) driving conditions change, the automatic trans-
mission reacts by adjusting the gearshift pro-
gram.
Selector lever positions When the selector lever is in position D, the
automatic transmission selects the individual
B Park position gears automatically. This depends on:
This prevents the vehicle from rolling Rany restriction in the shift range
away when stopped. Only move the (Y page 125)
selector lever to P if the vehicle is Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
stationary.
Rthe road speed
You can only remove the key when
the selector lever is in this position.
The selector lever is locked in posi-
tion P if the key is removed. Touchshift
The parking lock should not be used When the selector lever is in position D, you can
as a brake when parking. Always perform gearshifts yourself.
apply the parking brake as well once
X To shift down: press the selector lever to the
you have parked the vehicle.
left towards D–.
C Reverse gear The automatic transmission shifts to the next
Only move the selector lever to R gear down, depending on the gear currently
when the vehicle is stationary. engaged. The shift range is also restricted.
i The automatic transmission does not shift
A Neutral down if you press the selector lever towards
No power is transmitted from the D– while traveling at too high a speed. This
engine to the drive wheels. Releasing protects the engine from overrevving.
the brakes will allow you to move the
X To shift up: briefly press the selector lever to
vehicle freely, e.g. by pushing.
the right towards D+.
Do not move the selector lever to N
The automatic transmission shifts to the next
while driving. The automatic trans- gear up, depending on the current gearshift
mission could otherwise be dam- program. This also extends the shift range.
aged.
X To derestrict the shift range: press and hold
If ASR is deactivated or ESP® has the selector lever towards D+ until D appears
malfunctioned: only move the selec- in the display again.
tor lever to N if the vehicle is in dan- The automatic transmission shifts from the
ger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. current shift range directly to D.
7 Drive X To select the optimum shift range: press
The automatic transmission changes and hold the selector lever to the left towards
gear itself. All forward gears are avail- D–.
able. The automatic transmission will shift to a
You can influence the gearshifts and range which allows easy acceleration and
shift gears yourself or limit the shift deceleration. To do this, the automatic trans-
range. mission will shift down one or more gears.
Automatic transmission 125
Shift ranges Kickdown

When the selector lever is in position D you can Use kickdown for maximum acceleration:
restrict or derestrict the shift range for the auto- X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
matic transmission. pressure point.
X To extend and restrict the shift range: The automatic transmission shifts to the next
Driving and parking

press the selector lever briefly to the right gear down, depending on the engine speed.
towards D+ or left towards D–. X Ease off on the accelerator pedal once the
The display shows the selected shift range. desired speed is reached.
The automatic transmission shifts only as far The automatic transmission shifts up again.
as the relevant gear.
i If the maximum engine speed for the restric- Maneuvering
ted shift range is reached and you depress the
accelerator pedal, the automatic transmis- Maneuvering in a tight space:
sion will not shift up. X Control the vehicle's speed by braking care-
Driving situations fully.
X Depress the accelerator pedal slightly and
5 Use the braking effect of the engine evenly.
on steep downhill gradients and for
driving: i You can shift back and forth between drive
Ron steep mountain roads position D and reverse gear R at low speeds
Rin mountainous terrain
without applying the brakes. This can help
you, for example when rapidly maneuvering
Rin arduous conditions
the vehicle or rocking it out of snow or slush.
4 Use the braking effect of the engine
on extremely steep downhill gradi- Towing a trailer
ents and long downhill stretches.
X Drive at moderate engine speeds on steep
uphill gradients.
X Depending on the uphill or downhill gradient,
Driving tips shift down to a shift range adapted to the
driving situation (Y page 125), even if cruise
Accelerator pedal position control is activated.
Your style of driving influences how the auto-
matic transmission shifts gear:
Rlittle throttle: early upshifts
Rlots of throttle: later upshifts
Z
126 Refueling
Problems with the transmission

The transmission mal- The transmission is losing oil.
functions when shifting X Have the transmission checked immediately at a qualified specialist
Driving and parking
gear. workshop.
The acceleration charac- The transmission is in emergency mode.
teristics have deteriora- It is only possible to shift into second gear or reverse gear R.
ted noticeably.
X Stop the vehicle.
The transmission does
X Depress the brake pedal.
not shift.
X Move the selector lever to position P.
X Switch off the engine.
X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine.
X Depress the brake pedal.
X Move the selector lever to position D or R.
In position D, the transmission shifts into second gear; in position R,
the transmission shifts into reverse gear.
X Have the transmission checked immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Releasing the parking lock manually X Remove implement ;.

X Re-install cover :.
In the event of a malfunction, it is possible to
manually release the selector lever from the i The screwdriver from the vehicle tool kit
lock in parking position P, e.g. to have the vehi- could function as the implement, for instance
cle towed away. (Y page 241).
Refueling
G WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. Improper handling of
fuel creates a risk of fire and explosion.
Avoid fire, open flames, smoking and creating
sparks under all circumstances. Switch off the
engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating
X Apply the parking brake.
before refueling.
X Remove cover :.
X Slide implement ; as far as it will go into the
opening.
G WARNING
X Push the implement in and simultaneously Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
move the selector lever out of position P. There is a risk of injury.
The selector lever lock is released. You can You must make sure that fuel does not come
now move the selector lever freely again until into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
it is returned to position P.
Refueling 127
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel ! Filter the fuel before transferring it to the
vapors. Keep fuel away from children. vehicle if you are refueling the vehicle from
barrels or containers.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
This will prevent malfunctions in the fuel sys-
observe the following: tem due to contaminated fuel.
RWash away fuel from skin immediately Further information on fuel and on fuel grades
Driving and parking

using soap and water. can be found in the "Technical data" section
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, (Y page 278).
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical assistance with-
out delay. Refueling procedure
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-
ing.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with fuel.
G WARNING
If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash
point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.
When the engine is running, exhaust system
components could overheat without being The fuel filler flap is beside the front left-hand
noticed. There is a risk of fire. door when viewed in the direction of travel. It is
Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline only possible to open the fuel filler flap when the
with diesel fuel. front door is open.
X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
H Environmental note X Switch off the auxiliary heating system
If fuels are handled improperly, they pose a (Y page 107).
X Open the front left-hand door first, and then
danger to persons and the environment. Do
the fuel filler flap.
not allow fuels to run into the sewage system,
X Close all vehicle doors to prevent fuel vapors
the surface waters, the ground water or into
from entering the vehicle interior.
the ground.
X Turn fuel filler cap ; counter-clockwise,
remove it and let it hang from strap :.
! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles with a
X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
diesel engine. Even small amounts of gasoline
will cause damage to the fuel system and pump nozzle into the tank and refuel.
engine. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
switches off. Fuel may otherwise leak out.
! Do not switch on the ignition if you acciden- X Replace tank filler cap ; on tank and turn
tally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the clockwise.
fuel will enter the fuel lines. Notify a qualified
specialist workshop and have the fuel tank You will hear a click when the fuel filler cap is
and fuel lines drained completely. closed fully.
X Open the front left-hand door first, and then
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the close the filler flap.
fuel system.
! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted
surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
paintwork.
Z
128 Refueling
Problems with the fuel and fuel tank cator, topping up may not be possible. Park
the vehicle in a warm place, e.g. in a garage,
If your vehicle is losing fuel, the fuel lines or the until the DEF has become liquid again. Top-
fuel tank are defective. ping up is then possible again. Alternatively,
X Turn the key immediately to position 0 in the have the DEF tank refilled at a qualified spe-
ignition lock and remove it. cialist workshop.
Driving and parking
X Do not restart the engine under any circum- i If you add DEF at temperatures below 12 ‡
stances. (Ò11 †) it is possible that the level is not
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. shown correctly due to the frozen DEF.
If the fuel tank has been run dry, after refueling Drive for at least 20 minutes (heating phase in
carry out the following steps: the tank activated) and then stop the vehicle
for at least 30 seconds. The level is then
X Before starting the engine: switch on the igni- shown correctly.
tion three or four times.
You will find further information on DEF in the
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock "Service products" section (Y page 278).
(Y page 119).
The % preglow indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up briefly. Refueling procedure
X Once the % preglow indicator lamp goes
DEF filler neck
out, turn the key to position 3 in the ignition
lock and release it as soon as the engine is Non-lockable DEF filler cap
running.
You can start the diesel engine without preglow
when the engine is warm.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)

! Only use DEF in accordance with
ISO 22241. Never mix DEF with additives or
thin it with tap water. The exhaust gas after-
treatment may otherwise be damaged. Example: DEF filler cap in the engine compartment
Observe the MB Specifications for Service X To open: switch off the ignition.
Products, Sheet 352.0.
Damage that results from the use of additives
or tap water leads to the loss of the New X Turn filler cap : counter-clockwise and
Vehicle Limited Warranty. remove it.
! If DEF comes into contact with a painted or X To close: replace cap : on the filler neck and
aluminum surface, wash the surface off turn it clockwise.
immediately with plenty of water. You will hear a click when cap : is fully
closed.
! DEF is not a diesel additive and must not be X Close the hood (Y page 220).
mixed with fuel in the tank. Even small
amounts of DEF can cause engine damage.
Damage that results from the blending of DEF
will not be covered by the New Vehicle Limi-
ted Warranty.
i If the outside temperature is below 12 ‡
(Ò11 †) it may be difficult to top up. If the DEF
is frozen and there is an active warning indi-
Parking 129
Lockable filler cap Parking

G WARNING
Driving and parking

twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust
gas flow. There is a risk of fire.
Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-
rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-
cle which are hot. Take particular care not to
Example: DEF filler cap in the engine compartment park on dry grassland or harvested grain
fields.
G WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident.
X To open: switch off the ignition.
X Open the hood (Y page 219). G WARNING
X Remove tool ? for unlocking tank filler If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cap : from the footwell on the front- cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
passenger side (Y page 241).
X Pull cover = up, turn 90° and release.
X Insert tool ? into hole ; of tank filler cap :. Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
X Turn filler cap : counter-clockwise and parking position P.
remove it. Make sure that tool ? remains in Rstart the engine.
tank filler cap : while doing so.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
X To close: replace filler cap : and turn it ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
clockwise until closed. an accident and injury.
X Pull tool ? out of tank filler cap : and stow
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
with the vehicle tool kit in the footwell on the
front-passenger side. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
X Pull cover = up over hole ; of tank filler
cap :, turn and release.
! A moving vehicle can lead to damage to the
X Turn tank filler cap :.
vehicle or damage to the drive train.
If tank filler cap : turns freely, the DEF tank
is closed. ! When the vehicle is parked, always remove
the key to prevent the battery from becoming
discharged.
On vehicles with a battery isolating switch,
switch off the power supply if the vehicle is to
be out of use for a longer period of time.
Z
130 Parking
Always park your vehicle safely and according to When leaving the vehicle, always take the
legal requirements and secure it against rolling SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
away.
To ensure that the vehicle is properly secured
against rolling away unintentionally:
G WARNING
Rthe parking brake must be firmly applied
Driving and parking
If you must brake the vehicle with the parking

Rthe selector lever must be in position P and
the key must be removed from the ignition brake, the braking distance is considerably
lock longer and the wheels could lock. There is an
Ron steep uphill or downhill gradients, the front increased danger of skidding and accidents.
wheels must be turned towards the curb Only use the parking brake to brake the vehi-
Rthe rear axle must be secured, e.g. with a cle when the service brake is faulty. Do not
wheel chock, on steep uphill or downhill gra- apply the parking brake too firmly. If the
dients wheels lock, release the parking brake until
Use the wheel chock (Y page 131) to do so. the wheels begin turning again.
If you leave the vehicle parked for more than
three weeks:
Rconnect the batteries to a trickle charger or
Rswitch off the electrical system using the bat-
tery main switch (Y page 118) and
Rdisconnect the vehicle's auxiliary battery
Otherwise, you need to check the battery's con-
dition of charge every 3 weeks, since standby
power consumption can drain the battery. If the
battery voltage is lower than 12.2 V, the battery
damaged by exhaustive discharging. The brake lamps are not illuminated when you
Be sure to observe the notes on disconnecting brake the vehicle using the parking brake.
and charging the batteries under "Bat- As a rule, you may only apply the parking brake
tery“ (Y page 228). You can obtain information when the vehicle is stationary.
about trickle chargers from a qualified specialist
workshop. X To apply the parking brake: pull brake
lever : up as far as the last possible detent.
The c warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up if the engine is running.
Parking brake
i On vehicles with a folding brake lever, you
G WARNING can then press lever : down to the stop.
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- X To release the parking brake: on vehicles
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example: with a folding brake lever, first pull brake
lever : up to the stop.
Rrelease the parking brake. X Raise brake lever : slightly and press
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the release knob ;.
parking position P. X Guide brake lever : down to the stop.
Rstart the engine. The c indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
Parking 131
Exceptionally, if the service brake fails, the park-

ing brake can be used to brake the vehicle in an
emergency.
X Emergency braking: press and hold release
button ; and carefully apply brake lever :.
Driving and parking

Switching off the engine
G WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
tral position N when you switch off the engine. Wheel chock in the load/passenger compartment
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an X To remove the wheel chock on Cargo
accident. Vans/Passenger Vans: pull restraining
After switching off the engine, always switch cable : down a little and remove it from
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi- retainer ;.
X Remove the chock.
cle from rolling away by applying the parking
brake. i When stowing the wheel chock, make sure
that restraining cable : is holding it securely
! If the coolant temperature is very high, e.g. in retainer ;.
after driving on hilly roads, leave the engine
running at idle speed for about two minutes
before turning it off.
This allows the coolant temperature to return
to normal.
X Stop the vehicle.
X Shift the automatic transmission to position
P.
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock
and remove it.
The immobilizer is activated. Wheel chock to the rear of the chassis on the left
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling side of the vehicle (example)
away (Y page 129). XTo remove the wheel chock on Cab Chas-
sis: pull the locking springs down and remove
the wheel chock.
Wheel chock i When stowing the wheel chock, make sure
that it is secured in the retainer with the lock-
Use the wheel chock or a similar object to pre- ing springs.
vent the vehicle from rolling away, e.g. when
parking or changing a wheel.
Parking the vehicle for a long period
If you park your vehicle for longer than
three weeks:
Rconnect the batteries to a trickle charger or
Z
132 Driving tips
Rswitch off the electrical system using the bat- more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
tery main switch (Y page 118) and of an accident.
Rdisconnect the vehicle's auxiliary battery
Otherwise, you need to check the battery's con-
dition of charge every 3 weeks, since standby
power consumption can drain the battery. If the
! Always observe the ground clearance of the
Driving and parking
vehicle and avoid obstacles. On vehicles with

battery voltage is lower than 12.2 V, the battery
a step, ground clearance is further restricted.
Obstacles can damage the vehicle.
damaged by exhaustive discharging.
If you must drive over obstacles, drive espe-
Be sure to observe the notes on disconnecting
cially slowly and carefully. If necessary, have
and charging the batteries under "Battery"
another person direct you.
(Y page 228). You can obtain information about
trickle chargers from a qualified specialist work-
shop. Drive sensibly – save fuel
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than In order to save fuel, observe the following tips:
6 weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a
result of lack of use. In this event, consult a X The tires should always be inflated to the rec-
qualified specialist workshop. ommended tire pressure.
X Remove unnecessary loads.
X Remove roof carriers when they are not nee-
Driving tips ded.
X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.
General notes X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.
X Have all maintenance work carried out as
indicated by the service intervals in the Main-
G WARNING tenance Booklet or by the service interval dis-
play.
The driver's attention to the road must always
be his/her primary focus when driving. For Fuel consumption also increases when driving in
cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in moun-
your safety and the safety of others, we rec- tainous terrain.
ommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a telephone Overrun cutoff
call. If you choose to use the telephone while
driving, please use the hands-free device and If you are in overrun mode and take your foot off
only use the telephone when road, weather the accelerator pedal, the fuel supply is cut off
when the engine speed is out of the idle speed
and traffic conditions permit. control range.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle. Drinking and driving
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle covers G WARNING
a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
every second. driving are very dangerous combinations.
Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
G WARNING affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-
If you switch off the ignition while driving, ment.
safety-relevant functions are only available The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, dent are greatly increased when you drink or
for example, the power steering and the brake take drugs and drive.
Driving tips 133
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow Speed limiter

anyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-
ing drugs. G WARNING
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-
city and the approved maximum speed could
Emission control
Driving and parking

lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There
G WARNING is a risk of accident.
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling approved for your vehicle model. Observe the
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There tire load rating and speed rating required for
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave your vehicle.
the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
out sufficient ventilation. As the driver, you must find out about the max-
imum speed of the vehicle permitted for the
tires (tire and tire pressure). In particular, also
Certain engine systems are designed to keep
observe the tire approval regulations for each
the level of poisonous substances in exhaust
country.
fumes within legal limits.
You must not exceed the speed limit for the tires
These systems only work optimally if they are
listed in the tire pressure tables. You can find
maintained exactly in accordance with the man-
information on tire pressures in the "Wheels and
ufacturer's specifications. Any work on the
tires" section (Y page 251).
engine should therefore be carried out by quali-
fied and authorized technicians at a Sprinter You can permanently limit the speed of your
dealer. vehicle to 65 mph (105 km/h) or 75 mph
(120 km/h).
The engine settings must not be changed under
any circumstances. In addition, all specific We recommend that you have the speed limit
maintenance work must be carried out at regu- programmed at an authorized Sprinter dealer.
lar intervals and in accordance with the service Before overtaking, take into consideration that
requirements of the dealer listed here on the the engine speed limiter prevents the speed
inside title page. Details can be found in the increasing beyond the programmed speed limit.
Maintenance Booklet.
Driving abroad
Short journey
Service
! If the vehicle is predominantly used for
short-distance driving or is stationary for long An extensive network of authorized Sprinter
periods, this could lead to a malfunction in the Dealers is also at your disposal when you are
automatic cleaning function for the diesel par- traveling abroad. Nevertheless, please bear in
ticle filter. This can lead to blockage of the mind that service facilities or replacement parts
diesel particle filter. This can also result in fuel may not always be immediately available. You
collecting in the engine oil and cause engine can obtain a list of workshops at any authorized
failure. Sprinter Dealer.
Therefore, if you mainly drive short distances,
drive on a highway or an inter-urban road for Fuel
20 minutes every 300 miles (500 km). This facil- In some countries, only fuels with a higher sulfur
itates the diesel particle filter's burn-off proc- content are available.
ess.
Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage. Infor-
mation on fuel (Y page 278).
Z
134 Driving tips
Low-beam headlamps Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never

When driving in countries in which traffic drives depress the brake pedal and the accelerator
on the opposite side of the road to the country pedal at the same time.
where the vehicle is registered, the halogen
headlamps must be partially masked. This pre- ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly
results in excessive and premature wear to
Driving and parking
vents glare to oncoming traffic and no longer

illuminates the edge of the road to the same the brake pads.
height and distance.
Have the halogen headlamps masked at a quali- Downhill gradients
fied specialist workshop before you cross the
border, but as close to it as possible. ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly
When returning from your journey, remove the results in excessive and premature wear to
adhesive surfaces from the halogen headlamps the brake pads.
as close to the border as possible. Clean the On long and steep downhill gradients, you
glass of the headlamps if necessary. should change down to shift range 2 or 1 in
It is not necessary to adjust Bi-Xenon head- good time. This should be observed in particular
lamps. Legal requirements are fulfilled even when driving with a laden vehicle and when tow-
without adjustment. ing a trailer.
i You must also change the shift range in
good time when cruise control is switched on.
Transport by rail
You thereby make use of the braking effect of
Transporting your vehicle by rail may be subject the engine and do not have to brake as often to
to certain restrictions or require special meas- maintain the speed. This relieves the load on the
ures to be taken in some countries due to vary- service brake and prevents the brakes from
ing tunnel heights and loading standards. overheating and wearing too quickly.
You can obtain further information from any
authorized Sprinter dealer. Heavy and light loads
G WARNING
Braking If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, the braking system can overheat. This
Important safety notes increases the stopping distance and can even
G WARNING cause the braking system to fail. There is a
risk of an accident.
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
an attempt to increase the engine's braking Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. depress the brake pedal and the accelerator
There is an increased danger of skidding and pedal at the same time.
accidents.
! Depressing the brake pedal constantly
Do not shift down for additional engine brak- results in excessive and premature wear to
ing on a slippery road surface. the brake pads.
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy
G WARNING load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while on for a short while. The brakes are cooled down
driving, the braking system can overheat. This more quickly in the airflow.
increases the stopping distance and can even
cause the braking system to fail. There is a
risk of an accident.
Driving tips 135
Wet road surfaces New brake discs and brake pads/

linings
If you have been driving for a long time in heavy
rain without braking, there may be a delayed New brake pads and brake discs only reach their
response when you first apply the brakes. This optimal braking effect after a few
may also occur after driving through a car wash 100 kilometers. Until then, compensate for this
Driving and parking

or deep water. by applying greater force to the brake pedal.
You must depress the brake pedal more firmly. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
Maintain a longer distance to the vehicle in mends only installing the following brake discs
front. and brake pads/linings:
While paying attention to the traffic conditions, Rbrake discs that have been approved by
you should brake the vehicle firmly after driving Mercedes-Benz
on a wet road surface or through a car wash. This
Rbrake pads/linings that have been approved
heats the brake discs, so that they dry more
quickly, which protects them against corrosion. by Mercedes-Benz or are of an equivalent
standard of quality
Other brake discs or brake pads/linings can
Limited braking performance on salt- compromise the safety of your vehicle.
treated roads
Always replace all brake discs and brake pads/
When driving on salted roads, salt may start to linings on an axle at the same time. Always
build up on the brake disks and brake pads. This install new brake pads/linings when replacing
can increase braking distances considerably. brake discs.
Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle in
front. Parking brake
To remove any build-up of salt that may have
formed: G WARNING
X Apply the brakes at the start of the journey,
If you must brake the vehicle with the parking
occasionally during journey and at the end of brake, the braking distance is considerably
the journey. Make sure that you do not endan- longer and the wheels could lock. There is an
ger other road users when doing so. increased danger of skidding and accidents.
Only use the parking brake to brake the vehi-
Checking the brake pad thickness cle when the service brake is faulty. Do not
apply the parking brake too firmly. If the
In addition to monitoring using the brake pad
wear sensor, regularly monitor and check all of wheels lock, release the parking brake until
the brake pads by performing a visual inspection the wheels begin turning again.
to look for pad material wear.
If you are unable to check the brake wear on the When driving on wet roads or dirt-covered sur-
inside of the wheels, remove the wheels with the faces, road salt and/or dirt may get into the
tools provided. parking brake. This causes corrosion and a
reduction of braking force.
Make sure that the brake pad material thickness
never falls below 0.12 in (3 mm). Have the brake In order to prevent this, drive with the parking
pads checked and replaced at a qualified spe- brake lightly applied from time to time. When
cialist workshop, if necessary. doing so, drive for a distance of approximately
110 yds (100 m) at a maximum speed of 12 mph
Do not solely rely on the brake pad wear sensor. (20 km/h).
It is strongly recommended that you have the The brake lamps are not illuminated when you
brake pads checked at a qualified specialist brake the vehicle using the parking brake.
workshop at every service displayed in the main-
tenance interval indicator, prior to long journeys
and whenever the wheels are removed.
Z
136 Driving tips
Driving in wet conditions G DANGER

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate
Hydroplaning
ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases
G WARNING such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the
There is a danger of hydroplaning occurring, vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle
Driving and parking
even if you are driving slowly and your tires becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of
have sufficient tread depth, depending on the fatal injury.
depth of water on the road. There is a risk of If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating
an accident. running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area
For this reason, avoid tire ruts and brake care- around the vehicle are clear of snow. To
fully. ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a
window on the side of the vehicle that is not
Therefore, in heavy rain or other conditions in facing into the wind.
which hydroplaning can occur, drive as follows:
Rreduce
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified
your speed
specialist workshop in good time at the onset of
Ravoid tire ruts winter.
Rapply the brakes with care
i Do not cover the radiator, e.g. with a winter
cover. The measurements of the on-board
Driving on flooded roads diagnostic system may otherwise return inac-
! Do not drive through flooded areas. Check curate values. Some of these values are
the depth of any water before driving through legally prescribed and must therefore always
it. Drive slowly through standing water. Oth- be exact.
erwise, water may enter the vehicle interior or Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" sec-
the engine compartment. This can damage tion (Y page 250).
the electronic components in the engine or
the automatic transmission. Water can also Slippery road surfaces
be drawn in by the engine's air suction nozzles
and this can cause engine damage. G WARNING
If you have to drive on stretches of road on which If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
water has collected, please bear in mind that: an attempt to increase the engine's braking
Rthe water level of standing water should not effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
be above the lower edge of the front bumper There is an increased danger of skidding and
Ryou must not drive faster than walking speed accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
ing on a slippery road surface.
Driving in winter
General notes G WARNING
The outside temperature indicator is not
G WARNING designed to serve as an ice-warning device
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
an attempt to increase the engine's braking Indicated temperatures just above the freez-
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-
There is an increased danger of skidding and face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
accidents. especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
ing on a slippery road surface. ! Vehicles with automatic transmission may
roll only briefly in the neutral position N. Pro-
Driving tips 137
longed rolling of the wheels, e.g. when being G WARNING

towed, will result in transmission damage.
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
stopped when moving at low speed:
hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk
X Shift the transmission to neutral position N. of fire.
Driving and parking

X Try to maintain control of the vehicle using
When driving off road or on unpaved roads,
corrective steering.
check the vehicle's underside regularly. In
Drive particularly carefully on slippery roads. particular, remove parts of plants or other
Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking flammable materials which have become
maneuvers. Do not use cruise control.
trapped. In the case of damage, contact a
You can find further information on winter tires
and snow chains in the "Winter operation" sec- qualified specialist workshop.
tion (Y page 250).
! When driving off-road or on unpaved surfa-
ces, check the underside of the vehicle and
the wheels and tires at regular intervals. In
Driving off-road particular, remove any trapped foreign
objects, e.g. stones and branches.
Such foreign objects may:
G WARNING Rdamage the chassis, the fuel tank or the
If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or brake system
turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle Rcause imbalances and thus vibrations
could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is a Rbe flung out when you continue driving
risk of an accident. If there is any damage, inform a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Always drive on a steep incline in the line of
fall (straight up or down) and do not turn the When driving off-road and on construction sites,
vehicle. sand, mud and water mixed with oil, for exam-
ple, may get into the brakes. This may lead to a
reduction in braking performance or total brake
G WARNING failure, also as a result of increased wear. The
When driving off-road, your body is subject to braking characteristics will vary depending on
forces from all directions, due to the uneven the material that has got into the system. Clean
surface. You could be thrown from your seat, the brakes after driving off-road. If you then
notice reduced braking performance or hear
for instance. There is a risk of injury. scraping noises, have the brake system checked
Always wear a seat belt, even when driving off- at a qualified specialist workshop. Adjust your
road. driving style to the changed braking character-
istics.
G WARNING Driving off-road or on construction sites increa-
ses the possibility of vehicle damage which may
If you drive over obstacles or in ruts, the steer- in turn lead to the failure of certain assemblies
ing wheel may jerk out of your grip, causing and systems. Adapt your driving style to the off-
injury to your hands. road driving conditions. Drive carefully. Have
Always hold the steering wheel firmly with any vehicle damage rectified at a qualified spe-
both hands. When driving over obstacles, you cialist workshop as soon as possible.
must expect steering forces to increase When driving on rough terrain, do not shift the
transmission into the neutral position. You could
briefly and suddenly.
lose control when attempting to brake the vehi-
cle with the service brake. If your vehicle cannot
manage an uphill slope, drive back down the
slope in reverse gear.
Z
138 Driving tips
When loading your vehicle for driving off-road or ROnly drive off-road with the engine running
on a construction site, keep the vehicle's center and a gear engaged.
of gravity as low as possible. RDrive slowly and smoothly. Walking pace is
necessary in many situations.
Checklist before driving off-road RAvoid spinning the drive wheels.
RMake sure that the wheels always remain in
Driving and parking
X Check the fuel and DEF levels (Y page 161)

and top up (Y page 128). contact with the ground.
RDrive with extreme care over unknown terrain
X Engine: check the oil level (Y page 221) and
add oil (Y page 223). where you can only see for a short distance.
As a precaution, get out of the vehicle to take
Before driving up or down steep gradients, fill a look at the route to be taken in advance.
the oil to the maximum level.
RCheck the water depth before fording.
i If you drive up or down steep gradients, the RWatch out for obstacles (e.g. rocks, holes,
4 symbol may appear in the display. The tree stumps and ruts).
engine operating safety is not put at risk if you
RAvoid edges where the surface could crumble
have filled the engine oil to the maximum level
before the journey. or break away.
X Vehicle tool kit: check that the jack is work-
ing (Y page 241).
Checklist after driving off-road
X Make sure that a lug wrench (Y page 241), ! If you detect damage to the vehicle after
wooden underlay for the jack, a robust tow driving off-road, have the vehicle checked
cable and a folding spade are carried in the immediately at a qualified specialist work-
vehicle. shop.
X Wheels and tires: check the tire tread depth Off-road driving places a higher demand on your
(Y page 249) and tire pressure vehicle than normal road operation. Check your
(Y page 251). vehicle after driving on rough terrain. By doing
so you will notice any damage in good time and
Rules for driving off-road reduce the risk of an accident for yourself and
other road users. Clean your vehicle thoroughly
! Always bear the vehicle's ground clearance before driving on public roads.
in mind and avoid obstacles, e.g. deep ruts. Observe the following points after driving off-
Obstacles may damage the following parts of road, on construction sites and before driving on
the vehicle: public roads:
Rthe chassis X Vehicles with all-wheel drive: deactivate
Rthe drive train all-wheel drive (Y page 147).
Rthe fuel and supply tanks X Activate ASR (Y page 55).
For this reason, you should always drive X Clean the headlamps and tail lamps and
slowly when driving off-road. If you have to check them for damage.
drive over obstacles, have the front X Clean the front and rear license plates.
passenger direct you. X Clean the windshield, windows and exterior
i We recommend that you additionally carry a mirrors.
shovel and a recovery rope with shackle in the X Clean the steps, door sills and grab handles.
vehicle. This increases safety of footing.
REnsure that loads and items of luggage are X Clean the wheels and tires, wheel arches and
securely stowed or lashed down the underbody of the vehicle with a water jet.
(Y page 213). This increases road grip, especially on wet
road surfaces.
RBefore driving off-road, stop the vehicle and
shift to a low gear.
RIf the surface demands it, temporarily deacti-
vate ASR when pulling away (Y page 55).
Driving systems 139
X Check the wheels and tires and wheel arches Important safety notes
for trapped foreign objects and remove them.
Trapped foreign objects can damage the If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are
wheels and tires or may be flung out from the inattentive, cruise control can neither reduce
vehicle when you continue driving. the risk of an accident nor override the laws of
X Check the underbody for trapped branches or
physics. Cruise control cannot take road,
Driving and parking

other parts of plants and remove them. weather and traffic conditions into account.
Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible
X Clean the brake disks, brake pads and axle
for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi-
joints, particularly after operation in sand, cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay-
mud, grit and gravel, water or similarly dirty ing in lane.
conditions.
Do not use cruise control:
X Check the entire floor assembly, the tires,
wheels, bodywork structure, brakes, steering, Rin traffic conditions that are unsuitable for
chassis and exhaust system for any damage. driving at a constant speed, e.g. in heavy traf-
X Check the service brake for operating safety,
fic, on winding roads or off-road
e.g. carry out a brake test. Ron slippery roads. Braking or accelerating can
X If you notice strong vibrations after driving off-
cause the drive wheels to lose traction and
road, check the wheels and drive train for for- the vehicle could then skid
eign objects again. Remove any foreign Rwhen visibility is poor, e.g. due to fog, heavy
objects which can lead to imbalances and rain or snow
thus cause vibrations. If there is a change of drivers, make sure that
you inform the new driver about the set cruise
speed.
Driving systems
Cruise control lever
Cruise control
Operating cruise control
General notes
Cruise control maintains the speed of the vehi-
cle for you.
Use cruise control if road and traffic conditions
make it appropriate to maintain a steady speed
for a prolonged period. You can set any speed
from 20 mph upwards in increments of 1 mph.
i If you have set km/h as the unit for the dig-
ital speedometer (Y page 168), you can set
any speed from 30 km/h upwards in incre-
ments of 1 km/h.
Cruise control should not be activated when : To activate and store the current speed or a
driving off-road or on construction sites. higher speed
Cruise control may not be able to maintain the ; To activate at the last stored speed
stored speed on uphill or downhill gradients. If = To activate and store the current speed or a
the gradient evens out and the vehicle's speed lower speed
does not fall below 20 mph (30 km/h), the ? To deactivate cruise control
stored speed is resumed.
The cruise control lever is the upper lever on the
i The speed shown in the speedometer may left of the steering column.
differ slightly from the speed stored by cruise
control. Displaying the cruise control speed
Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: when
you activate cruise control, the text field in the
display briefly shows the Cr. control message
Z
140 Driving systems
and the stored speed. The status area of the X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
display then shows the V symbol and the you =.
stored speed. X Release the accelerator pedal.
Vehicles without steering wheel buttons: Cruise control is activated and resumes the
when you activate cruise control, the display vehicle's speed to the last speed stored.
briefly shows the V symbol and the stored The display shows the V symbol and the
Driving and parking
speed. stored speed.

i When you pull the cruise control lever
Activation conditions towards you for the first time after starting the
engine, cruise control adopts the current
To activate cruise control, all of the following
speed.
activation conditions must be fulfilled:
Rthe parking brake must be released. The c
Setting the speed
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster is off
Ryou are driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) It may be a moment before the vehicle starts to
Rneither the brake or clutch pedal is depressed accelerate or brake to the set speed. Take this
delay into account when setting the speed.
i Other drive and brake systems not descri- X Briefly push the cruise control lever up : to
bed in this Operator's Manual, such as a increase the speed or down = to reduce the
retarder, may affect cruise control. You can speed.
find information on this in the separate oper- The last stored speed increases or decreases
ating instructions provided by the body man- in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments).
ufacturer.
or
X Press and hold the cruise control lever up :
Storing and maintaining the current or down = until the desired speed has been
speed reached.
X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed X Release the cruise control lever.
above 20 mph (30 km/h). The current speed is stored.
X Briefly push the cruise control lever up : or The display shows the V symbol and the
down ?. stored speed.
X Release the accelerator pedal.
i Cruise control is not deactivated if you
Cruise control is activated. The current speed depress the accelerator pedal. If you acceler-
is stored. ate briefly to overtake, for example, cruise
The display shows the V symbol and the control resumes the vehicle’s speed to the
stored speed. last speed stored after you have finished over-
taking.
Resuming the stored speed
Deactivating cruise control
G WARNING
There are various ways to deactivate cruise con-
If you call up the stored speed and it differs trol:
from the current speed, the vehicle acceler-
X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
ates or decelerates. If you do not know the
wards ?.
stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or
or
brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-
X Apply the brakes.
dent.
The last speed set remains stored. The last
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-
speed stored is deleted when you switch off the
tions before calling up the stored speed. If you engine.
do not know the stored speed, store the
desired speed again.
Driving systems 141
Cruise control is deactivated automatically Ryou are driving slower than 20 mph (30 km/h)
when: Ryou shift the automatic transmission to neu-
Ryou apply the brakes tral position N while the vehicle is in motion
Ryou apply the parking brake and the c RESP® or ASR intervenes
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights Rthere is a malfunction in the ESP®, ASR or ABS
up
Driving and parking

system
Problems with cruise control

On vehicles with steering The display shows a high-priority message. Thus a change in speed is
wheel buttons, the not possible.
speed cannot be set X Proceed as instructed by the message in the display.
when cruise control is
X Deactivate cruise control
activated.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST G WARNING

The distance warning function cannot always
General notes
clearly identify objects and complex traffic
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST comprises the situations.
distance warning function and adaptive Brake
In such cases, the distance warning function
Assist.
may:
Distance warning function Rgive an unnecessary warning
Rnot give a warning
i Note the section on 'Important safety notes' Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
(Y page 54).
uation and do not rely solely on the distance
G WARNING warning function.
The distance warning function does not react:
Operation
Rto people or animals
The distance warning function can help you to
Rto oncoming vehicles minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a
Rto crossing traffic vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a
collision. If the distance warning function
Rwhen cornering
detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will
The distance warning function may not give be warned visually and acoustically. Without
warnings in all critical situations. There is a your intervention, the distance warning function
risk of an accident. cannot prevent a collision.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- The distance warning function will issue a warn-
ing at speeds of around 20 mph (30 km/h) or
uation and be ready to brake. more if:
Always adapt your speed to suit the prevailing Ryou approach a vehicle ahead of you very
road and traffic conditions. quickly. You will then hear an intermittent
warning tone and the red · warning lamp
in the instrument cluster flashes.
Z
142 Driving systems
X Brake immediately in order to increase the Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: the
distance from the vehicle in front. Ä warning lamp in the instrument cluster
or flashes and the Distance Warning System
X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do Deactivated message appears .The mes-
so. sage then disappears and the Ä warning
lamp remains lit.
Driving and parking
If you want the distance warning function to X To activate: press the æ button again
assist you, the function must be activated and
(Y page 37).
operational. Vehicles without steering wheel buttons:
Due to the nature of the system, particularly the Ä warning lamp in the instrument clus-
complicated driving conditions may cause the ter lights up and the on message flashes. The
system to display an unnecessary warning. message then disappears and the Ä indi-
With the help of the radar sensor system, the cator lamp goes out.
distance warning function can detect obstacles Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: the
that are in the path of your vehicle for an exten- Ä warning lamp in the instrument cluster
ded period of time. flashes and the Distance Warning System
Up to a speed of 45 mph (70 km/h), the distance Activated message appears in the multi-
warning function can also react to stationary function display. The message then disap-
obstacles, such as stopped or parked vehicles. pears and the indicator lamp Ä goes out.
If you approach an obstacle and the distance
warning function detects a risk of a collision, the Adaptive Brake Assist
system will alert you both visually and acousti-
cally. i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be tion for driving safety systems (Y page 54).
impaired in the case of:
G WARNING
Rdirt, ice or anything else covering the sensors
Rsnow or heavy rain
Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly
identify objects and complex traffic situa-
Rinterference from other radar sources
tions.
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-
ple in parking garages In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can:
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a Rintervene unnecessarily
motorbike Rnot intervene
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,
have the configuration and operation of the Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the
workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
speeds where there is no visible damage to the
front of the vehicle. G WARNING
Activating/deactivating the distance Adaptive Brake Assist does not react:
warning function Rto people or animals
When you switch on the engine, the distance Rto oncoming vehicles
warning function switches on after a few sec-
onds. Rto crossing traffic
X To deactivate: press the æ button Rto stationary obstacles
(Y page 37). Rwhen cornering
Vehicles without steering wheel buttons:
the Ä warning lamp in the instrument clus- As a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may not
ter lights up and the OFF message flashes. The intervene in all critical conditions. There is a
message then disappears and the Ä indi- risk of an accident.
cator lamp remains lit.
Driving systems 143
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- Lane Tracking package
uation and be ready to brake.
Blind Spot Assist
Adaptive Brake Assist aids you when braking
during hazardous situations at speeds above General notes
20 mph (30 km/h). With the help of Adaptive Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either
Driving and parking

Brake Assist, the distance warning signal can side of the vehicle that are not visible to the
detect obstacles that are in the path of your driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors
vehicle for an extended period of time. in the bumper. It supports you from speeds of
When you approach an obstacle and adaptive approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warning
Brake Assist detects that there is a risk of a col- display in the exterior mirrors draws your atten-
lision, adaptive Brake Assist calculates the brak- tion to vehicles detected in the monitored area.
ing force necessary to avoid a collision. Should If you then switch on the corresponding turn
you apply the brakes forcefully, adaptive Brake signal to change lane, you will also receive an
Assist will automatically increase the braking optical and audible collision warning.
force to the calculated level.
X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
emergency braking situation is over. G WARNING
ABS prevents the wheels from locking. Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
The brakes function as usual again if: Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,
Ryou release the brake pedal placing them in the blind spot area
Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision Rvehicles which approach with a large speed
Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle differential and overtake your vehicle
Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated. As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give
Up to the maximum vehicle speed, adaptive warnings in such situations. There is a risk of
Brake Assist can react to moving obstacles that
have already been recognized as such at least an accident.
once over the period of observation. Adaptive Always observe the traffic conditions care-
Brake Assist does not react to stationary obsta- fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
cles.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to
impaired if: detect some vehicles and is no substitute for
attentive driving. Always ensure that there is
sufficient distance to the side for other road
Rsnow or heavy rain users and obstacles.
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-
i USA only:
ple in parking garages This device has been approved by the FCC as
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor
is intended for use in an automotive radar
motorbike
system only. Removal, tampering, or altering
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line of the device will void any warranties, and is
If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to a not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with,
malfunction in the radar sensor system, the full alter, or use in any non-approved way.
brake boosting effect with the help of BAS Any unauthorized modification to this device
remains available. could void the user’s authority to operate the
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, equipment.
have the configuration and operation of the
radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist
workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow
speeds where there is no visible damage to the
front of the vehicle.
Z
144 Driving systems
Monitoring range of the sensors The two sensors for Blind Spot Assist are inte-
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be grated into the sides of the rear bumper. Make
impaired in the case of: sure that the bumper is free of dirt, ice or slush
in the vicinity of the sensors. The radar sensors
Rdirt, ice or anything else covering the sensors must not be covered, for example by rear-moun-
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or ted cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following
Driving and parking
snow a severe impact or in the event of damage to the

Rnarrow and short vehicles, e.g. motorcycles bumper, have the function of the radar sensors
or bicycles checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Rvery wide lanes Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not work prop-
erly.
Rnarrow lanes
Rvehicles not driving in the middle of their lane Indicator and warning display
Rbarriers or other road boundaries Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in
indicated. the monitoring range are then not indicated.
: Yellow indicator lamp and red warning lamp

If yellow indicator lamp : lights up:
Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph (30 km/h)
RBlind Spot Assist is deactivated
RBlind Spot Assist is malfunctioning
Blind Spot Assist monitors the area approx- Blind Spot Assist is active from a speed of
imately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and 20 mph (30 km/h). If a vehicle is detected in the
approximately 1.6 ft (0.5 m) to 11.5 ft (3.5 m) blind spot monitoring range, red warning
each side of it. The monitoring range behind the lamp : on the corresponding side lights up.
vehicle may also be larger depending on the sit- This warning occurs when a vehicle enters the
uation. blind spot monitoring range from behind or from
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warn-
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be ing only occurs if the difference in speed is less
indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv- than 14 mph (22 km/h).
ing in the middle of their lane. This may be the Yellow indicator lamp : goes out if reverse gear
case if the vehicles are driving on the inner side is engaged. Blind Spot Assist is then deactiva-
of their lane. ted.
Due to the nature of the system: The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps
Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving is adjusted automatically according to the
close to crash barriers or similar solid lane brightness of the ambient light.
borders.
Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving
alongside particularly long vehicles, for exam-
ple trucks, for a prolonged time.
Driving systems 145
Collision warning
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of
Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corre-
sponding turn signal, a double warning tone
sounds once. Red warning lamp : flashes. If
the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles
Driving and parking

are indicated by the flashing of red warning
lamp :. There are no further warning tones.
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist
i Blind Spot Assist is activated when you
switch on the ignition.
: Lane Keeping Assist camera
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light Lane Keeping Assist supports you from speeds
up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and of approximately 40 mph(60 km/h).
then turn yellow. If Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings,
X To deactivate: press the k button in the the Ã indicator lamp in the instrument clus-
center console (Y page 37). ter lights up green. Lane Keeping Assist is opera-
The yellow indicator lamp in exterior mirror : tional.
first flashes and then lights up continuously. Important safety notes
X To activate: press the k button in the
center console again (Y page 37). G WARNING
The yellow indicator lamp in exterior mirror : Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly
flashes initially. If you exceed 20 mph recognize lane markings.
(30 km/h) while driving, the yellow indicator
lamp in exterior mirror : goes out. In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:
Rgive an unnecessary warning
Towing a trailer
Rnot give a warning
If you attach a trailer, make sure that you have
correctly established the electrical connection. There is a risk of an accident.
This can be accomplished by checking the trailer Always pay particular attention to the traffic
lighting. Blind Spot Assist is deactivated as a situation and stay in lane, in particular if
result. The indicator lamp in the exterior mirrors warned by Lane Keeping Assist.
lights up yellow.
On vehicles with steering wheel buttons, the G WARNING
Blind Spot Assist Deactivated message
also appears in the display. The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not
return the vehicle to the original lane. There is
Lane Keeping Assist a risk of an accident.
You should always steer, brake or accelerate
General notes yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep-
Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of ing Assist.
your vehicle by means of a camera at the top of
the windshield. Lane Keeping Assist detects If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keep-
lane markings on the road and warns you before ing Assist can neither reduce the risk of accident
you leave your lane unintentionally. nor override the laws of physics. Lane Keeping
Assist cannot take into account road, weather or
traffic conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is only an
aid. You are responsible for the distance to the
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, braking in
good time and for staying in your lane.
Z
146 Driving systems
Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehicle Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated.
in its lane. X To activate: press the j button in the
The system may be impaired or may not function center console again (Y page 37).
if: On vehicles without steering wheel but-
Rif the vehicle is incorrectly loaded tons:
(Y page 213) on flashes briefly in the display and the Ã
Driving and parking
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes
illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, out. If a lane marking is detected, the Ã
fog or spray indicator lamp lights up green.
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the On vehicles with steering wheel buttons:
sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if The Lane Keep. Assist Activated mes-
the road surface is wet) sage appears in the display and the Ã
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes
covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin- out. If a lane marking is detected, the Ã
ity of the camera indicator lamp lights up green.
Rno, or several, unclear lane markings are pres- Lane Keeping Assist is activated.
ent for one lane, e.g. in a construction area A Lane Keeping Assist warning is suppressed if:
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or cov- Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow ABS, BAS or ESP®.
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small
Ryou have set the turn signal and a lane change
and the lane markings thus cannot be detec- is detected. In this case, the warnings are
ted suppressed for a certain period of time.
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown on vehi-
branch off, cross one another or merge cles with an automatic transmission.
Rthe road is narrow and winding
Ryou brake hard.
Rthere are highly variable shade conditions on
Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
the road obstacle or change lane quickly.
A warning may be given if a front wheel passes Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
over a lane marking. In addition, a warning tone
sounds and the Ã indicator lamp in the In order that you are warned only when neces-
instrument cluster flashes red. sary and in good time if you cross the lane mark-
ing, the system recognizes certain conditions
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping and warns you accordingly.
Assist Lane Keeping Assist warns you earlier if:
Lane Keeping Assist is automatically activated Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
when you start the engine. bend.
X To deactivate: press the j button in the Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a freeway.
center console (Y page 37). Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.
On vehicles without steering wheel but- Warnings are given later if:
tons:
Rthe road has narrow lanes.
OFF flashes briefly in the display and the Ã
Ryou cut the corner on a bend.
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
flashes yellow and then lights up continu-
ously.
On vehicles with steering wheel buttons: All-wheel drive
The Lane Keep. Assist Deactivated mes- Important safety notes
sage appears in the display and the Ã
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster ! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised.
flashes yellow and then lights up continu- This may damage the transfer case. Damage
ously. of this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-
Benz Limited Warranty. All wheels must
Driving systems 147
remain either on the ground or be fully raised. Engaging/disengaging all-wheel drive

Observe the instructions for towing the vehi-
cle with all wheels in full contact with the
ground.
! A function or performance test should only
be carried out on a two-axle dynamometer.
Driving and parking

Before you operate the vehicle on such a
dynamometer, please consult a qualified
workshop. You could otherwise damage the
drive train or the brake system.
If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are
inattentive, the all-wheel drive system can nei-
ther reduce the risk of an accident nor override
the laws of physics. The all-wheel drive system X To engage/disengage: press the ; but-
cannot take road, weather and traffic conditions ton.
into account. The all-wheel drive system is only The indicator lamp in the ; button flashes.
an aid. You are responsible for the distance to The h and : indicator lamps light up in
the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for the instrument cluster. ESP® and ASR are
braking in good time. deactivated for the duration of the engaging/
4ETS ensures permanent drive for all four disengaging process.
wheels, and together with ESP® it improves the If the engaging/disengaging process is suc-
vehicle's traction. cessful, the h and : indicator lamps in
If a driven wheel spins due to lack of traction: the instrument cluster go out and ESP® and
RWhen pulling away, make use of the traction ASR are reactivated.
control integrated in ESP®. Depress the If the indicator lamp in the ; button is lit,
accelerator pedal as far as necessary. all-wheel drive is engaged. On vehicles with
RWhile driving, slowly take your foot off the
steering-wheel buttons, the display then
accelerator pedal shows the following message: Four-wheel
drive active.
In wintry driving conditions, always use winter
tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains If the engaging/disengaging process fails, the
(Y page 251). This is the only way to get the full indicator lamp in the ; button flashes
benefit from the all-wheel drive system. three times briefly. One of the gear change
conditions was not fulfilled.
For information on "Driving off-road", see
(Y page 137). As long as the indicator lamp in the ; button
is flashing, you can cancel the engaging/disen-
gaging process by pressing the ; again.
Engaging all-wheel drive
i If the LOW RANGE transmission ratio
Conditions for engaging/disengaging (Y page 147) is engaged, all-wheel drive can-
All-wheel drive can only be engaged or disen- not be disengaged.
gaged if:
Rthe engine is running LOW RANGE transmission ratio
Rthe vehicle is stationary
General notes
If it is not possible to engage all-wheel-drive:
The LOW RANGE transmission ratio assists you
Rmove the selector lever to position N when driving on difficult terrain. If you engage
Rrelease the brake pedal LOW RANGE, the engine's performance charac-
Rpress the ; button teristics and the automatic transmission's shift-
Rmove the selector lever from N to D or R
ing characteristics are adjusted accordingly.
The transmission ratio from the engine to the
wheels is around 40% lower than in the on-road
position. This increases the drive torque.
Z
148 Driving systems
Conditions for engaging/disengaging laws of physics. DSR cannot take road, weather
LOW RANGE can only be engaged or disengaged and traffic conditions into account. DSR is only
if: an aid. You are responsible for the distance to
the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for
Rthe engine is running braking in good time.
Rthe vehicle is stationary
General notes
Driving and parking
Rthe brake pedal is depressed

Rthe selector lever of the automatic transmis- DSR supports you with the LOW RANGE trans-
sion is in position P or N mission ratio when you are driving downhill off-
road and on construction sites. DSR maintains a
Rall-wheel drive is engaged
preset speed for you on downhill gradients by
Engaging and disengaging LOW RANGE applying the brakes as required. Maintaining the
speed is dependent on the road surface condi-
tions and the downhill gradient and cannot
therefore be guaranteed in all situations.
You can set the speed to between 2.5 mph
(4 km/h) and 11 mph (18 km/h) using the brake
and accelerator pedals or the cruise control
lever.
RIf the vehicle is stationary, or its speed is less
than 2.5 mph (4 km/h) the speed is set to
2.5 mph (4 km/h).
RIf you drive faster than 11 mph (18 km/h) off-
road, DSR switches to standby mode. DSR
remains activated, but does not brake auto-
: Engages and disengages LOW RANGE matically.
X To engage or disengage: press button : RIf you drive downhill slower than 11 mph
or ;. (18 km/h), DSR sets the speed to the previ-
The + indicator lamp flashes in the instru- ously set speed.
ment cluster for the duration of the engaging/ RDSR switches off automatically if you drive
disengaging process. faster than 28 mph (45 km/h).
If the engaging/disengaging process is suc-
cessful: Cruise control lever
Rand LOW RANGE is engaged, the + indi-
cator lamp lights up.
Rand LOW RANGE is disengaged, the +
indicator lamp goes out.
As long as the + indicator lamp is flashing,
you can cancel the engaging/disengaging
process by pressing button : or ; again.
If the engaging/disengaging process fails, the
+ indicator lamp briefly flashes three
times. One of the gear change conditions was
not fulfilled.
: Activates DSR and stores the current or
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) higher speed
; Activates DSR and stores the current speed
Important safety notes = Activates DSR and stores the current or
Observe the notes on braking in the section on lower speed
"Driving and parking". If you fail to adapt your ? Deactivates DSR
driving style or you are inattentive, DSR can nei-
ther reduce the risk of accident nor override the The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever
on the left of the steering column. For as long as
Driving systems 149
the LOW RANGE transmission ratio is engaged, DSR is activated but is not intervening
only use the cruise control lever to operate DSR. RYou are driving at between 11 mph (18 km/h)
When the LOW RANGE transmission ratio is dis- and 28 mph (45 km/h).
engaged, use cruise control.
RThe DSR message is displayed in the status
Activation conditions area of the on-board computer. Also, the
speed 11 mph (18 km/h) flashes.
Driving and parking

In order to activate DSR, both activation condi-
tions must be fulfilled: DSR is activated but is not intervening
RThe LOW RANGE transmission ratio is RYou are driving faster than 28 mph (45 km/h).
engaged. The + indicator lamp in the RThe DSR message is displayed in the status
instrument cluster lights up. area of the on-board computer. Also, the ---
RThe vehicle is stationary or you are not driving message is displayed for 5 seconds.
faster than 11 mph (18 km/h). DSR is activated but is not intervening
RThe DSR --- message is displayed in the sta-
Activating DSR
tus area of the on-board computer.
You can activate DSR when the vehicle is sta-
There is a malfunction in the Electronic Brak-
tionary or moving.
ing System (EBS). Visit a qualified specialist
X Brake or accelerate the vehicle to the workshop.
required speed between 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
and 11 mph (18 km/h). Vehicles without steering wheel buttons
X Briefly push the cruise control lever up : or LOW RANGE is engaged:
down =. RThe DSR symbol is displayed in the on-board
or computer.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards RDSR can be activated.
you ;.
DSR is activated
X Release the brake or accelerator pedal.
The current speed is stored. When the vehicle RThe DSR symbol and the set speed are dis-
is stationary, the speed is stored at 2.5 played in the on-board computer.
(4 km/h). DSR maintains the stored speed on DSR is activated but is not intervening
the downhill gradient and brakes automati- RYou are driving at between 11 mph (18 km/h)
cally. and 28 mph (45 km/h).
When DSR is activated and the vehicle pulls RThe DSR symbol is displayed in the on-board
away, accelerates or brakes, the speed set cor- computer. Also, the speed 11 mph (18 km/h)
responds to the speed at which the accelerator flashes.
or brake pedal is released. This is only the case DSR is activated but is not intervening
if you are not driving faster than 11 mph
(18 km/h). RYou are driving faster than 28 mph (45 km/h).
RThe DSR symbol is displayed in the on-board
DSR status indicator in the on-board com- computer. Also, the --- message is displayed
puter for 5 seconds.
Vehicles with steering wheel buttons DSR is activated but is not intervening
LOW RANGE is engaged RThe DSR symbol is displayed in the on-board
RThe DSR message is displayed in the status computer. Also, the --- message is perma-
area of the on-board computer. nently displayed.
RDSR can be activated. There is a malfunction in the Electronic Brak-
ing System (EBS). Visit a qualified specialist
DSR is activated workshop.
RThe DSR message and the set speed are dis-
played in the status area of the on-board com- Setting the speed whilst driving downhill
puter. You can set the speed to between 2.5 mph
(4 km/h) and 11 mph (18 km/h) using the brake
Z
150 Driving systems
and accelerator pedals or the cruise control tones. The warning ranges in front of and behind
lever. the vehicle are indicated by different warning
X Brake or accelerate the vehicle to the tones.
required speed on the downhill gradient. PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when
X Release the brake or accelerator pedal. The you:
current speed is stored. Rturn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock
Driving and parking
or Rrelease the parking brake and

X Briefly push the cruise control lever up : to Rmove the selector lever to D, N or R.
increase the speed or down = to reduce the PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above
speed. 11 mph (18 km/h). PARKTRONIC is reactivated
The last speed stored is increased or reduced at speeds below 10 mph (16 km/h).
incrementally.
X Release the cruise control lever. The current
speed is stored.
or PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It cannot replace
X Press and hold the cruise control lever up : your own awareness of the immediate surround-
or down = until the desired speed has been ings. You are responsible for safe maneuvering,
reached. parking and pulling away. When maneuvering,
X Release the cruise control lever. parking and pulling away, make sure that there
The current speed is stored. are no persons, animals or objects in the maneu-
vering area.
i It may take a moment before the vehicle ! Pay particular attention to obstacles above
brakes to the set speed. Take this delay into or below the sensors when parking, such as
account when setting the speed with the flower pots or trailer towbars. PARKTRONIC
cruise control lever. does not recognize such objects when they
Deactivating DSR are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle.
You could damage the vehicle or objects.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever
PARKTRONIC can suffer interference from:
forward ?.
or Rultrasonic sources such as a truck's
compressed-air brakes, an automatic car
X Accelerate and drive faster than 28 mph
wash or a pneumatic drill
(45 km/h).
Rattachments to the vehicle, e.g. rear moun-
DSR deactivates automatically if: ted racks
Ryou are driving faster than 28 mph (45 km/h). Rnumber plates (vehicle license plates) that
Ryou disengage the LOW RANGE transmission are not affixed flat against the bumper
ratio. Rdirty or icy sensors
Rthere is a malfunction in the ESP® or ABS sys- Remove a detachable trailer coupling if it is no
tem. longer required. PARKTRONIC measures the
minimum detection range to an obstacle from
the bumper, not the ball coupling.
PARKTRONIC
Range of the sensors
General notes
PARKTRONIC does not account for obstacles
PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid. The that are:
system is equipped with ultrasonic sensors in
Rbeneath its detection range, e.g. persons, ani-
the front and rear bumpers to monitor the area
around your vehicle. PARKTRONIC indicates vis- mals or objects
ually and audibly the distance between your Rabove its detection range, e.g. overhanging
vehicle and an object. loads, overhangs or truck loading ramps
Your vehicle features two separate sound emit-
ters with different frequencies for the warning
Driving systems 151
warning tone. If the distance between the vehi-

cle and the obstacle falls below the minimum
range, it is possible that the distance may no
longer be displayed.
Warning displays
Driving and parking

Warning display, front area
The sensors must be free of dirt, ice or slush.

Otherwise, they cannot function correctly.
Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them (Y page 237).
Front sensors
Center Approx. 39 in
(100 cm)
Warning display for the left-hand rear area in the
Corners Approx. 26 in (65 cm) left-hand exterior mirror
: Warning segments for the left front area
; Warning segments for the right front area
Rear sensors
= Operational readiness symbol for the front
Center Approx. 71 in area
(180 cm) ? Warning display segments
A Operational readiness symbol for the rear
Corners Approx. 39 in
(100 cm) area
The warning displays show the distance
between the sensor and the obstacle.
Minimum distance The warning display is divided into five yellow
Center Approx. 12 in (30 cm) and two red segments for each side of the vehi-
cle. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow indi-
Front corner sensors Approx. 10 in (25 cm) cator segments = and A are lit.
There is a malfunction if only the red segments
Rear corner sensors Approx. 12 in (30 cm) of the warning display light up .
The position of the gear lever determines
If an obstacle is within this range, all segments whether the front and/or rear area is monitored.
of the warning displays light up and you hear a
Z
152 Driving systems
Selector lever posi- Monitoring X Press the f button.

tion If PARKTRONIC is deactivated, the indicator
lamp in the switch lights up.
D Front area
R or N Front and rear area Towing a trailer
Driving and parking
P No areas activated PARKTRONIC detects a coupled trailer if your

vehicle is equipped with the corresponding elec-
trical installations for trailer towing.
One or more segments light up as the vehicle PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area
approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehi- when you establish an electrical connection
cle's distance from the obstacle. between your vehicle and a trailer. If you use an
From the: adapter for the socket, remove it from the
Rsixth segment, an intermittent warning tone socket after detaching the trailer. Otherwise,
sounds for approximately 2 seconds. PARKTRONIC remains deactivated for the rear
area.
Rseventh segment, a continuous warning tone
sounds. This indicates that you have now Remove a detachable trailer coupling if it is no
reached the minimum distance. longer required. PARKTRONIC measures the
minimum detection range to an obstacle from
the bumper, not the ball coupling.
Roll-back warning
PARKTRONIC automatically monitors the area
behind the vehicle if the vehicle begins to roll
backwards without reverse gear engaged, e.g.
after stopping on an uphill gradient.
If PARKTRONIC recognizes an obstacle at a dis-
tance of at most 31 in (80 cm), all the segments
in the warning displays light up. A continuous
warning tone also sounds as the vehicle
approaches the obstacle and for a further
2 seconds after the vehicle has come to a halt.
Activating/deactivating PARKTRONIC
Working mode 153
Problems with PARKTRONIC

Only the red segments in PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched itself off.
the PARKTRONIC warn- X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified spe-
Driving and parking

ing displays are lit. cialist workshop.
In addition, a warning
tone sounds for approx.
two seconds
PARKTRONIC is deacti-
vated after approx-
imately 20 seconds.
The indicator lamp of the
f button lights up
and the red segments in
the PARKTRONIC warn-
ing display go out.
The PARKTRONIC warn- The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or iced up.
ing displays implausible X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 237).
distances.
For example, all the seg-
ments may be lit even The license plate or other parts attached near the sensors may not be
though there is no obsta- secured correctly.
cle present.
X Check the license plate and attachment parts near the sensors for
correct seating.
An external radio or ultrasonic source may be causing interference.
X Check PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.
Rear view camera Working mode

Important safety notes ADR (working speed governor)
The rear view camera is only an aid. It cannot General notes
replace your own awareness of the immediate
surroundings. You are responsible for safe When activated, ADR automatically increases
maneuvering, parking and pulling away. When the engine speed to a preset speed or a speed
maneuvering, parking and pulling away, make you have set.
sure that there are no persons, animals or
objects in the maneuvering area.
i After a cold start, the idling speed of the
engine is increased automatically. If the pre-
The rear view camera is a visual parking aid. set working speed is lower than the increased
Information on operation can be found in the idling speed, the working speed is only
separate Audio 15 supplement. reached once the engine has completed the
The camera is in the middle of the roof above the warm-up phase.
high-mounted brake lamp (Y page 237). It is only possible to activate ADR with the
You can find information on cleaning the camera vehicle stationary and the parking brake
in the "Maintenance and care" section applied.
(Y page 237). The selector lever of the automatic transmis-
sion must be in position P.
Z
154 Towing a trailer
Switching ADR on and off Towing a trailer

Notes on trailer towing
Driving and parking
G WARNING
Installing an unsuitable ball coupling may
result in overloading of the trailer tow hitch
and the rear axle. This applies especially if the
ball coupling in question is longer or angled
differently. This could seriously impair the
driving characteristics and the trailer can
X To activate: press upper section : of the come loose. There is a risk of an accident.
E switch while the engine is running. You should only ever install a ball coupling
The indicator lamp in the switch comes on. that has the permissible dimensions and that
The K indicator lamp in the instrument is designed to meet your trailer-towing
cluster lights up or the display shows the fol-
lowing message: Operating speed gover‐ requirements. Do not modify the ball coupling
nor active. or the trailer tow hitch.
X To deactivate: press lower section ; of the
E switch while the engine is running. G WARNING
The indicator lamp in the switch goes out. If the ball coupling is not correctly installed
ADR is automatically deactivated if: and secured, it could come loose while driving
Ryou release the parking brake. and endanger other road users. There is a risk
Rthe brake pedal is depressed. of an accident and injury.
Rthe vehicle moves. Install and secure the ball coupling as descri-
Rthe control unit detects a malfunction. bed in the ball coupling manufacturer's instal-
lation instructions. Make sure that the ball
Setting the working speed coupling is correctly installed and secured
before every journey.
G WARNING
When the vehicle/trailer combination begins
to lurch, you could lose control of it. The vehi-
cle/trailer combination could even rollover.
On no account should you attempt to
straighten up the vehicle/trailer combination
by increasing the speed. Reduce vehicle
speed and do not countersteer. Apply the
X Activate ADR. brake as necessary.
X To increase: press the E button.
Always observe the operating instructions pro-
X To decrease: press the F button. vided by the manufacturers of the trailer cou-
pling and the ball coupling.
Couple and decouple the trailer carefully. When
backing up the towing vehicle, make sure
Towing a trailer 155
nobody is standing between the vehicle and the General notes

trailer.
RObserve the legally prescribed maximum
A trailer which is incorrectly coupled to the tow-
ing vehicle could break away. A correctly cou- speed for vehicle/trailer combinations in the
pled trailer must be positioned horizontally relevant country, state or Canadian province.
behind the towing vehicle. Before setting off, check the vehicle docu-
Driving and parking

ments of the your trailer to find out the per-
Ensure that the following weights are not excee- missible maximum speed.
ded:
This reduces the risk of accidents.
Rthe permissible noseweight RInstall only an approved trailer coupling on
Rthe permissible trailer load your vehicle. Only use a ball coupling that is
Rthe permissible rear axle load of the towing approved for your vehicle and Sprinter trailer
vehicle tow hitch. More information on the availabil-
Rthe maximum permissible gross vehicle ity, mounting and installation of the trailer
weight of both the towing vehicle and the electrics is available at any qualified specialist
trailer workshop.
Rthe permissible gross combination weight rat- RThe trailer coupling is one of the most impor-
ing tant vehicle parts with regard to road safety.
The notes on operation, care and mainte-
The applicable permissible values that may not
nance issued by the manufacturer should be
be exceeded can be found:
observed.
Rin your vehicle documents RThe bumpers of your vehicle are not suitable
Ron the type plates for the trailer tow hitch for installing detachable trailer couplings.
Ron the type plates for the trailer RDo not attach rented trailer tow hitches or
Ron the vehicle identification plate other detachable trailer tow hitches to the
(Y page 276) bumper.
Where the values differ, the lowest is valid. RMinimize the risk of damage to the ball cou-
You will find values approved by the manufac- pling. If you do not require the ball coupling,
turer on the identification plates and those for remove it from the ball coupling recess.
the towing vehicle in the "Permissible trailer Weight information can be found in the “Per-
loads and trailer drawbar noseweights" section missible trailer and drawbar noseweights” sec-
(Y page 158). tion (Y page 158).
Your vehicle behaves differently with a trailer i The height of the ball neck changes accord-
than without one. ing to the load on the vehicle. If this is case,
The vehicle/trailer combination: use a trailer with a height-adjustable trailer
Ris heavier drawbar.
Ris restricted in its acceleration and gradient-
climbing capability Driving tips
Rhas an increased braking distance The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/
Ris more susceptible to strong crosswinds trailer combination depends on the type of
Rrequires more sensitive steering trailer. Before setting off, check the vehicle
Rhas a larger turning circle documents of the your trailer to find out the
permissible maximum speed. Observe the
This may impair the handling characteristics. legally prescribed maximum speed for vehicle/
When towing a trailer, always adjust your speed trailer combinations in the relevant country,
to suit the road and weather conditions. Drive state or Canadian province.
carefully. Maintain a safe distance. When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling
If you require any further explanation of the characteristics will be different in comparison to
information contained in the Operator's Manual, when driving without a trailer and it will con-
please contact an authorized Sprinter dealer. sume more fuel.
On long, steep downhill slopes you must select
shift range 3, 2 or 1 in good time.
Z
i This also applies if cruise control is activa- X Close all doors.

ted. X Position the trailer horizontally behind your
This enables you to utilize the engine's braking vehicle.
effect and you do not need to brake so heavily to i The height of the ball neck changes accord-
keep the correct speed. This relieves the load on ing to the load on the vehicle. In this case, use
the brake system and prevents the brakes from a trailer with a height-adjustable trailer draw-
Driving and parking
overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need bar.

to brake additionally, to not depress the brake X Couple the trailer.
pedal constantly, but periodically.
X Establish all electrical and other connections
to the trailer. When doing so, hook the break-
Driving tips away cable of the trailer into eyelet : on the
If the trailer begins to swing from side to side: ball coupling.
X Remove the objects that are preventing the
X Do not accelerate.
trailer from rolling, e.g. wheel chocks.
X Do not counter-steer.
X Release the trailer parking brake.
X Brake if necessary.
i You can reduce the risk of the trailer swing- i The subharness of the vehicle has a cable
ing and rocking by retrofitting anti-roll bars or connection to the brake lamp indicator lamp.
trailer stability programs. More information is Observe the maximum permissible trailer
available from your authorized Sprinter dimensions (width and length).
Dealer. Most federal states and all Canadian provinces
RMaintain a greater distance than you would require by law:
when driving without towing a trailer.
Rsafety chains between the towing vehicle and
RAvoid sudden braking. Apply the brakes gen-
the trailer. The chains should be cross-wound
tly at first to allow the trailer brake to overrun. under the trailer drawbar. They must be fas-
Then, increase the brake force quickly. tened to the vehicle's trailer coupling, not to
RThe figures for the gradient climbing capabil- the bumper or the axle.
ities from a standstill refer to sea level. When Leave enough slack in the chains. This allows
driving in mountainous areas, note that the you to drive round tight corners.
power output of the engine, and with it its
Ra separate brake system for certain types of
gradient climbing capability, decrease with
increasing altitude. trailer.
Ra safety shut-off for braked trailers. Find out
the specific requirements according to the
applicable laws.
Coupling up a trailer
If the trailer becomes detached from the tow-
ing vehicle, the safety feature triggers the
trailer brakes.
Towing a trailer
There are numerous legal requirements con-
cerning the towing of a trailer, e.g. speed restric-
tions.
Many states require a separate functional brak-
ing system for your trailer once a certain weight
limit is exceeded. For your safety, it is recom-
Trailer coupled ready for use mended to use a separate functional braking
system on any towed vehicle.
X Make sure the selector lever of the automatic
Make sure your vehicle/trailer combination
transmission is in position P.
complies with local laws. This not only means
X Apply the vehicle's parking brake. where you live, but also anywhere you are driv-
ing to. Information is available from the police restrict the shift range. Select shift range 4, 3,
and local authorities. 2 or 1.
Observe the following when towing a trailer: Driving in a low gear and at a low speed
RPractice driving around bends, stopping and reduces the risk of damaging the engine.
backing up at a place where there is no traffic. RWhen driving on a downhill gradient, shift to a
This enables you to gain experience and get low gear and take advantage of the engine's
Driving and parking

used to the new handling characteristics. braking effect.
RBefore driving, check: Avoid continuous brake application as this
- that the trailer tow hitch and ball coupling may overheat the vehicle brakes and, if instal-
are secure led, the trailer brakes.
- that the safety switch for a braked trailer is RIf the coolant temperature increases dramat-
functioning properly ically while the air-conditioning system is
- that the safety chains are secure and not
switched on, switch off the air-conditioning
system.
damaged
- that the electrical connections are secure
Coolant heat can also be dissipated by
switching the airflow and the temperature of
- that the lights are working the heater/air conditioning to the maximum
- that the wheels are in good order and the level. Open the windows if necessary.
tire pressure is correct RWhen overtaking, pay particular attention to
RAdjust the exterior mirrors to provide an the extended length of your vehicle/trailer
unobstructed view of the rear section of the combination.
trailer. Due to the length of your vehicle/trailer com-
RIf the trailer is equipped with an individual bination you need an additional distance
braking system, check before each journey before you can return to your original lane.
whether the brakes are functioning correctly.
RIf the trailer has electronically controlled
brakes, pull the vehicle/trailer combination Uncoupling a trailer
away carefully. Brake manually using the
brake controller and check that the brakes G WARNING
are working.
If you uncouple a trailer with the overrun
RSecure the load on the trailer according to the
brake engaged, you could trap your hand
applicable specifications and current stand-
ards on securing loads (Y page 215). between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar.
RWhen driving with a trailer, check at regular
intervals that the load is secured and that the Do not uncouple a trailer if the overrun brake
brakes and lights are working. is engaged.
RBear in mind that the handling will be less
stable when towing a trailer than when driving ! Do not disconnect a trailer with an engaged
without one. Avoid sudden steering move- overrun brake. Otherwise, your vehicle could
ments. be damaged by the rebounding of the overrun
RThe vehicle/trailer combination is heavier, brake.
accelerates more slowly and has a decreased X Make sure the selector lever of the automatic
gradient climbing capability and a longer transmission is in position P.
braking distance. X Apply the parking brake of the vehicle.
It is more susceptible to crosswinds and X Close all doors.
requires cautious steering.
X Apply the parking brake of the trailer.
RIf possible, do not brake suddenly, but rather
moderately at first so that the trailer can acti- X In addition, secure the trailer against rolling
vate its brakes. Then increase the force on the away with a wheel chock or similar object.
brake pedal. X Remove the trailer cable and safety chains
RIf the automatic transmission repeatedly and decouple the trailer.
shifts between gears when driving on inclines,
Z
Permissible trailer loads and trailer When driving with a trailer, you should not
drawbar noseweights exceed the maximum permitted gross combi-
nation weight rating (GCWR).
Weight information The permissible values, which must not be
exceeded, can be found in your vehicle docu-
! On vehicles with a permissible gross vehicle ments and on the trailer tow hitch type plates for
Driving and parking
weight of 11030 lbs (5003 kg), the permissi- the trailer and the vehicle (Y page 276). The
ble gross combination weight is less than the basic values approved by the manufacturer can
total of the permissible gross vehicle weight also be found in the "Technical data" section
and the permissible trailer load. Exceeding (Y page 288). If the values vary, the lowest
the permissible gross combination weight can value always applies.
lead to damage to the drivetrain, to the trans-
mission or to the trailer tow hitch. Loading a trailer
If the vehicle or the trailer is fully laden, the
relevant value for the permissible gross vehi- ! Utilize the maximum permissible nose-
cle weight or the permissible trailer load is weight as fully as possible. Do not allow the
therefore lower. In this case, the trailer or the weight to fall below the minimum permissible
vehicle may only be partially loaded. noseweight, otherwise the trailer may come
The gross trailer weight (GTW) is calculated by loose.
adding the weight of the trailer to the weight of RThe load must be distributed over the vehicle
the load and equipment. If the trailer is equipped and the trailer so as not to exceed either the
with a separate functional braking system, then maximum permissible values for the gross
the maximum gross trailer weight is 5000 lbs vehicle weight rating (GVWR) and gross trailer
(2268 kg) or 7500 lbs (3402 kg). weight (GTW), the gross combination weight
rating (GCWR), nor the maximum permissible
G WARNING gross axle weight rating (GAWR) and trailer
If you tow a trailer without a separate func- drawbar noseweight rating of your vehicle.
tional braking system and a gross trailer RAdd the drawbar noseweight on the ball cou-
weight (GTW) of more than 1635 lbs (750 kg), pling (TWR) to the rear axle load. This will pre-
then the vehicle brake system may overheat. vent you from exceeding the permissible
gross axle weight (GAWR).
This increases the braking distance and the
RAdd the drawbar noseweight on the ball cou-
brake system may even fail. There is an
pling (TWR) to the vehicle payload. This will
increased risk of accident and injury, possibly ensure that you do not exceed the permissi-
even fatal. ble gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR).
Always use a trailer with a separate functional
braking system when towing a trailer with a Checking the vehicle and trailer weight
gross trailer weight (GTW) of more than
RMake sure the weights of the towing vehicle
1635 lbs (750 kg). and the trailer comply with the maximum per-
missible values. Have the vehicle/trailer com-
The maximum permissible trailer drawbar nose- bination weighed on a calibrated weigh-
weight on the ball coupling is 500 lbs (227 kg) or bridge. The vehicle/trailer combination con-
750 lbs (340 kg). The actual noseweight may not sists of the towing vehicle including the driver,
exceed the value given on the identification passengers and load, as well as the loaded
plates of the trailer tow hitch or the trailer. If the trailer.
values vary, the lowest value always applies.
RCheck the maximum permissible gross axle
The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is weight rating of the front and rear axles
calculated by adding the gross weight of the (GAWR), the gross trailer weight (GTW), the
trailer to the gross vehicle weight including a gross combination weight rating (GCWR) and
driver's weight of approximately 150 lbs (68 kg). the noseweight of the trailer drawbar (TWR).
The maximum permissible gross combination
weight is vehicle-specific and equipment-
dependent.
Trailer power supply

! Incorrect wiring of the connector plug could,
under certain circumstances, cause malfunc-
tions in the vehicle's other electronic sys-
tems. We therefore recommend having the
Driving and parking

connector plug wired at a qualified specialist
workshop.
! You can connect accessories with a maxi-
mum power consumption of 240 W to the
permanent power supply.
You must not charge a trailer battery using the
power supply.
Your vehicle may be equipped with various elec-
trical installations for trailer towing. Depending
on your trailer, you may need an adapter to con-
nect the electrical system of the trailer with that
of the vehicle.
The trailer socket of your vehicle is equipped at
the factory with a permanent power supply.
The permanent power supply is on the trailer
socket pin assignment 4.
Note that the permanent power supply of the
trailer is not switched off when the on-board
voltage is low. This can completely discharge
the starter battery of your vehicle.
Further information on the electrical equipment
currently installed on your vehicle and on instal-
ling trailer electrics can be obtained at any quali-
Z
Useful information You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
On-board computer and displays
operating the on-board computer.

well as standard and optional equipment of your The on-board computer display only shows mes-
vehicle that were available at the time of going sages and warnings from certain systems. You
to print. Country-specific variations are possi- should therefore make sure your vehicle is oper-
ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped ating safely at all times. If the operating safety of
with all of the described functions. This also your vehicle is impaired, stop the vehicle as
applies to systems and functions relevant to soon as possible, paying attention to road and
safety. traffic conditions. Then consult a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Instrument cluster
Important safety notes Overview
G WARNING
If you are driving and reach through the steer-
ing wheel to operate the adjustment knob,
you could lose control of the vehicle. There is
a risk of an accident and injury.
Only operate the adjustment knobs when the
vehicle is stationary. Do not reach through the
steering wheel when driving.
G WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic : Instrument cluster on vehicles without
steering wheel buttons
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
; Instrument cluster in vehicles with steering-
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention wheel buttons
to traffic conditions and operate the equip- = Adjustment buttons f and g
ment when the vehicle is stationary. ? Reset button 9
A Service button Ë (engine oil level check)
G WARNING B Menu button 4
If the instrument cluster has failed or mal- You will find a full overview of the instrument
functioned, you may not recognize function cluster in the "At a glance" section (Y page 34).
restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The The display in the instrument cluster is activated
operating safety of your vehicle may be when you:
impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Ropen the driver's door
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked Rturn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock
at a qualified specialist workshop immedi- Rpress the 9 reset button
ately. Rswitch on the lights
Instrument cluster 161
The display switches off automatically after for vehicles without steering wheel buttons
approximately 30 seconds if: under (Y page 162) and for vehicles with steer-

Rthe key is in position 0 in the ignition lock. ing wheel buttons under (Y page 166).
Rthe vehicle lighting is not switched on. i In some countries, a warning sounds when
the vehicle reaches the maximum speed limit,
e.g. at 75 mph (120 km/h).
Instrument lighting
When the lights are switched on, you can adjust Trip odometer
the brightness of the instrument cluster lighting
using the f and g buttons. X To reset: make sure that the display is show-
X To brighten: press the f button. ing the trip odometer if you have a vehicle with
steering wheel buttons (Y page 166).
X To dim: press the g button.
X Press and hold the 9 reset button until the
i Vehicles with automatic headlamp mode: trip odometer is reset to 0.0.
the instrument lighting also adapts to auto-
matic headlamp mode.
Fuel gauge
Tachometer
! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this
could damage the engine.
Avoid driving at high engine speeds. This
unnecessarily increases the fuel consumption
of your vehicle and harms the environment as
a result of increased emissions.
The red band in the tachometer indicates the

engine's overrevving range. : Fuel gauge on vehicles without steering
wheel buttons
To protect the engine, the fuel supply is inter-
; Fuel gauge on vehicles with steering wheel
rupted when the red band is reached.
buttons
= Fuel filler flap location indicator t: the
fuel filler flap is on the left-hand side. Fuel
Outside temperature filler flap location indicator u: the fuel
You should pay special attention to road condi- filler flap is on the right-hand side
tions when temperatures are around the freez- ? Reserve fuel warning lamp (Y page 201)
ing point.
On vehicles without steering wheel buttons
(Y page 162) and on vehicles with steering DEF gauge
wheel buttons (Y page 166), the outside tem-
perature display is in the display. Vehicles without steering wheel but-
Changes in the outside temperature are dis- tons
played after a short delay.
If the DEF supply is less than 1.5 US gal (5.5 l),
the dEF Chk message appears in the display.
In addition, the yellow å DEF indicator lamp
Speedometer lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning
The speed can also be shown in the display. You tone sounds.
can find information on the digital speedometer
Z
162 On-board computer (vehicles without steering wheel buttons)
If the supply of DEF falls below the reserve range On-board computer (vehicles without
of 0.8 US gal (3.0 l) the StArtS RExx message
steering wheel buttons)

appears in the display. Also, the yellow å
DEF indicator lamp lights up in the instrument Operating the on-board computer
cluster and three warning tones sound.
In the display, xx corresponds to the number of General notes
possible remaining engine starts (16 to 0 ).
The on-board computer is activated as soon as
When the display shows that the number of
you turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock.
remaining starts is 0, the StArtS IdLE message
appears in the display and three warning tones The on-board computer shows vehicle informa-
sound. tion and settings in the display.
In addition, the yellow å DEF indicator lamp You can control the display and the settings in
and the ; Check Engine indicator lamp light the on-board computer using the adjustment
up in the instrument cluster and three warning buttons on the instrument cluster.
tones sound.
The engine management only allows speeds of Standard display
up to 5 mph (8 km/h).
Add at least 1.5 US gal (5.5 l) of DEF
(Y page 128).
The display message only disappears when the
vehicle is stationary, at the latest after
20 seconds, as soon as you switch on the igni-
tion or start the engine after refueling.
Vehicles with steering wheel buttons : Odometer

; Trip odometer
If the supply of DEF is less than 1.5 US gal = Clock
(5.5 l), the Check Diesel Exhaust Fluid ? Outside temperature or digital speedometer
See Operator's Manual message appears in
the display. A Fuel gauge (Y page 161)
If the supply of DEF falls below the reserve range B Selector lever position or current shift range
of 0.8 US gal (3.0 l), the XX starts remaining with automatic transmission (Y page 123)
message is displayed. X To call up the standard display: turn the key
Three short warning tones also sound. to position 2 in the ignition lock.
In the display, xx corresponds to the number of X Press the 4 menu button for longer than
possible remaining engine starts (16 to 0 ). 1 second.
When the display shows that the number of The information shown in the display changes
remaining starts is 0, the StArtS IdLE message from the outside temperature to the digital
appears in the display. speedometer.
The yellow ; Check Engine indicator lamp
also lights up and three short warning tones
sound. Menus in the on-board computer
The engine management only allows speeds of
up to 5 mph (8 km/h). Overview
Add at least 1.5 US gal (5.5 l) of DEF If you wish to exit a menu and go to the standard
(Y page 128). display:
The display message only disappears when the X Press the 4 menu button for longer than one
vehicle is stationary, at the latest after second.
20 seconds, as soon as you switch on the igni-
tion or start the engine after refueling. or
X Do not press any buttons for ten seconds.
The display accepts the changed settings.
On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons) 163
Using the f, g, 4 or 9 buttons you can X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.
select the following functions:

X Press the 4 menu button repeatedly until the
RCalling up the service due date L indicator lamp flashes and the on or OFF
(Y page 227) message appears in the display.
RChecking the oil level (Y page 221) X Press the f or g button to activate or deac-
RChecking the DEF level (Y page 161) tivate the daytime running lamps.
RPreselecting/setting the auxiliary heating i USA only:
switch-on time (Y page 109)
If you turn the light switch to T or L,
RTire pressure monitor(Y page 254) the corresponding light switches on. If you
RSetting the time (Y page 163) turn the light switch to Ã, the daytime
RActivating/deactivating Highbeam Assist running lamps remain switched on.
(Y page 170) Canada only:
RSetting the daytime running lamps If you turn the light switch to L, the low-
(Y page 82) beam headlamps switch on. If you turn the
light switch to T or Ã, the daytime run-
Setting the time ning lamps remain switched on.

X Press the 4 menu button repeatedly until the On-board computer (vehicles with
hours figure flashes. steering wheel buttons)
X Press the f or g button to set the hour.
X Press the 9 reset button. Operating the on-board computer
The minute display flashes.
X Press the f or g button to set the minute.
Overview
i If you keep the f or g button pressed, the

value will change continuously.
Activating/deactivating Highbeam
Assist
X Press the 4 menu button repeatedly until the
_ indicator lamp flashes and the on or OFF
message appears in the display.
X Use the f or g button to switch Highbeam
Assist on/off.
Switching the daytime running lamps

on/off
If you switch the daytime running lamps on, the
daytime running lamps will automatically light X To activate the on-board computer: turn
up when the engine is running. the key to position 1 in the ignition lock.
For safety reasons, it is only possible to change The on-board computer shows vehicle informa-
this setting when the vehicle is stationary. The tion and settings in the display.
factory setting is on in countries in which day- You can control the display and the settings in
time running lamp mode or daytime running the on-board computer with the buttons on the
lamps are mandatory. steering wheel.
Z
164 On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons)
: Display Several functions are combined thematically in

the menus.
On-board computer operation The display changes when you press one of the
buttons on the steering wheel. You can use a
; W and X function to call up information or to change the
RSelects submenus settings for the vehicle.
RChanges values For example, the AUDIO menu has functions for
RAdjusts the volume operating the radio.
Using the telephone Unlike in other menus, you will find submenus in
the Settings menu. For information on how to
6 Accepts a call use these submenus, see the "Settings menu"
~ Ends a call section (Y page 167).
The number of menus depends on your vehicle's
= Scrolls from one menu to another
equipment.
V Forwards
U Back
i Operation of the audio equipment using the
steering wheel buttons and making settings
Scrolls within a menu using the AUDIO menu only function with
9 Forwards Sprinter audio equipment. If you are using
audio equipment from another manufacturer,
: Back
the described functions may be restricted or
not available at all.
Controls
You can think of the order of the menus and of
the functions within a menu as a circle:
X Press the V or U button repeatedly.
The menus are displayed one after the other.
X Press the : or 9 button repeatedly.
The functions in the menu or submenu are
displayed successively.
Menu overview

Diagrams
This is what the displays look like when you scroll through the menus.
Generic terms i The generic terms in the tabular overview

should make orientation easier for you. How-
The illustration shows the menus on a vehicle ever, they are not always shown on the dis-
with Audio 15. play.
On Sound 5/Audio 20, the on-board computer
always shows the AUDIO and TEL (telephone)
menus in English. This is the case even if a dif- Operation menu
ferent language is selected for the display.
Operation Overview
: Operation menu (Y page 165) You can select the following functions in the
RStandard
Operation menu by pressing the 9 or :
display
button on the steering wheel:
RCalling up the service due date
RDisplaying the trip odometer and odometer
(Y page 227)
(standard display) (Y page 166)
RTire pressure monitor (Y page 254)
RDisplaying the coolant temperature
RChecking the engine oil level
(Y page 166)
(Y page 221)
RCalling up the service due date
; Audio menu (Y page 166) (Y page 227)
RTire pressure monitor (Y page 254)
= Message memory menu (Y page 175)
RChecking the oil level (Y page 221)
? Settings menu (Y page 167)
A Trip computer menu (Y page 173)
B Telephone menu (Y page 173)
Z
Standard display Audio menu

General notes
Use the functions in the Audio menu to operate
the audio equipment when switched on.
i Controlling the audio equipment using the
steering wheel buttons and making settings
via the AUDIO menu only functions with
Sprinter audio equipment. If you are using
audio equipment from another manufacturer,
the described functions may be restricted or
not available at all.
: Odometer If no audio equipment is switched on, you will
; Trip odometer see the message AUDIO off.
= Outside temperature or digital speedometer
? Clock Selecting a radio station
A Selector lever position or current shift range
(Y page 123)
In the basic setting, the odometer and the trip
odometer are shown in the upper part of the
display. This is referred to as the standard dis-
play.
Using the steering wheel buttons
X Press the V or U button repeatedly : Reception frequency
until the standard display is shown. ; Waveband or waveband with memory preset
number
Displaying the coolant temperature Using the steering wheel buttons
X Switch on the audio equipment (see the sep-
arate operating instructions).
X Press the V or U button repeatedly
until the station selected appears in the dis-
play.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
desired station.
Using the steering wheel buttons i You can only store new stations on the audio
X Press the V or U button repeatedly system itself. See the separate operating
until the standard display is shown. instructions.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the You can also operate the audio equipment in
coolant temperature. the same way as usual.
The temperature displayed may climb to 250 ‡
(120 †) when the vehicle is being driven in nor-
mal conditions and if the coolant contains the
correct concentration of corrosion inhibitor and
antifreeze. At high outside temperatures and
when driving in mountainous terrain, the coolant
temperature may rise to the end of the scale.
Settings menu Using the steering wheel buttons

Introduction until the Settings menu appears in the dis-
In the Settings menu, the following options and play.
submenus are available: X Press and hold the 9 reset button for approx-
imately 3 seconds.
RResetting all settings You will see a message in the display prompt-
RResetting the functions of a submenu ing you to press the 9 reset button again to
RInstrument cluster (Y page 168) confirm.
- Units and language settings X Press the 9 reset button again.
- Status bar settings The functions in all submenus are reset to the
factory settings.
RTime(Y page 169)
RLighting (Y page 170) i If you want to retain the settings, do not
- Switching surround lighting on/off press the 9 reset button a second time. The
- Switching the daytime running lamps Settings menu appears again after approx-
on/off imately 5 seconds.
- Setting the delayed switch-off time for the
exterior lighting Resetting the functions of a submenu
- Activating/deactivating Highbeam Assist You can individually reset the functions of each
RVehicle submenu to the factory settings.
- Setting the radio station selection Using the steering wheel buttons
- Setting the windshield wiper sensitivity
RStationary heating or auxiliary heating until the Settings menu appears in the dis-
(Y page 109) play.
RConvenience (Y page 172) X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub-
- Key-dependent settings menu selection.
X Press the W or X button to select a
i For safety reasons, it is not possible to reset
all of the functions while the vehicle is in submenu.
motion. For example, in the Lighting sub- X Press and hold the 9 reset button for approx-
menu, the Daytime runn. lamps function imately 3 seconds.
remains unchanged. You will see a message in the display prompt-
ing you to press the 9 reset button again to
confirm.
Resetting all settings
X Press the 9 reset button again.
All functions in the submenu are reset to the
factory settings.
i If you want to retain the settings, do not
press the 9 reset button a second time. The
Settings menu appears again after approx-
imately 5 seconds.
Settings menu
When the Settings message is displayed, you
can reset all functions of the submenu to the
factory settings.
Z
Selecting submenus X Press the 9 button to select the Tem‐

perat. function.
The selection marker is on the current setting.

X Press the W or X button to select the
unit for all messages in the display: °C
(degrees Celsius) or °F (degrees Fahrenheit).
Selecting the unit for the digital speed-

ometer
You will see the collection of submenus. There
are more submenus than can be displayed at the
same time.
until the Settings menu appears in the dis-
play.
X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub- Using the steering wheel buttons
menu selection.
X Press the W or X button to select a
submenu. play.
The submenu currently selected is highligh-
X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub-
ted.
menu selection.
X Press the 9 button to select the function
within a submenu.
Inst. cluster submenu.
X Change the setting by pressing the W or
X Press the 9 button to select the Dig.
X button.
The changed setting is saved. speedo. function.
Instrument cluster submenu unit for the digital speedometer: km/h or
mph .
Selecting the unit for temperature
Selecting the unit for distance

X Press the V or U button repeatedly Using the steering wheel buttons
until the Settings menu appears in the dis- X Press the V or U button repeatedly
play. until the Settings menu appears in the dis-
X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub- play.
menu selection. X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub-
X Press the W or X button to select the menu selection.
Inst. cluster submenu. X Press the W or X button to select the
Inst. cluster submenu.
X Press the 9 button to select the Trip X Press the 9 button to select the Select
function. disp. function.

The selection marker is on the current setting. The selection marker is on the current setting.
X Press the W or X button to select the X Press the W or X button to select
unit for all messages in the display: km (kilo- whether to display the outside temperature or
meters) or miles . the speed (digital speedometer).
The selected display is then shown perma-
Selecting the language nently in the lower part of the display.
Selecting the unit for the tire pressure
The selected range of languages shown is just

an example. The range of languages available is
specific to each country. Using the steering wheel buttons
Using the steering wheel buttons X Press the V or U button repeatedly
X Press the V or U button repeatedly until the Settings menu appears in the dis-
until the Settings menu appears in the display.
play. X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub-
X Press the 9 button to switch to the submenu selection.
menu selection. X Press the W or X button to select the
X Press the W or X button to select the Inst. cluster submenu.
Inst. cluster submenu. X Press the 9 button to select the Tire
X Press the 9 button to select the Language pres. function.
function. The selection marker is on the current setting.
The selection marker is on the current setting. X Press the W or X button to select the
X Press the W or X button to set the lan- unit for the tire pressure in the display: bar
guage for all messages. or psi.
Selecting the display for the status bar Clock/Date submenu

Setting the time

until the Settings menu appears in the dis- Using the steering wheel buttons
play. X Press the V or U button repeatedly
X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub- until the Settings menu appears in the dis-
menu selection. play.
X Press the W or X button to select the X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub-
Inst. cluster submenu. menu selection.
Z
X Press the W or X button to select the X Press the 9 button to select the High‐
Clock/Date submenu. beam Assist function.
X Press the 9 button to select Set clock The selection marker is on the current setting.
Hours or Minutes . X Press the W or X button to switch
X Press the W or X button to set the val- Highbeam Assist On or Off .
ues. i For safety reasons, it is not possible to reset
the Highbeam Assist function to the factory
Selecting the time format settings during a journey. You will see the fol-
lowing message in the display: Setting
only possible at standstill.
For further information about Highbeam Assist,
see (Y page 86).
Switching the daytime running lamps on/
off

play.
menu selection.
If you switch the daytime running lamps to On,
Clock/Date submenu. the daytime running lamps will automatically
X Press the 9 button to select the 12/24 h light up when the engine is running.
function. For safety reasons, it is only possible to change
The selection marker is on the current setting. this setting when the vehicle is stationary. The
X Press the W or X button to select the factory setting is On in countries in which day-
12 h or 24 h clock format. time running lamp mode or daytime running
lamps are mandatory.
Lighting submenu Using the steering wheel buttons
Activating/deactivating Highbeam Assist until the Settings menu appears in the dis-
play.
menu selection.
Lighting submenu.
X Press the 9 button to select the Daytime
driv. lights function.
X Press the W or X button to switch the
X Press the V or U button repeatedly daytime running lamps On or Off.
until the Settings menu appears in the dis- i If you turn the light switch to T or L,
play. the corresponding lamp switches on. If you
X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub- turn the light switch to Ã, the daytime
menu selection. running lamps remain switched on.
Lighting submenu. i For safety reasons, it is not possible to reset
the Daytime driv. lights function to the
factory setting while the vehicle is in motion.
You will see the following message in the dis- In the Headlamps submenu, you can set
play: Setting only possible at stand‐ whether and for how long you wish the exterior

still. lighting to remain on after closing the doors.
Switching surround lighting on or off Using the steering wheel buttons
play.
menu selection.
Lighting submenu.
X Press the 9 button to select the Head‐
Using the steering wheel buttons lamps function.
until the Settings menu appears in the dis- X Press the W or X button to select
play. whether and for how long you wish the exte-
rior lighting to remain on.
menu selection. If you have set the delayed switch-off and switch
X Press the W or X button to select the off the engine, the following remain lit:
Lighting submenu. Rthe parking lamps
X Press the 9 button to select the Loc. Rthe tail lamps
lighting function. Rthe license plate lamps
Rthe fog lamps
X Press the W or X button to switch the
surround lighting On or Off . i You can reactivate this function by opening
If you switch the surround lighting to On, the fol- a door within 10 minutes.
lowing lamps light up in the dark after you have If, after switching off the engine, you do not
unlocked the vehicle using the key: open a door or close an open door, the exte-
Rthe parking lamps
rior lighting switches off after 60 seconds.
Rthe tail lamps
Rthe license plate lamps
Vehicle submenu
Rthe fog lamps Setting the windshield wiper sensitivity
The surround lighting automatically switches off
after 40 seconds or if you:
Ropen the driver's door
Rinsert the key into the ignition lock
Rlock the vehicle using the key
Setting the delayed switch-off time for the

exterior lighting
You can use the Wipe sensor function to set
the sensitivity of the rain/ light sensor.
play.
menu selection.
Z
X Press the W or X button to select the Using the steering wheel buttons
Vehicle submenu.

X Press the 9 button to select the Wipe until the Settings menu appears in the dis-
sensor function. play.
The selection marker is on the current setting. X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub-
X Press the W or X button to adjust the menu selection.
sensitivity of the rain/light sensor. X Press the W or X button to select the
The levels are graded as follows: Heating submenu.
RLevel 1: high sensitivity – wiping begins even X Press the 9 button to switch to the Aux.
in light rain heat. submenu selection (Y page 109).
RLevel 2: moderate sensitivity The selection marker is on the current setting.
X Press the W or X button to set the
RLevel 3: low sensitivity – wiping only begins
in heavy rain desired switch-on time.
Use the Timer off setting to deactivate
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist automatic switch-on.
X Press button V.
The switch-on time is selected.
Convenience submenu

play.
X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub- The Key function allows you to define whether
menu selection. settings for some submenus are stored with a
X Press the W or X button to select the key dependence.
Vehicle submenu. This function pertains to the Inst. cluster
X Press the 9 button to select the Blind (instrument cluster) menu, the Lighting menu
Spot Assist function. and the Vehicle menu.
The selection marker is on the current setting. Using the steering wheel buttons
X Press the W or X button to switch Blind
Spot Assist On or Off . until the Settings menu appears in the dis-
For further information about Blind Spot Assist; play.
see (Y page 143). X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub-
menu selection.
Heating submenu X Press the W or X button to select the
Convenience submenu.
Selecting the switch-on time for the aux- X Press the 9 button to select the Key func-
iliary heating tion.
X Press the W or X button to activate or
deactivate key dependency.
Trip computer menu i If you turn the key to position 0 in the igni-

tion lock or remove it, all the values are reset
General notes after approximately four hours.
The values will not be reset if you turn the key
You can call up or reset statistical data for the
back to position 1 or 2 during this time.
vehicle in the Trip computer menu.
i When you call up the trip computer again, it Calling up the range
displays the last function called up.
The units of the statistical information dis- Using the steering wheel buttons
played are set permanently for each specific X Press the V or U button to select
country, and are therefore independent of the After start.
units selected in the Settings menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select
Range.
Trip computer "From Start" or "From The approximate distance which can be cov-
Reset" ered with the tank's current contents and
your current style of driving is shown.
i If there is only a small amount of fuel left in
the fuel tank, the 7 Please refuel mes-
sage is shown instead of the range.
Resetting the trip computer

Example: "After start" trip computer X Press the V or U button to select
: Distance After start.
; Time X Press the 9 or : button to select the
= Average speed function you would like to reset.
? Average fuel consumption X Press and hold the 9 reset button until the
Using the steering wheel buttons values are reset to "0".
X Press the V or U button to select
After start.
or Telephone menu
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Introduction
After reset.
The values in the After start submenu refer to G WARNING
the start of the journey. The values in the After If you operate information systems and com-
reset submenu refer to the last reset of the trip
computer. munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle while driving, you will be distracted from
The After start trip computer function is
automatically reset if: traffic conditions. You could also lose control
Rthe ignition has been switched off for more
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
than 4 hours. Only operate the equipment when the traffic
R999 hours have been exceeded. situation permits. If you are not sure that this
R9,999 miles have been exceeded. is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
The After reset trip computer is automatically to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or ment when the vehicle is stationary.
99,999 miles.
You must observe the legal requirements of the
operating a mobile phone in the vehicle. If it is
Z
permitted to operate a mobile phone while the phone is able to receive calls, you can search for
vehicle is in motion, only operate it when road and dial a number from the phone book.
and traffic conditions permit. Using the steering wheel buttons

If you have connected a mobile phone to the
Sprinter hands-free system, you can operate it
X Use the V or U button to select the TEL
using the functions in the TEL menu. menu.
The display shows the mobile phone opera-
X Switch on the mobile phone (see the separate tional readiness symbol.
operating instructions). X Press the 9 or : button to switch to
X Switch on the audio equipment (see the sep- the phone book.
arate operating instructions). The on-board computer reads the phone book
X Establish a Bluetooth® connection between stored on the SIM card or in the mobile phone.
the mobile phone and the audio equipment This may take more than a minute.
(see the separate operating instructions). When the message is no longer displayed,
X Press the V or U button on the steering reading has ended.
wheel to select the TEL menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the
X When Please enter PIN: appears in the desired name.
display, enter the PIN using the mobile phone or
or audio equipment. X To start rapid scrolling: press and hold the
The mobile phone will search for a network. 9 or : button longer than 1 second.
The display remains blank during this time. Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
You will see the mobile phone operational button or reach the end of the list.
readiness display once the mobile phone has
found a network. Using the steering wheel buttons
X To start dialing: press the 6 button.
i You can obtain further information about The on-board computer dials the correspond-
suitable mobile phones and connecting ing phone number.
mobile phones via Bluetooth® at any qualified When a connection is established, the name
specialist workshop. of the other person and/or the call duration
i If the mobile phone operational readiness appear in the display.
symbol goes out, your vehicle is outside of the X To exit the phone book: press the ~ but-
transmission and reception range. ton.
Accepting a call Redialing

X Press the 6 button on the steering wheel The on-board computer saves the last names or
to accept an incoming call. numbers dialed in the redial memory.
The display shows the call duration.
X Use the V or U button to select the TEL
Rejecting or ending a call menu.
X Press ~ button on the steering wheel to The display shows the mobile phone opera-
reject or end a call. tional readiness symbol.
The caller then hears the engaged tone. X Press the 6 button.
The display shows the mobile phone opera- The display shows the most recently dialed
tional readiness symbol again. numbers or names in the redial memory.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
desired name or number.
Dialing a number from the phone book
X To start dialing: press the 6 button.
You can enter new telephone numbers into the The on-board computer dials the correspond-
phone book via the mobile phone (see the sep- ing phone number.
arate operating instructions). If your mobile
Display messages 175
When a connection is established, the name play. A warning tone sounds with certain display
of the other person and/or the call duration messages. Display messages of a high priority

appear in the display. are shown in red.
or Please respond in accordance with the display
X To exit the redial memory: press the ~ messages and follow the additional notes in this
button. Operator's Manual.
You can hide low-priority display messages by
pressing the V, U, 9 or : button
on the steering wheel or the 9 reset button.
Display messages
You cannot hide display messages of the highest
Notes on display messages priority. These messages will continue to be
shown in the display until their cause has been
Important safety notes eliminated.
The on-board computer stores certain display
G WARNING messages in the message memory
If the instrument display fails or is malfunc- (Y page 175).
tioning, you may not recognize limitations in
the functions of systems relevant to safety.
The operating safety of your vehicle could be
Message memory
affected. There is a risk of an accident. The on-board computer only records and shows
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked malfunctions and warnings from certain sys-
tems. Therefore, make sure that your vehicle is
at a qualified specialist workshop immedi-
safe to use. You could otherwise cause an acci-
ately. dent by driving an unsafe vehicle.
The on-board computer stores certain display
i If you turn the key to position 2 in the igni- messages. In the Message memory menu, you
tion, a display check is performed. All warning can call up stored display messages.
and indicator lamps (except the turn signal
indicator lamps) and the display are activa- Using the steering wheel buttons
ted. Before starting the journey, check that X Press the V or U button repeatedly
the warning and indicator lamps are operating until the number of stored display messages,
correctly. e.g. 2 messages, appears in the display.
If no malfunctions have occurred, the No
Vehicles without steering wheel but- messages message appears.
tons X Scroll through the stored display messages
with the 9 or : button.
Warnings, malfunctions or additional informa- X To exit the message memory menu: press
tion may also be shown in the display. The fol- the V or U button.
lowing tables show all the display messages. A
warning tone sounds with certain display mes- When you switch off the ignition, all display mes-
sages. sages are deleted from the message memory.
You can only remove the key when it is in the
Vehicles with steering wheel buttons basic position.
The on-board computer shows warnings, mal-

functions or additional information in the dis-
Z
176 Display messages
Display messages on vehicles without steering wheel buttons

Cruise control
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
_ _ _ The activation conditions for cruise control have not been met.
V You can only activate cruise control from speeds of 20 mph
(30 km/h).
or
Cruise control has been deactivated due to a malfunction.
X Have cruise control checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire pressure monitor

NO TPMS The NO message is displayed for 30 seconds. The TPMS message is also
displayed after 30 seconds.
The tire pressure monitor has malfunctioned.
X Have the tire pressure monitor and the wheels checked at a quali-
NO TPMS The NO message is displayed for 30 seconds. The TPMS message is also
displayed after 30 seconds.
The tire pressure monitor is not receiving signals from one or more
wheels because:
Ra wheel has been replaced with the spare wheel without wheel
electronics.
Rthe maximum temperature on one of the wheel electronics units has
been exceeded.
Rthe wheel electronics are malfunctioning.
X Have wheels with suitable wheel electronics units installed at a
— — TPMS The — — message is displayed for 30 seconds. The TPMS message is

also displayed after 30 seconds.
The pressure is insufficient in one or more tires, or the pressures of the
individual tires differ significantly.
X Check the tire pressure and correct it if necessary (Y page 254).

Vehicles with passenger vehicle approval
dEF Chk In addition, the yellow å DEF indicator lamp lights up in the instru-
ment cluster and a warning tone sounds.
The DEF supply has dropped below 1.5 US gal (5.5 l).
X Add DEF supply (Y page 128).
The å DEF indicator lamp only disappears when the vehicle is
stationary, at the latest after 20 seconds as soon as you switch on
the ignition or start the engine after refueling.
In addition, the yellow ; Check Engine indicator lamp and the yel-
low å DEF indicator lamp light up in the instrument cluster and a
warning tone sounds.
The DEF reducing agent is contaminated, diluted or is not compliant
with ISO 22241.
X Have the DEF tank cleaned and refilled at a qualified specialist
workshop as soon as possible.
StArtS RExx In addition, the yellow å DEF indicator lamp lights up and a warning
tone sequence sounds.
The DEF supply has dropped below the 0.8 US gal (3.0 l) reserve mark.
After the message appears for the first time, the remaining DEF supply
will last for approximately 1200 miles (1900 km). The engine can then
only be started another 16 times.
The number of remaining engine starts XX (16 to 1) is shown in the
message every time the engine is started.
X Add at least 1.5 US gal (5.5 l) of DEF (Y page 128).
low å DEF indicator lamp light up in the instrument cluster and
three short warning tones sound.
with ISO 22241.
The exhaust gas aftertreatment is malfunctioning or an emission rel-
evant malfunction has occurred. This malfunction or defect can dam-
age the exhaust gas aftertreatment.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Z

¯ In addition, the yellow å DEF indicator lamp and the ; Check

Engine indicator lamp light up in the instrument cluster and three
StArtS IdLE warning tones sound.
If the StArtS IdLE message is displayed, you cannot drive the vehicle
at a speed of more than 5 mph (8 km/h).
You cannot drive the vehicle at a speed exceeding 5 mph (8 km/h).
Vehicles with commercial vehicle approval

dEF Chk In addition, the yellow å DEF indicator lamp lights up in the instru-
ment cluster and a warning tone sounds.
The DEF supply has dropped below 1.5 US gal (5.5 l).
X Add DEF supply (Y page 128). The
with ISO 22241.
StArtS RExx In addition, the yellow å DEF indicator lamp lights up and a warning
tone sequence sounds.
The DEF supply has dropped below the 0.8 US gal (3.0 l) reserve mark.
The number of remaining engine starts XX (16 to 1) is shown in the

low å DEF indicator lamp light up in the instrument cluster and
with ISO 22241.
¯ In addition, the yellow å DEF indicator lamp and the ; Check

Engine indicator lamp light up in the instrument cluster and three
StArtS IdLE warning tones sound.
If the StArtS IdLE message is displayed, you cannot drive the vehicle
at a speed of more than 5 mph (8 km/h).
You cannot drive the vehicle at a speed exceeding 5 mph (8 km/h).
Z
Driving systems

Err flashes for 5 seconds, in addition the Ã indicator lamp flashes in
the instrument cluster and then lights up yellow continuously.
Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
RThere are no lane markings present.
RThe camera's functionality is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or
fog.
RThe camera cannot recognize the road markings:
- It is too dark.
- The lane markings are worn or are covered, for example, by dirt or
snow.
RThe windshield is dirty in the camera's field of vision.
X Stop the vehicle paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 129).
X Clean the windshield (Y page 236), particularly in the camera's
field of vision.
If the Ã indicator lamp goes out, Lane Keeping Assist is opera-
tional again.
If the problem persists, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Err flashes for 5 seconds, the _ indicator lamp also flashes and then
goes out.
Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily not operational or
Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning.
Possible causes are:
fog.
field of vision.
If the _ indicator lamp goes out, Highbeam Assist is operational
again.
If the problem persists, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Blind_ Err flashes for 5 seconds, the yellow indicator lamps flash in the exterior
mirrors and then light up constantly.
Blind Spot Assist is faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Err flashes for 5 seconds, the Ä indicator lamp also flashes and then
lights up constantly.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning.
Display messages on vehicles with steering wheel buttons

Safety systems
ABS ABS has been deactivated due to a malfunction. ESP®, ASR and BAS,
Visit workshop as well as cruise control, have also been deactivated as a result.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
This causes steerability and braking to be greatly impaired. The brak-
ing distance can increase in emergency braking situations. The driven
wheels can spin when accelerating.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.
X Drive on with care.
ABS ABS is temporarily unavailable or is deactivated due to undervoltage.

Unavailable ESP®, ASR and BAS, as well as cruise control, are also unavailable as
a result.
The battery may not be being charged.
G WARNING
hard, for example.
This causes steerability and braking to be greatly impaired. The brak-
ing distance can increase in emergency braking situations. The driven
wheels can spin when accelerating.
X Drive for a short distance at a speed of more than 13 mph
(20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above
are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
Z

: ASR has been deactivated due to a malfunction.

The engine power output may be reduced.
Visit workshop
G WARNING
The driven wheels can spin when accelerating.
: BAS has been deactivated due to a malfunction.
Visit workshop G WARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without elec-
tronic support.
The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.
: ASR and BAS have been deactivated due to undervoltage.

Unavailable
G WARNING
hard, for example.
# The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

X Have the brake pads/linings replaced as soon as possible at a
Brake wear Visit qualified specialist workshop.
workshop

b There is insufficient brake fluid in the fluid reservoir.
Brake fluid Visit G WARNING

workshop Braking performance can be impaired.
traffic conditions.
X Check the brake fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir
(Y page 224).
If the brake fluid is below the MIN mark:
X Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Do not add brake fluid. This does not solve the problem.
If the brake fluid is above the MIN mark:

b EBD has been deactivated due to undervoltage.

Brake force distri‐
bution G WARNING
The rear wheels could lock when you apply the brakes. The braking
distance can increase in emergency braking situations.
traffic conditions.
X Do not drive on.
b EBD has been deactivated due to a malfunction.
Brake force distri‐ G WARNING

bution Visit work‐ The rear wheels could lock when you apply the brakes. The braking
shop distance can increase in emergency braking situations.
traffic conditions.
X Do not drive on.
Z

ESP ESP® has been deactivated due to a malfunction. As a result, cruise

Visit workshop control has also been deactivated.
Engine power output may be reduced.
G WARNING
ESP ESP® has been deactivated due to undervoltage. As a result, cruise

Unavailable control has also been deactivated.
G WARNING
X Consult a qualified specialized workshop as soon as possible.
c Additionally, a warning tone sounds.

You are driving with the parking brake applied.
Parking brake
X Release the parking brake (Y page 130).
Release brake
7 The belt system has malfunctioned.
Seatbelt sys. Visit G WARNING

workshop In the event of an accident or a rapid deceleration, the seat belts either
cannot protect you as intended.
X Consult a qualified specialized workshop as soon as possible.
6 The restraint system is faulty.
Restraint system G WARNING

Visit workshop If the restraint system is malfunctioning, individual systems could be
triggered inadvertently or might not be triggered at all in the event of
an accident.
There is an increased risk of injury and accidents.
Lights

b The left-hand low beam is faulty3.

X Halogen headlamps: replace the bulb as soon as possible
Low beam left
(Y page 90).
X Bi-Xenon headlamps: consult a qualified specialist workshop as
soon as possible.
b The right-hand low-beam headlamp is faulty3.

X Halogen headlamps: replace the bulb as soon as possible
Low beam right
(Y page 90).
X Bi-Xenon headlamps: consult a qualified specialist workshop as
soon as possible.
b The left-hand cornering light is faulty.

X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 90).
Cornering lt. left
b The right-hand cornering light is faulty.

Cornering lt. right
b The automatic headlamp feature is active: the light switch is in the

Ã position and you have forgotten to remove the key.
Lights on auto‐ X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
matic. Remove key
b The left-hand turn signal is faulty.

X Change the bulb as soon as possible in the front (Y page 91) or rear
Turn signal left (Y page 92) indicator lamp.
b The right-hand turn signal is faulty.

X Change the bulb as soon as possible in the front (Y page 91) or rear
Turn signal right (Y page 92) turn signal lamp.
b The left brake lamp is faulty3.

Brake lamp left
b The right brake lamp is faulty3.

Brake lamp right
b The additional brake lamp is faulty3. This display message will only
appear if all LEDs have failed.
Third brake lamp X Consult a qualified specialized workshop as soon as possible.
b The left-hand high-beam headlamp is faulty3.

High beam left
3 Depending on the equipment, the bulb-failure indicator may not be featured for any lamps other than the turn
signals.
Z

b The right-hand high beam headlamp is faulty3.

High beam right
b A license plate lamp is faulty.3

License plate lamp
b You have forgotten to switch off the lights when leaving the vehicle.
X Turn the light switch to $.
Switch off lights
b The left-hand front fog lamp is faulty.3

X Have the bulb replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist
Foglamp front left workshop.
b The right-hand front fog lamp is faulty3.

X Have the bulb replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist
Foglamp front right workshop.
b The rear fog lamp is faulty3.

Rear foglamp
b The left-hand front parking lamp/standing lamp is faulty3.

Parking lamp front
left
b The right-hand front parking lamp/standing lamp is faulty3.

Parking lamp front
right
b A backup lamp is faulty3.

Reverse lamp
b The left-hand tail lamp is faulty.3

Tail lamp left
b The right-hand tail lamp is faulty.3

Tail lamp right
b A perimeter lamp is faulty3.

Marker lamp
3 Depending on the equipment, the bulb-failure indicator may not be featured for any lamps other than the turn
signals.

Highbeam Assist Highbeam Assist is faulty.
Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Highbeam Assist Tem‐ Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.

porarily Unavaila‐ Possible causes are:
ble
fog.
field of vision.
If the malfunction has been rectified, the message Highbeam
Assist Available Again appears.
Engine
Vehicles with passenger vehicle approval
Check Diesel The DEF supply has dropped below 1.5 US gal (5.5 l).
Exhaust Fluid see X Add DEF supply (Y page 128).
Operator's Manual The display message only disappears when the vehicle is stationary,
at the latest after 20 seconds as soon as you switch on the ignition
or start the engine after topping up.
å Three short warning tones also sound.

XX starts remaining will last for approximately 1200 miles (1900 km). The engine can then
The number of remaining engine starts xx (16 to 0) is shown in the
å The yellow ; engine diagnostic indicator lamp also lights up and

Idle Mode You cannot drive the vehicle at a speed exceeding 5 mph (8 km/h).
The display message and the yellow ; engine diagnostic indi-
cator lamp only disappear when the vehicle is stationary, at the
latest after 20 seconds as soon as you switch on the ignition or start
the engine after topping up.
Z

Check Diesel In addition, the yellow ; engine diagnostic indicator lamp lights up
Exhaust Fluid see and a warning tone sounds.
Operator's Manual The DEF reducing agent is contaminated, diluted or is not compliant
with ISO 22241.

XX starts remaining After the message appears for the first time, the remaining DEF supply
with ISO 22241.

Vehicles with commercial vehicle approval

Check Diesel The DEF supply has dropped below 1.5 US gal (5.5 l).
Exhaust Fluid see X Add DEF supply (Y page 128).
Operator's Manual The display message only disappears when the vehicle is stationary,
at the latest after 20 seconds as soon as you switch on the ignition
or start the engine after topping up.
å Three short warning tones also sound.

XX starts remaining will last for approximately 1200 miles (1900 km). The engine can then

The display message and the yellow ; engine diagnostic indi-
cator lamp only disappear when the vehicle is stationary, at the
latest after 20 seconds as soon as you switch on the ignition or start
the engine after topping up.
Check Diesel In addition, the yellow ; engine diagnostic indicator lamp lights up
Exhaust Fluid see and a warning tone sounds.
Operator's Manual The DEF reducing agent is contaminated, diluted or is not compliant
with ISO 22241.

XX starts remaining After the message appears for the first time, the remaining DEF supply
with ISO 22241.

Z
Engine
? The coolant temperature is too high.

If the vehicle is stopped after being subjected to extreme loads, the
Coolant Stop, turn coolant warning lamp may come on when the ignition is switched on
engine off or the engine is restarted. Such loads can be, for example, driving in
mountainous terrain or driving with a trailer.
X Let the engine run at idling speed for approximately one minute.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop if the display message con-
tinues to be shown.
* The coolant level is too low.

Never run the engine if the coolant level is too low. The engine could
Coolant Check level overheat and be damaged.
traffic conditions.
X Switch off the engine and let it cool down.
X Add coolant and be sure to observe the warning notes
(Y page 285).
X If you need to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling sys-
tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
7 The fuel level has fallen into the reserve range.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station (Y page 126).
Reserve fuel Drive
to a filling stat.
: The water that has collected in the water separator has reached the
maximum level.
Water in fuel Visit X Drain the water separator (Y page 225).
workshop
m The fuel filter is dirty.

X Have the fuel filter element replaced as soon as possible at a quali-
Fuel filter Visit fied specialist workshop.
workshop
4 The oil level is too low.

X Check the oil level the next time you refuel (Y page 221), and add
Engine oil Add 1.0 oil.
quart (Canada: 1.0
liter)
4 You want to check the engine oil level even though the engine is still
running.
Engine oil level X Switch off the engine.
Not when eng. run‐
X Check the oil level (Y page 221).
ning

4 You have added too much engine oil. There is a risk of damaging the
engine or catalytic converter.
Engine oil level X Check the oil level (Y page 221).
Reduce oil level
X If the oil level is too high: have the engine oil extracted at the next
X If the oil level is correct: have the malfunction rectified at the next
4 There is not enough or no oil in the engine. There is a danger of engine

damage.
Engine oil level X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and
Stop, turn engine traffic conditions.
off
X Check the oil level with the oil dipstick (Y page 222).
X If the engine oil level is correct: have the malfunction rectified
immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
X If the engine oil level is too low: have the vehicle towed to a qualified
4 There is a malfunction in the engine oil level display.

X Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist
Oil sensor Visit workshop.
workshop
Driving systems
_ _ _ The activation conditions for cruise control have not been met.
Cr. control You can only activate cruise control from speeds of 20 mph
(30 km/h).
Cruise control Cruise control has been deactivated due to a malfunction.
Visit workshop X Have cruise control checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Z

Lane Keep. Assist and the Ã indicator lamp lights up yellow.

temporarily Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.
unavailable Possible causes are:
RThere are no lane markings present.
fog.
RThe camera cannot recognize the road markings:
- It is too dark.
- The lane markings are worn or are covered, for example, by dirt or
snow.
field of vision.
If the Ã indicator lamp goes out, Lane Keeping Assist is opera-
tional again.
Lane Keep. Assist Lane Keeping Assist is faulty.

inoperative X Have Lane Keeping Assist checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist is faulty.

inoperative X Have Blind Spot Assist checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Collision Preven‐ COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is faulty.

tion Assist inoper‐ X Have COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST checked at a qualified spe-
ative cialist workshop.
Recognition by the radar sensor system can be impaired in the case of:
Rsnow or heavy rain
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
X Clean the radar sensor system area.
Intervention Cross‐ The d indicator lamp also flashes in the instrument cluster.
wind Assist Crosswind Assist has intervened perceptibly.
Tires

Tire pres. Adjust The pressure is insufficient in one or more tires, or the pressures of the
pres. individual tires differ significantly.
O X Check the tire pressure at the next opportunity and correct it if
necessary (Y page 254).
Tire pres. The tire pressure monitor has malfunctioned.

monitor inoperative X Have the tire pressure monitor and the wheels checked at a quali-
Tire pres. The tire pressure monitor function is temporarily unavailable due to
monitor currently radio interference or undervoltage.
unavailable X Once the causes have been remedied, the tire pressure monitor is
automatically activated.
Tire pres.- The tire pressure monitor is not receiving signals from one or more
monitor inoperative wheels because:
No wheel sensors Ra wheel has been replaced with the spare wheel without wheel
electronics.
Rthe maximum temperature on one of the wheel electronics units has
been exceeded.
Rthe wheel electronics are malfunctioning.
X Have the tire pressure monitor and the wheels checked at a quali-
Check tire(s) The pressure of one or more tires has dropped significantly. If the tire
pressure monitor has detected the affected wheel, the wheel position
O is also displayed.
traffic conditions.
X Check the tires.
X Repair or change the wheel if necessary (Y page 267).
X Check the tire pressure and correct it if necessary (Y page 254).
The display message disappears automatically after driving for a
few minutes with the corrected tire pressure.
Warning Tire defect One or more tires is losing air rapidly. If the tire pressure monitor has
detected the affected wheel, the wheel position is also displayed.
O X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers, paying attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Repair or change the wheel (Y page 267).
Z
Vehicle
Ð The power assistance for the steering has malfunctioned. You need to
steer more forcefully.
Steering Assistance X Carefully continue to a qualified specialist workshop and have the
Failure steering checked immediately.
# The battery is not being charged. Possible causes are a defective

alternator or a torn poly-V-belt.
Battery/Alternator X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and
Visit workshop traffic conditions.
X Check the poly-V-belt.
X If the poly-V-belt is torn: do not continue driving. Consult a qualified
X If the poly-V-belt is not damaged: have the vehicle checked as soon
as possible by a qualified specialist workshop.
÷ The electrical step has retracted or extended only partially or not at all.
X Make sure there is sufficient free space for the electrical step.
Electrical Step
X Open or close the sliding door again.
X If the electrical step still does not extend or retract fully, push the
step in manually (Y page 68). Before stepping out, remind the pas-
sengers that the step is missing.
1 You are already driving at walking pace, even though the hood is not
closed.
Hood open X Close the hood.
9 You have not yet entered your PIN in the mobile phone.
X Enter the PIN for the SIM card.
Please enter PIN:
1 You are already driving at walking pace, even though not all the doors
are closed.
Doors open X Close the doors.
¦ The washer fluid level is too low.

X Add washer fluid (Y page 225).
Check wash. fluid
level
Key
+ The key is no longer working.

Replace key Visit
workshop
Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster 195
Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster

When switching on the ignition, some systems carry out a self-test. Some indicator and warning
lamps may temporarily turn on or start to flash. This is not an indication of any problem. Only when
these indicator and warning lights turn on or start flashing after the engine has started or during the
journey has a malfunction occurred.
· The red distance The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected.
warning lamp Increase the distance.
lights up while the
vehicle is in
motion.
· The red distance You are approaching a vehicle ahead at too high a speed.
warning lamp X Be prepared to brake immediately.
flashes while the
X Pay particular attention to the traffic situation. You may have to
vehicle is in
brake or take evasive action.
motion. Addition-
ally, an intermit-
tent warning tone
sounds.
Ã The yellow Lane Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated.
Keeping Assist X Activate Lane Keeping Assist if necessary (Y page 146).
indicator lamp
lights up while
you are driving.
Ã The green Lane Lane Keeping Assist is operational.
Keeping Assist
indicator lamp
lights up while
you are driving.
Ã The red Lane You are driving with the front wheel on a lane marking.
Keeping Assist
indicator lamp
lights up while
you are driving.
Additionally, an
intermittent
warning tone
sounds.
d The yellow G WARNING
ASR/ESP® warn-
ing lamp flashes ESP® or ASR is intervening because at least one of the wheels has
while the vehicle reached its tire grip limit.
is in motion. Cruise control is deactivated for the duration of the intervention.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do
not use too much throttle.
X Drive slowly.
Z
196 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster

d The yellow The all-wheel drive is activated/deactivated. When changing gear,

ASR/ESP® warn- ASR and ESP® are deactivated.
ing lamp is lit After changing gear, ASR and ESP® are automatically reactivated.
while the engine
Engage/disengage the all-wheel drive (Y page 147).
is running.
d The yellow In vehicles with all-wheel drive the brake system is overheated.
ASR/ESP® warn-
ing lamp flashes G WARNING
slowly while the The performance of 4ETS is reduced. The braking power output may
vehicle is in be lower.
motion. There is a risk of an accident.
X Drive on carefully and adapt your driving style to suit the road and
traffic conditions.
X When the message is no longer displayed, 4ETS and normal braking
power are available again.
d The yellow ASR is deactivated.
ASR/ESP® warn-
ing lamp is lit G WARNING
while the engine The driven wheels can spin when accelerating.
is running. There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.
X Activate ASR again. Exceptions (Y page 55).
h!:b EBD is malfunctioning or deactivated due to undervoltage or malfunc-

The yellow ESP®, ABS tion.
and ASR/BAS indicator The battery may not be being charged.
lamps and the red brake
system indicator lamp G WARNING
are lit while the engine is The rear wheels could lock sooner than expected when you apply the
running. brakes. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking sit-
uations.
X Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: also observe the messages in
the display (Y page 181).
traffic conditions.
X Do not drive on.

b The red brake sys- There is insufficient brake fluid in the expansion tank.
tem indicator
lamp is lit while G WARNING
the engine is run- Braking performance can be impaired.
ning. There is a risk of an accident.
traffic conditions.
X Check the brake fluid level in the expansion tank (Y page 224).
X If the brake fluid is below the MIN mark: do not drive on!
X Do not add brake fluid. This does not solve the problem.
b When towing a G WARNING

trailer: the red
brake system The brake force booster in the trailer is faulty.
indicator lamp is The driving and braking characteristics of your vehicle could change.
lit while the There is a risk of the trailer overbraking and of you losing control over
engine is running. the truck/trailer combination.
Additionally, a There is a risk of an accident.
warning tone X Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: also observe the messages in
sounds. the display (Y page 181).
traffic conditions.
X Do not drive on.
: The yellow ASR has been deactivated due to a malfunction.

ASR/BAS indica- The engine power output may be reduced.
tor lamp is lit
while the engine G WARNING
is running. The driven wheels can spin when accelerating.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.
: The yellow BAS has been deactivated due to a malfunction.

ASR/BAS indica-
tor lamp is lit G WARNING
while the engine The brake system continues to function normally, but without elec-
is running. tronic support.
Z

: The yellow ASR and BAS have been deactivated due to undervoltage.
ASR/BAS indica- The battery may not be being charged.
tor lamp is lit
while the engine G WARNING
is running. The brake system is still available with the normal braking effect.
! The yellow ABS ABS is deactivated due to a malfunction or is temporarily unavailable.

indicator lamp is ESP®, ASR and BAS, as well as cruise control, are also unavailable as
lit while the a result.
engine is running. Self-diagnosis may not be complete, or the battery may not be charg-
ing.
G WARNING
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock, e.g. if the
brakes are applied with maximum force.
This causes steerability and braking to be greatly impaired.
X Drive a short distance at a speed above 13 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the indi-
cator lamp goes out.
If the indicator lamp does not go out:
å The yellow DEF The exhaust gas aftertreatment is malfunctioning or the current Diesel
indicator lamp is Exhaust Fluid (DEF) supply is limiting the range.
lit while the X Observe the messages in the display.
engine is running.

h The yellow ESP® ESP® is deactivated due to undervoltage or a malfunction. As a result,
indicator lamp is cruise control has also been deactivated.
lit while the Engine power output may be reduced.
engine is running. The battery may not be being charged.
G WARNING
6 The red warning The restraint systems have malfunctioned.

lamp does not go
out approx- G WARNING
imately four sec- If the restraint systems are malfunctioning, individual systems could
onds after the be triggered inadvertently or might not be triggered at all in the event
ignition is of an accident.
switched on, or it There is an increased risk of injury and accidents.
lights up again.
# The red battery The battery is not being charged. Possible causes are a defective
indicator lamp is alternator or a torn poly-V-belt.
lit while the X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and
engine is running. traffic conditions.
X Check the poly-V-belt.
X If the poly-V-belt is torn: do not continue driving. Consult the near-
est qualified specialist workshop.
X If the poly-V-belt is not damaged: have the vehicle checked as soon
as possible by a qualified specialist workshop.
# The red battery The battery is faulty.

indicator lamp is X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and
lit while the traffic conditions.
engine is running.
X Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
# The yellow brake The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.
pad wear indica-
tor lamp is lit after G WARNING
the engine is star- Braking performance can be impaired.
ted or while the There is a risk of an accident.
vehicle is in
motion. X Have the brake pads/linings replaced as soon as possible at a
Z

4 The yellow engine The oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
oil level warning X Check the engine for oil loss.
lamp lights up
X If oil loss is detected: consult a qualified specialist workshop imme-
after the engine is
diately.
started or while
the vehicle is in X If no oil loss is detected: check the oil level and add engine oil
motion. (Y page 222).
4 The yellow warn- On vehicles with a diesel engine, the oil level display additionally
ing lamp flashes appears in the display, e.g. – 2.0 qts (Canada: – 2.0 ltr).
and the warning There is not enough or no oil in the engine.
buzzer sounds There is a danger of engine damage.
after the engine is
started or while X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and
the vehicle is in traffic conditions.
motion. X Check the oil level with the oil dipstick (Y page 222).
X If the engine oil level is correct: have the malfunction rectified
immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
X If the engine oil level is too low: have the vehicle towed to a qualified
4 The yellow engine The engine oil level is above the maximum level.
oil level warning There is a risk of damaging the engine or catalytic converter.
lamp lights up and
X Check the oil level with the oil dipstick (Y page 222).
the warning buz-
zer sounds after X If the oil level is too high: have the engine oil extracted as soon as
starting the possible at a qualified specialist workshop.
engine or while X If the oil level is correct: have the malfunction rectified as soon as
the vehicle is in possible at a qualified specialist workshop.
motion.
4 On vehicles with a There is a malfunction in the engine oil level display.
diesel engine, the X Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist
yellow warning workshop.
lamp lights up
repeatedly during
the journey.
% The yellow cool- The coolant level is too low.
ant level warning Never run the engine if the coolant level is too low. The engine could
lamp lights up overheat and be damaged.
while the engine
is running.
traffic conditions.
X Switch off the engine and let it cool down.
X Add coolant and be sure to observe the warning notes
(Y page 223).
X If you need to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling sys-
tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

? The red coolant The coolant temperature is too high.
warning lamp is lit X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and
while the engine traffic conditions.
is running.
? The red coolant The coolant temperature is too high.

warning lamp is lit If the vehicle is stopped after being subjected to extreme loads, the
while the engine coolant warning lamp may come on when the ignition is switched on
is running. or the engine is restarted. Such loads can be, for example, driving in
mountainous terrain or driving with a trailer.
X Let the engine run at idling speed for approximately one minute.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop if the display message con-
tinues to be shown.
7 The yellow The fuel filler cap is not closed.
| reserve fuel warn- X Close the fuel filler cap.
ing lamp is on. At You will hear a click when the fuel filler cap is closed fully.
the same time, 0
X If the malfunction continues to be displayed, have it rectified imme-
appears in the
diately at a qualified specialist workshop.
fuel tank content
display while the
engine is running,
although there is
fuel in the fuel
tank.
; The yellow Check You have used up all fuel in the tank.
Engine indicator The engine is running in emergency mode.
lamp is lit up or
X Refuel at the nearest gas station (Y page 126).
flashes while the
engine is running. X Bleed the fuel system (Y page 122).
X Start the engine three to four times in succession after refueling.
Emergency running mode will be canceled. The vehicle does not
need to be checked.
; The yellow Check The injection control is malfunctioning.

Engine indicator The engine is running in emergency mode.
lamp is lit up or Engine power output may be reduced.
flashes while the
engine is running. X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop as soon
as possible.
In some states it is legally prescribed that after the Check Engine
indicator lamp lights up you must contact a qualified specialist work-
shop immediately. Observe the legal requirements.
Z

; The yellow Check The exhaust gas aftertreatment is malfunctioning or an emission rel-
Engine indicator evant malfunction has occurred. This malfunction or defect can dam-
lamp is lit while age the exhaust gas aftertreatment.
the engine is run- After the first message and under normal operating conditions, you
ning. can drive on for up to approximately 500 mi (800 km). Then a warning
tone sequence sounds and the engine can only be started another 16
times.
X Observe the messages in the display.
X Have the exhaust gas aftertreatment checked immediately at a
In some states it is legally prescribed that after the Check Engine
indicator lamp lights up you must contact a qualified specialist work-
shop immediately. Observe the legal requirements.
% If you turn the key At extremely low temperatures, the engine may not start.
to position 2 in There is a malfunction in the preglow system.
the ignition lock, X
Have any malfunction rectified at a qualified specialist workshop.
the yellow pre-
glow indicator
lamp remains lit
for approximately
one minute. Or
the yellow pre-
glow indicator
lamp lights up for
approximately
one minute while
the engine is run-
ning.
È The yellow air fil- The service limit for the air filter has been reached. The air filter is dirty.
ter indicator lamp X Have the air filter element replaced as soon as possible at a quali-
is lit while the fied specialist workshop.
engine is running.
h The yellow tire G WARNING
pressure monitor
warning lamp The tire pressure monitor indicates a rapid or severe loss of pressure
comes on. in at least one tire.
X Stop the vehicle without making any extreme steering maneuvers or
braking suddenly. Pay attention to the traffic conditions while doing
so.
X Check the tires and correct the tire pressure. If a tire continues to
lose pressure, it must be replaced. Replace damaged tires imme-
diately.
The warning light will go out after the flat tire has been rectified and
you have been driving for a few minutes.

h US vehicles only: The tire pressure monitor has malfunctioned.
The yellow tire X Have the tire pressure monitor and the wheels checked at a quali-
pressure monitor fied specialist workshop.
warning lamp
flashes for
60 seconds and
then remains lit.
: The yellow water The water that has collected in the water separator of the fuel filter has
separator indica- reached the maximum level.
tor lamp is lit X Drain the water separator (Y page 225).
when the ignition
is switched on.
m The yellow water The fuel filter is dirty.
separator indica- X Have the fuel filter element replaced as soon as possible at a quali-
tor lamp is lit fied specialist workshop.
when the ignition
is switched on.
¦ The yellow The water level is too low.
washer fluid level X Add washer fluid (Y page 225).
indicator lamp for
the windshield
washer/head-
lamp cleaning
system is lit after
the engine is star-
ted or while the
vehicle is in
motion.
7 The red seat belt The warning lamp is to remind you to fasten your seat belt.
warning lamp X Fasten seat belt (Y page 44).
lights up continu-
ously or flashes. A
warning tone may
also sound.
b When the key is One of the exterior lighting bulbs is faulty, with the exception of the
turned to position perimeter lamps and the trailer lighting.
2 in the ignition
lock, the yellow i Depending on the equipment, the bulb failure indicator can fail for
bulb warning all lamps with the exception of the turn signal lamps.
lamp lights up. X Replace the faulty bulb as soon as possible (Y page 89).
1 The yellow "door The vehicle is moving without all doors or the hood being closed.
open" indicator X Close the doors or hood.
lamp is lit while
driving.
Z

1 The yellow "door The electrical step has retracted or extended only partially or not at all.
open" indicator X Make sure there is sufficient free space for the electrical step.
lamp is lit.
X Open or close the sliding door again.
X If the electrical step still does not extend or retract fully, push the
step in manually (Y page 68). Before stepping out, remind the pas-
sengers that the step is missing.
Ð The indicator The power assistance for the steering has malfunctioned. You need to
lamp for the steer more forcefully.
steering is lit X Carefully continue to a qualified specialist workshop and have the
when the ignition steering checked immediately.
is switched on.
Stowage spaces and stowage compartments 205
Useful information Glove box

safety.
Stowing and features

Glove box (example: glove box with a lockable lid)

Stowage spaces and stowage com- 1 Unlocked
partments 2 Locked
Important safety notes = Glove box handle
You can lock and unlock the glove box using the
G WARNING mechanical or folding key.
If objects in the passenger compartment are X To open: unlock the glove box lid if neces-
stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be sary.
thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In X Pull glove box handle = in the direction of the
addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces arrow.
and mobile phone brackets cannot always
retain all objects they contain. There is a risk
of injury, particularly in the event of sudden
braking or a sudden change in direction.
RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be
thrown around in such situations.
RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-
trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or
stowage nets.
RClose the lockable stowage spaces before
starting a journey.
? Card holder
RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin- A Pen holder
ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in
X To close: fold the glove box up and press it
the trunk. until it engages.
In addition, observe the information in the
"Loading guidelines" section (Y page 213).
Z
206 Stowage spaces and stowage compartments
Eyeglasses compartment in the over-

head control panel
Stowage space (example: front passenger side)
X To open: briefly press cover :.

The eyeglasses compartment opens down-
wards.
X To close: press the eyeglasses compartment
into the overhead control panel until it
engages.
Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment is
always closed while the vehicle is in motion.
Dashboard stowage compartments Stowage compartment equipped with smartphone

connections
G WARNING = USB port
? 3.5 mm audio jack
Objects protruding from the stowage com-
partment above the front passenger front air i Depending on the vehicle equipment, a USB
bag could obstruct or even prevent deploy- port and an AUX-in connection is installed in
ment of the front passenger front air bag. The the stowage compartment. A Media Interface
front passenger front air bag may then fail to is a universal interface for portable audio
equipment, e.g. for an iPod® or MP3 player
provide the intended protection. There is an
(see the separate audio system operating
increased risk of injury. instructions).
Do not place any protruding objects in the
stowage compartment above the front
passenger front air bag.
! The right and left storage spaces may be

loaded with a maximum of 11 lb (5 kg) each.
Stowage spaces and stowage compartments 207
Stowage compartment in the center Stowage space above the windshield

console
! The right and left stowage spaces may be
loaded with a maximum of 5.5 lb (2.5 kg)
each.

Stowage compartment on the dashboard above
the center console (example with lid)
The stowage compartments on and in the center Stowage compartment (example: driver's side)
console can be used to store small, light objects. : Stowage compartment
X To open: pull release handle ;.
Lid : swings up.
X To close: close lid : and engage it. Stowage compartment under the twin
The lid of the stowage compartment must front passenger's seat
remain closed while the vehicle is in motion to
ensure that stowed objects are contained
safely.
Stowage space above the headliner

! The entire stowage space may be loaded
with a maximum of 66 lb (30 kg).
Do not place high, bulky loads in the stowage
space. You could otherwise damage the head-
liner in the event of sharp braking.
Twin front-passenger seat (example: Cargo Van)
You can stow various articles in the stowage
compartment under the twin front-passenger
seat.
X To fold a seat cushion forwards: lift the seat
cushion out of front anchorage :.
X Pull the seat cushion out of rear anchorage ;
and slightly forward.
X Fold the rear edge of the seat cushion up.
X To fold the seat cushion back: fold down
the seat cushion by the rear edge.
On vehicles with a partition, stowage space : X Slide the seat cushion under the seat back-
can only be loaded from the cargo compart- rest into rear anchorage ;.
ment. X Push down on the seat cushion at the front
until it engages in front anchorage :.
Z
208 Stowage spaces and stowage compartments
Stowage compartment under the rear

bench seat
G WARNING
Always secure the folded-up seat cushion
with the retainer loop. The seat cushion could
otherwise drop down unexpectedly and
thereby cause injury to yourself or others.
G WARNING
When folding down the seat cushion, make

sure that nobody can become trapped.
! The retainer loop is neither a grab handle for

people to use nor a securing point for loads. It
may tear if used incorrectly.
Retainer loops ; are secured to the outer head
restraints.
X Attach retainer loop ; to hook = under-
neath folded-up seat cushion :.
X To fold down the seat cushion: hold seat
cushion : and detach retainer loop ; from
hook =.
X Fold down seat cushion :.
The seat cushion engages automatically.
Paper holder
For vehicles with a crewcab, you can use the

stowage compartment under the rear bench
seat to safely store tools and other small items.
X To fold up the rear bench seat: lift seat
cushion : out of the front anchorage and
fold it upwards in the direction of the arrow.
X To open: press the top of paper holder :.

Bottle holder 209
Cup holder Cup holders in the center console

G WARNING
The cup holder cannot hold a container secure
whilst traveling. If you use a cup holder whilst
traveling, the container may be flung around
and liquid may be spilled. The vehicle occu-
pants may come into contact with the liquid

and if it is hot, they may be scalded. You may
be distracted from the traffic conditions and
you could lose control of the vehicle. There is
a risk of an accident and injury. Cup holders in the center console
Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is X To open: pull out ashtray compartment : by
stationary. Only use the cup holder for con- the recess.
Clamping arm ; of the cup holder opens out
tainers of the right size. Always close the con- fully.
tainer, particularly if the liquid is hot.
i Vehicles with the non-smoking package
have an additional cup holder instead of the
! Do not use the cup holder recesses as ash- ashtray.
trays. This could damage the cup holders.
X Place the beverage container into the cup
holder and push clamping arm ; against the
Cup holders in the dashboard container.
X To close: push ashtray compartment : into
the center console until it engages.
Bottle holder
Cup holder in dashboard stowage compartment

(example: right-hand side of vehicle)
: Cup holder
Bottle holders : in the front doors (example: co-

driver's door)
Z
210 Cigarette lighter
Ashtray Cigarette lighter

Ashtray in the center console
G WARNING
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
heating element or the socket of the cigarette
lighter.
In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:
Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls
Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to

objects, for example
There is a risk of fire and injury.
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
Ashtray in the center console Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is
out of reach of children. Never leave children
X Pull ashtray compartment : out by
unsupervised in the vehicle.
recess ;.
X To open: fold cover = upwards.
X To remove the insert: hold the ashtray by
the recesses on the left and right and pull the
insert out to empty it.
X To replace the insert: press it down into the
holder as shown.
Make sure that the insert is inserted correctly.
Otherwise you will not be able to close ashtray
compartment :.
Ashtrays in the passenger compart-

ment X To use the cigarette lighter: turn the key to
position 1 in the ignition lock.
X Press in cigarette lighter :.
The cigarette lighter will pop out automati-
cally when the heating element is red-hot.
X Pull the cigarette lighter out of the socket by
its handle.
Ashtrays on the left and right in the side trim panels

X To open: fold out the ashtray.
X To remove the insert: press retaining clip :
down and remove the ashtray from the trim.
X To replace the insert: insert the ashtray
down into the trim and close it.
Mobile phone 211
12-V socket Only operate this equipment when the traffic

situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the

operating mobile phones.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph

(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is cov-
ering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m)
every second.
You and others can suffer health-related dam-
Socket on the lower section of the center console age through electromagnetic radiation. By using
: 12-V socket (25 A) an exterior antenna, a possible health risk
The 12-V sockets for accessories are: caused by electromagnetic fields, as discussed
in scientific circles, is taken into account. Only
Ron the lower section of the center console have the exterior antenna installed by a qualified
(12 V, 25 A) specialist workshop.
Ron the inside of the driver's seat frame (12 V,
We recommend the use of an approved exterior
15 A) antenna for operating the mobile phone. Only in
Rin the respective corner trim next to the rear this way can optimal mobile phone reception
doors in the passenger compartment (12 V, quality in the vehicle be ensured and mutual
15 A) interference between the vehicle electronics
Rin the cargo compartment next to the left rear and mobile phones minimized.
door (12 V, 15 A) Observe the legal requirements for each indi-
You can use the 12-V sockets (15 A) for acces- vidual country.
sories with a maximum power consumption of
180 W. You can connect accessories with a
maximum power consumption of 300 W to the Mobile phone pre-installation
12-V socket (25 A) on the lower section of the
center console. The mobile phone pre-installation includes a
hands-free system integrated into the vehicle.
i The sockets are supplied with power even The microphone for the hands-free system is
when the key is removed from the ignition installed in the overhead control panel or in the
lock. If accessories, e.g. a coolbox, remain overhead stowage compartment together with
connected while the engine is not running, the the front interior light.
battery will discharge.
In order to use the hands-free system, you will
need a special bracket. Accessories for the
Sprinter include mobile phone brackets for var-
Mobile phone ious phone models.
Important safety notes i Mobile phone brackets which are available
from various manufacturers on the open mar-
G WARNING ket are not compatible with the Sprinter tele-
If you operate information systems and com- phone system. You can recognize suitable
holders for your mobile phone by the imprin-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi- ted star and the B6 spare part number on the
cle when driving, you may be distracted from back of the bracket.
the traffic situation. You could also lose con-
Detailed instructions for use can be found in the
trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci- operating instructions for the mobile phone
dent.
Z
212 Additional communications equipment
bracket and in the separate operating instruc-

tions for the mobile phone pre-installation.
i The mobile phone battery is charged
depending on the condition of charge and the
position of the key in the ignition lock. The
mobile phone display indicates the charging
process.
Additional communications equip-

ment
PND connector (on the side behind the instrument
Important safety notes cluster)
G WARNING = USB port
? 3.5 mm audio jack for the PND audio signal
If you operate mobile communication equip- (voice announcements)
ment when driving, you may be distracted
X Connecting the PND: connect the PND ports
from the traffic situation. You could also lose
to the appropriate jacks in the vehicle.
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident. i You can also use USB port = and 3.5 mm
audio jack ? for external audio sources.
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle To play the voice announcements of the naviga-
is stationary. tion device via the radio loudspeaker, select
"AUX" as the audio source. The radio function is
Observe the legal requirements for the country not available in this modus.
in which you are currently driving when operat-
ing mobile communication equipment. i If you use audio devices or personal naviga-
Please remember, a navigation system does not tion devices which have been recommended
supply information on the load-bearing capacity by Mercedes-Benz, you can use all of the
of bridges or the overhead clearance of under- functions available, such as the mute func-
passes. The driver remains responsible for tion.
safety at all times. You can obtain further information from any
You and others can suffer health-related dam- authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
age through electromagnetic radiation. By using
an exterior antenna, a possible health risk
caused by electromagnetic fields, as discussed
have the exterior antenna installed by a qualified
You will find information on installing electrical
or electronic equipment in the “Vehicle elec-
tronics” section (Y page 276).
Installation for PND mobile navigation

devices
You can secure a personal navigation device
(Personal Navigation Device PND) using a com-
mercially available adapter.
Loading guidelines 213
Useful information rear bench seat, it is advisable to store it out-

side the vehicle.
well as standard and optional equipment of your G WARNING
to print. Country-specific variations are possi- When the permissible wheel loads, axle loads
ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped and/or the maximum permissible gross vehi-
with all of the described functions. This also cle weight are exceeded, driving safety is
applies to systems and functions relevant to compromised. The handling as well as steer-
safety. ing and braking characteristics may be signif-
Read the information on qualified specialist icantly impaired. Overloaded tires may over-
workshops (Y page 27). heat, causing them to burst. There is a risk of
an accident.
When transporting a load, always observe the
Loading guidelines
Transporting loads
permissible wheel loads, axle loads and the
Important safety notes maximum permissible gross vehicle weight
for the vehicle (including occupants).
G WARNING
As a result of improperly placed or unevenly G WARNING
distributed loads, the center of gravity of the When you load the roof, the center of gravity
load being transported may be too high or too of the vehicle rises and the driving character-
far back. This can significantly impair handling istics change. If you exceed the maximum roof
as well as steering and braking characteris- load, the driving characteristics, as well as
tics. There is a risk of an accident. steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.
Always make sure that the center of gravity of There is a risk of an accident.
the load is: Never exceed the maximum roof load and
Rbetween the axles adjust your driving style.
and
! If you are using a roof carrier, observe the
Ras low as possible, near the rear axle. maximum roof load and maximum roof carrier
load.
G WARNING You will find information about the maximum
When objects are unsecured or inadequately roof load in the "Technical data" section
secured, they can slip, turn over or be thrown (Y page 287) and information about roof carri-
about, striking vehicle occupants. This also ers in the "Carrier systems" section
applies to: (Y page 217).
RDo not stack luggage or loads higher than the
Rluggage or loads backrests.
Ra rear bench seat which has been removed RStow objects preferably in the cargo com-
and is being transported in the vehicle in an partment.
exceptional case. RWhen transporting luggage, always use the
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the cargo tie-down rings and a parcel net, if pres-
ent.
event of braking maneuvers or abrupt
RUse cargo tie-down rings and fasteners which
changes in direction. are suitable for the weight and size of the
Always stow objects in such a way that they load.
cannot be tossed about. Before traveling, Always observe the operating instructions of the
secure objects, luggage or loads to prevent respective manufacturer when using suitable
them slipping or tipping over. If you remove a load securing aids or tie downs. In particular, the
information on service life.
Z
214 Loading guidelines
Load securing aids and tie downs may not be During loading
used, for example, if:
Ridentification marks are missing or illegible ! On passenger van versions with maximum
seating layout, the permissible rear axle load
Rthere are yarn breakages, damage to bearing
would be exceeded if the full payload were to
seams or other signs of tearing be loaded in the cargo compartment.
Rthere are signs of shearing, deformation,
X Observe the gross axle weight rating and per-
pinching or other damage
missible gross vehicle weight for your vehicle.
Rthere is damage to clamping or connecting
Take into account that your vehicle's curb
elements weight is increased if accessories or optional
Such load securing aids and tie downs are worn; equipment are installed. The maximum pay-
they should not be used and must be replaced. If load is thus reduced.
you use load securing aids or tie downs which X Observe the notes on load distribution
are worn, the load may not be sufficiently (Y page 215).
secured and could cause damage to property. The overall center of gravity of the load should
Transporting loads
After an accident, the following must be always be as low as possible, centered and
checked at a specialist workshop: between the axles near the rear axle.
RCargo compartment floor X Secure the load (Y page 215).
RLoad surface Observe the legal requirements of the country
RCargo tie-down rings
in which you are currently driving.
RTie downs
Otherwise, the load may not be correctly
secured the next time anything is stowed. Checks after loading
Even if you follow all loading guidelines, the load G WARNING
increases the risk of injury in the event of an
accident. Observe the tips in the "Securing lug- Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gage/loads" (Y page 215) and "Load distribu- gases, such as carbon monoxide. If the sliding
tion" (Y page 215) sections. door or rear door is open when the engine is
running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle
interior, especially during the journey. There
Before loading is a risk of poisoning.
! The anti-slip mats cannot be used for secur- Always switch off the engine before opening
ing goods and must be replaced when they the sliding door or rear door. Never drive the
show signs of: vehicle when the sliding door or rear door is
RPermanent deformation and crushing open.
RCrack formation
RCuts
X Securing loads: check that the load is secure
before every journey and at regular intervals
X Tire pressure: check the tire pressure and during a long journey, and correct if neces-
correct if necessary (Y page 251). sary.
X Cargo compartment floor: clean the cargo X Doors: close the sliding doors and rear doors.
compartment floor. X Tire pressure: adjust the tire pressures
The cargo compartment floor must be free according to the vehicle load (Y page 251).
from oil and dust, dry and swept clean to pre- X Driving style: adapt your driving style
vent the load from slipping. according to the vehicle load.
X Place non-slip mats (anti-slip mats) on the
cargo compartment floor if necessary.
Securing loads 215
Load distribution Always tension the tie-downs in the proper

manner and only between the described
General notes cargo tie-down rings. Always use tie-downs
! Excessive loads on individual points of the designed specifically for the loads.
cargo floor or on the load surface impair vehi-
cle handling characteristics and could cause ! Observe the information on the maximum
damage to the floor covering. loading capacity of the individual cargo tie-
The overall center of gravity of the load should down points.
always be as low as possible, centered and If you use several cargo tie-down points to
between the axles near the rear axle. secure a load, you must always take the max-
imum loading capacity of the weakest cargo
On Cargo Vans and Passenger Vans:
tie-down point into account.
X Always transport loads in the cargo compart- If you brake hard, for example, the forces act-
ment. ing could be up to several times the weight
Transporting loads
X Always place the load against the backrests of force of the load. Always use multiple cargo
the rear bench seat. tie-down points in order to distribute the force
X Move large and heavy loads as far towards the absorption. Load the anchorages evenly.
front of the vehicle as possible against the Spread the load evenly between the cargo tie-
rear bench seat. Stow the load flush with the down points or tie-down rings.
rear bench seat.
Please also refer to the notes about qualified
X Always additionally secure the load with suit- specialist workshops (Y page 27).
able load-securing aids or tie downs. Always observe the operating instructions or the
Observe the following notes: notes of the lashing strap manufacturer for the
RDo not stack loads higher than the upper edge operation of the lashing strap.
of the backrests. Information about the maximum loading capa-
RTransport loads behind seats that are not city of the cargo tie-down points can be found in
occupied. the "Technical data" section (Y page 287).
RIf the rear bench seat is not occupied, insert As the driver, you are responsible for ensuring
the seat belts crosswise into the buckle of the that:
opposite seat belt. RThe load is secured against slipping, tipping,
rolling or falling off. This applies both in nor-
mal traffic conditions and if the vehicle must
Securing loads swerve to avoid an obstacle, in the event of
full brake application and on poor road surfa-
Important safety notes ces.
RThe applicable requirements and guidelines
G WARNING relating to load-securing practices must be
If you attach the tie-down incorrectly when met.
securing the load, the following may occur in If this is not the case, this may constitute a
the event of abrupt changes in direction, brak- punishable offense, depending on local legis-
lation and any ensuing consequences.
ing maneuvers or an accident:
You should therefore observe the respective
Rthe cargo tie-down rings may become legal requirements for the relevant country.
detached or the tie-down may tear if the Make sure that the load is secure before every
permissible load is exceeded journey and at regular intervals during a long
Rthe load may not be restrained. journey. Correct an incorrectly or inadequately
secured load if necessary.
This may cause the load to slip, tip over or be You can obtain information about securing the
tossed about, striking vehicle occupants. load correctly from the manufacturer of the load
There is a risk of an accident and injury. securing aids or tie down for securing the load.
Z
216 Securing loads
X Fill spaces between the load and the cargo

compartment walls or wheel housings (form-
locking). Use rigid load securing aids, such as
wedges, wooden fixings or padding.
X Attach secured and stabilized loads in all
directions. Use the cargo tie-down points or
cargo tie-down rings and the loading rails in
the cargo compartment or on the cargo area.
Only use tie downs, such as lashing rods or
lashing nets and lashing straps, that have
been tested in accordance with current
standards (e.g. DIN EN).
Always use the cargo tie-down rings closest to Cargo tie-down point (example: Cargo Van without
the load to secure it and pad sharp edges for loading rails)
protection. : Cargo tie-down rings
Transporting loads
Loads, and heavy loads in particular, should

preferably be secured using the cargo tie-
down rings.
i Tie downs tested in accordance with current
standards (e.g. DIN EN) are available at any
Cargo tie-down points (example: Cargo Van with

loading rails)
: Cargo tie-down rings
; Load rails
Secure loose loads with a tested lashing net or a
tarpaulin.
Cargo tie-down points (example: Passenger Van) X Always fasten the lashing net or tarpaulin to
: Cargo tie-down rings all available cargo tie-down points. Make sure
that the retaining hooks are secured against
accidental opening.
If your vehicle is equipped with loading rails ;
in the floor, you can place lashing rods directly in
front of and behind the load. The lashing rods
directly absorb the potential shifting forces.
Securing loads on the cargo compartment floor
by lashing them down is only recommended for
lightweight loads. Place non-slip mats (anti-slip
mats) under the load to increase load security.
Carrier systems 217
Installing/removing cargo tie-down Carrier systems

rings for the load rails
Roof carrier
G WARNING
G WARNING
If the cargo tie-down ring is not properly
installed, it may slip or become detached in When you load the roof, the center of gravity
the event of abrupt changes in direction, brak- of the vehicle rises and the driving character-
ing maneuvers or an accident. This may cause istics change. If you exceed the maximum roof
objects, luggage or the load to slip, tip over or load, the driving characteristics, as well as
be tossed about, striking vehicle occupants. steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of injury. There is a risk of an accident.
Before using the cargo tie-down rings, always Never exceed the maximum roof load and
make sure they are properly installed and adjust your driving style.
Transporting loads
cannot be moved. You can find information about the maximum
roof load in the "Technical data" section
(Y page 287).
! Make sure that:
Rthe screws for the roof carrier are tightened
in the sliding blocks to a torque of
6.0 – 7.4 lb-ft (8 – 10 Nm)
Rthe bolts, when tightened, do not touch the
rails.
Rthe slot nuts are not located in the area of
the plastic caps.
Rthe slot nuts have the right cross-section.
X To install: slide the cargo tie-down ring Rthe mounting rails in the interior are free of
through a recess in the loading rail close to dirt.
the load until locking mechanism : engages Rthe screws are retightened evenly after
in the recess. approximately 300 miles (500 km).
i When you pull locking mechanism : up and We recommend that you only use roof racks
out of the recess, the cargo tie-down ring is tested and approved by Sprinter. These help
able to move within the loading rail. Make avoid vehicle damage.
sure that locking mechanism : is always ! If you want to retrofit securing rails, have it
engaged in a recess. done at a qualified specialist workshop. You
X Check the cargo tie-down ring for firm seat- could otherwise damage the vehicle.
ing.
X To remove: pull locking mechanism : up
and pull the cargo tie-down ring towards the
locking mechanism and out of the loading rail
through a recess.
: Securing rails
Z
218 Carrier systems
It is possible to install a roof carrier if your vehi-

cle is equipped with securing rails on the roof.
Special mountings (sliding blocks) are available
as accessories.
These mounting elements are available at any
Ladder carrier
Transporting loads
Example: ladder rack on Chassis Cab

: Front ladder rack
; Rear ladder rack
Pay attention to the important safety notes in
the "Loading guidelines" section (Y page 213).
You can find information about the maximum
ladder rack load in the "Technical data" section
(Y page 217).
You will find information about cleaning and
care in the "Notes on care" (Y page 234) and
"Power washers" (Y page 235) sections.
Engine compartment 219
Useful information If you need to do any work inside the engine

compartment:
This Operator's Manual describes all models as Rswitch off the ignition
vehicle that were available at the time of going Rnever reach into the area where there is a
to print. Country-specific variations are possi- risk of danger from moving components,
ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped such as the fan rotation area
Rremove jewelry and watches
safety. Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-
Read the information on qualified specialist ple, away from moving parts
G WARNING
The fuel injection system operates with a high
Engine compartment voltage. If you touch the live components, you
Maintenance and care

Hood could receive an electric shock. There is a risk
of injury.
Important safety notes Never touch components of the fuel injection
system when the ignition is switched on.
G WARNING
If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when The live components of the fuel injection system
the vehicle is in motion and block your view. are, for example, the injectors.
There is a risk of an accident. G WARNING
Never unlatch the hood while driving. Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
G WARNING of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Opening the hood when the engine is over- Working in the engine compartment poses a
heated or when there is a fire in the engine risk of injury.
compartment could expose you to hot gases Where possible, let the engine cool down and
or other service products. There is a risk of touch only the components described in the
injury. following.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the If you have to carry out work in the engine com-
engine compartment, keep the hood closed partment, only touch the following components:
and contact the fire department. RHood
ROil
dipstick
G WARNING REngineoil filler neck cap
The engine compartment contains moving RWasher fluid reservoir cap
components. Certain components, such as RCoolant expansion tank cap
the radiator fan, may continue to run or start
again suddenly when the ignition is off. There Opening the hood
is a risk of injury.
! Make sure that the windshield wipers are
not folded away from the windshield. You
could otherwise damage the windshield wip-
ers or the hood.
Z
220 Engine compartment
Closing the hood

G WARNING
If the hood is unlatched, it could tip forward
during rapid deceleration of the vehicle and
hit persons or objects within its path. There is
a risk of an accident and injury.
Therefore, always make sure that the hood is
closed and locked completely before driving
off.
Release handle for the hood If the hood is not locked and you are already
X Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic as driving at walking pace:
possible on level ground. Rthe yellow 1 indicator lamp in the instru-
X Switch off the engine. ment cluster goes on for vehicles without
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling steering-wheel buttons.

away. Rthe 1 Hood open display appears for vehi-
X Pull release handle : on the hood. cles with steering-wheel buttons.
The hood is released. ! When you press the support strut back,
make sure that you do not press it against the
detent position and cause it to bend.
! Do not use your hands to push the hood
down. You could damage it otherwise.
X Lift the hood slightly.
X Press support strut = towards the back.
X Lower the hood and allow it to fall with
momentum from a height of approximately
1 ft (30 cm).
The hood locks audibly.
X Check that the hood is correctly locked.
X Reach into the gap and push lever ; on the If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not
hood catch up. properly engaged. If the hood is not correctly
engaged, open the hood again. Let the hood
fall with a little more momentum.
X Swing the hood up until support strut =

engages and the hood is supported.
Overview of the engine compartment Only check the oil level when the engine is at
normal operating temperature.
X Park the vehicle on a level surface.
X Wait 5 minutes.
The display is activated.
X Vehicles without steering wheel buttons:
press the 4 menu button on the instrument
cluster (Y page 34) repeatedly until the dis-
play shows the 1 symbol.
The --:-- display message appears in the
display while the engine oil level measure-
Example: engine ment is running.
: Coolant expansion tank cap (Y page 223) X Vehicles with steering wheel buttons:

; DEF filler neck cap (Y page 128) press the Ë service button on the instrument
= Engine oil filler neck cap (Y page 221) cluster (Y page 34).
? Brake fluid expansion tank cap The 4 Engine oil level Measuring
(Y page 224) in progress display message appears in the
display while the engine oil level measure-
A Washer fluid reservoir cap (Y page 225) ment is in progress.
Regularly check the fluid level and the assembly Display message for vehicles without steer-
for leaks. If you detect fluid loss, e.g. oil flecks on ing-wheel buttons: the display may show the
the vehicle parking space, consult a qualified following messages after the engine oil level
specialist workshop immediately. measurement.
1 Action
Engine oil
OK X Do not add oil.
General notes
– 1.0 qts X Add the amount of oil
! Engine oil gets dirty in the course of opera- shown (Y page 223).
– 1.5 qts
tion and its quality and volume are gradually X Check the engine oil level
diminished. Regularly check the oil level, and – 2.0 qts again after a few minutes.
top up or have it replaced as needed.
HI The oil level is too high.
Observe the information on engine oils and oil
consumption in the "Technical data" section X Have excess oil removed.
(Y page 282).
You can check the oil level in the engine: Measurement units in the display:
Ron the display of the on-board computer
Rqts USA only
Rwith the oil dipstick
Rltr Canada only
Display message for vehicles with steering-
Checking the oil level shown in the dis- wheel buttons: the display may show the fol-
play lowing messages after the engine oil level meas-
urement.
If at extremely low temperatures no engine oil
level is displayed after five minutes, repeat the 1 Action
engine oil level check after another five minutes.
If an oil level reading is still not displayed, check Engine oil X Do not add oil.
the engine oil level with the dipstick level OK
(Y page 222). Have the engine oil level checked
at a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
Engine oil X Add the amount of oil Checking the oil level using the oil dip-
Add shown (Y page 223). stick
1.0 quart X Check the engine oil level
again after a few minutes.
Engine oil
Add
1.5 quarts
Engine oil
Add
2.0 quarts
Engine oil The oil level is too high.
level X Have excess oil removed.
Reduce oil
level
Example: 4-cylinder diesel engine
Eng. oil Turn the key to position 2 in
X
lev. Turn the ignition lock.
ignition
on for
level
Observe X If the engine is at normal
wait. operating temperature,
period repeat the engine oil meas-
urement after about five
minutes.
X Repeat the engine oil
measurement after about
30 minutes if the engine is Example: 6-cylinder diesel engine
not at normal operating
temperature. For vehicles with a red oil dipstick, only check
the oil level when the engine is at normal oper-
Engine oil X Switch off the engine when ating temperature:
level Not it is at normal operating X Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic as
when eng. temperature and wait possible on level ground.
running approximately 5 minutes X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
before measuring the away.
engine oil level.
X Wait for five minutes.
Measurement units in the display:
For vehicles with a yellow oil dipstick, only check
Rqts USA only the oil level when the engine is cold.
Rltr Canada only
X Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic as
possible on level ground.
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
away.
X Pull out oil dipstick :.
X Wipe oil dipstick : using a lint-free cloth.
X Insert oil dipstick : back into the guide tube ! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.
as far as it will go and remove it again. This could damage the engine.
If the level is between minimum mark = and
maximum mark ;, the oil level is correct.
X Unscrew and remove cap ?.
X If the oil level has dropped to or below mini-
mum mark =, open cap ? and add engine oil X Add engine oil.
(Y page 223). X Replace cap ? on the filler neck and tighten.
The difference in quantity between marks ; When doing so, make sure that the cap
and = is approximately 2 qt (2 l). engages correctly.
X Insert the oil dipstick into the guide tube as far X Check the oil level with the oil dipstick
as it will go. (Y page 222) or on the display (Y page 221).
X Close the hood (Y page 220). X Close the hood.
OM651 4-cylinder diesel engine:
At outside temperatures between 32 ‡ (–0 †)
and 86 ‡ (30 †), the oil level can be checked Coolant

when the engine is cold.
Measuring the engine oil when the engine is cold G WARNING
is less precise than measuring when the engine The engine cooling system is pressurized, par-
is at normal operating temperature. ticularly when the engine is warm. When
When the appropriate warning is shown in the opening the cap, you could be scalded by hot
display coolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury.
X Add engine oil (Y page 223) Let the engine cool down before opening the
or cap. Wear eye and hand protection when
X Have engine oil siphoned off. opening the cap. Open the cap slowly half a
turn to allow pressure to escape.
Add engine oil
Only check the coolant level and/or fill the cool-
G WARNING ant if the vehicle is on a level surface and the
engine has cooled down. The coolant tempera-
If engine oil comes into contact with hot com- ture must be below 122 ‡ (50 †).
ponents in the engine compartment, it may
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. ! Check the engine cooling and heating sys-
tem regularly for leaks.
Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to If a large quantity of coolant is lost, have the
the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and cause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-
thoroughly clean the engine oil off the com- cialist workshop.
ponents before starting the engine.
G WARNING
! The alternator is located below the engine If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-
oil filler neck. If engine oil spills onto the alter- ponents in the engine compartment, it may
nator, there is a danger of alternator damage. ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Be very careful when adding engine oil.
Let the engine cool down before you add anti-
H Environmental note freeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled
When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the
oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to antifreeze from components before starting
the environment. the engine.
! Do not add too much oil. adding too much ! Take care not to spill any coolant on painted
engine oil can result in damage to the engine surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
or to the catalytic converter. Have excess paintwork.
engine oil siphoned off.
Z
Brake fluid
G WARNING
Service products may be poisonous and haz-
ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with instructions on the use, storage
and disposal of service products on the labels
of the respective original containers. Always
store service products sealed in their original
containers. Always keep service products out
of the reach of children.
Example: cap and coolant expansion tank
Checking the coolant level Brake fluid is hazardous to health. Also observe
X Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic as the safety notes in the "Service products and
capacities" section (Y page 278).
possible on level ground.

X Switch off the engine. G WARNING
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture
away. from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake
X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter-clock- fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the
wise to allow excess pressure to escape. brake system when the brakes are applied
X Turn cap : further and remove it.
hard. This would impair braking efficiency.
X Check the coolant level.
If the coolant reaches the maximum mark on
coolant expansion tank ;, there is enough You should have the brake fluid renewed at
coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. the specified intervals.
Adding coolant
! Brake fluid corrodes paint, plastic and rub-
X If the coolant drops under the minimum mark ber. If paint, plastic or rubber has come into
on coolant expansion tank ;, add coolant to contact with brake fluid, rinse with water
the maximum mark. immediately.
Observe the information on coolant mixture Have the brake fluid renewed every two years at
ratio and water quality in the "Technical data" a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the
section (Y page 285). To prevent damage to information on brake fluid in the "Technical
the engine cooling system, use only approved data" section (Y page 284).
corrosion inhibitor and antifreeze that com-
plies with the Mercedes-Benz Specifications
for Service Products.
X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise to
tighten.
X Start the engine.
X After approximately five minutes, switch off
the engine again and allow it to cool down.
X Check the coolant level again and add coolant
if necessary.
X Close the hood.
Check the brake fluid level regularly, e.g. weekly

or when refueling.
Checking the brake fluid level Add windshield washer concentrate to the
X Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic as washer fluid all year round. Observe the infor-
possible on level ground. mation on washer fluid in the "Technical data"
Adding washer fluid
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
away. X Mix the washer fluid to the appropriate mixing
X Open the hood (Y page 219). ratio in a container beforehand.
X Check the brake fluid level. X Open the hood (Y page 219).
The brake fluid level is correct if the level is X Pull cap : on the washer fluid reservoir
between the MIN mark and MAX mark on upwards at the tab.
brake fluid reservoir :. X Add the premixed washer fluid.
X Close the hood. X Press cap : onto the filler neck until it
engages audibly.
! If the brake fluid level in the brake fluid res- X Close the hood.
ervoir has fallen to the MIN mark or below,

check the brake system immediately for
leaks. Also check the thickness of the brake
linings. Visit a qualified specialist workshop Fuel system
immediately.
Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct Draining the fuel filter
the malfunction.
G WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. Improper handling of
Washer fluid fuel creates a risk of fire and explosion.
Avoid fire, open flames, smoking and creating
G WARNING sparks under all circumstances. Switch off the
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if ignition and auxiliary heating before carrying
it comes into contact with hot engine compo- out work to the fuel system. Always wear pro-
nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of tective gloves.
fire and injury.
Make sure that no windshield washer con- H Environmental note
centrate is spilled next to the filler neck. Dispose of the water-fuel mixture in an envi-
ronmentally responsible manner.
! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for
plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB ! When the : indicator lamp lights up,
WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could dam- drain the fuel filter with water separator
age the plastic lenses of the headlamps. immediately. Otherwise, the engine may be
damaged.
Example: washer fluid reservoir
Z
226 Maintenance
If the : indicator lamp in the instrument

cluster goes on, drain the fuel filter with the
water separator immediately.
i We recommend that you have this mainte-
nance work carried out at a qualified special-
ist workshop.
X Park the vehicle safely and secure it from roll-
ing away.
X Switch off the auxiliary heating system .
X Place a suitable receptacle under drain Filter magazine, located on the roof in the rear
hose :. compartment
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. An increased amount of sand or dust may collect
X Open drain plug ; immediately until the in the air filter of the rear-compartment air con-
water/fuel mixture flows out of drain hose :. ditioning when you drive on dusty or sandy
roads.
X Screw in drain plug ; as soon as approx-
imately 0.2 qt (0.2 l) of the water/fuel mixture X To remove the filter mat: carefully pry
has been collected. cover : out of recesses ; and remove.
The electrical fuel pump automatically halts X Remove the filter mat from the air duct.
the flow of the water/fuel mixture after X To clean the filter mat: wash the dirty filter
30 seconds. mat with clear water.
X After draining, turn the key back to position 0 X Leave the filter mat to dry.
in the ignition lock.
i The filter mat must not be cleaned or dried in
X Dispose of the collected water/fuel mixture
a machine.
in an environmentally responsible manner,
e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop. X To install the filter mat: insert the filter mat
X Check drain plug ;. The drain plug must be into the air duct.
closed. X Replace and engage cover :.
When the engine is running and drain hose ;
is open, fuel is lost through drain hose :.
X Close the hood (Y page 220). Maintenance
If the : indicator lamp does not go out after
draining:
General notes
X Drain the fuel filter again. H Environmental note
X If the : indicator lamp does not go out Observe measures to protect the environ-
after draining for the second time, have the ment when working on the vehicle. You must
cause checked immediately at a qualified spe-
observe the legal requirements when dispos-
cialist workshop.
ing of service products, e.g. engine oil. This
also includes all components, e.g. filters,
which have come into contact with service
Vehicle interior
products. Any qualified specialist workshop
Air filter for the rear-compartment air can provide information about this.
conditioning Dispose of empty containers, cleaning cloths
and care products in an environmentally
! Regularly check the air filters for visible dirt.
Clean or replace a dirty filter mat. The dirt may responsible manner. Comply with the instruc-
otherwise lead to damage to the air-conditions for use of the care products.
tioning system.
Maintenance 227
Do not run the engine for longer than neces- service interval display should therefore not
sary when the vehicle is stationary. be confused with the 5 engine oil level
display.
Before having maintenance and repairs per- The service due date is displayed in days or
formed, it is essential to read the materials rela- miles (kilometers), depending on the total dis-
ted to the maintenance and repairs: tance driven.
Rthe applicable sections of the technical doc- The symbols or letters on the service display
umentation, e.g. the Operator's Manual and show the type of service that is due.
workshop information. ¯ or A for a minor service
Rregulations such as industrial safety regula- ° or B for a major service
tions and accident prevention regulations.
While working under the vehicle, you must Service due date display
secure the vehicle on jack stands with sufficient
load capacity. Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: the
Never use the jack as a substitute. The vehicle's following messages may be displayed.

jack is intended only to raise the vehicle for a R¯ Service A due in ... days
short time when changing a wheel. It is not R¯ Service A due in ... mi (km)
suited for performing maintenance work under
R¯ Service A Carry out now
the vehicle.
Please also refer to the notes about qualified Vehicles without steering wheel buttons:
specialist workshops (Y page 27). the following messages may be displayed.
The scope and regularity of the inspection and R¯ for service A
maintenance work primarily depend on the R° for Service B
often diverse operating conditions. Specialist Additionally, you will see the remaining distance
knowledge beyond the scope of this Operator's in miles (mi) or kilometers (km) or the remaining
Manual is required when carrying out testing time in days (d).
and maintenance work. This work should only be
carried out by trained staff.
Service due date has been exceeded
The vehicle Maintenance Booklet describes the
scope and frequency of maintenance work and Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: if you
contains additional notes on the New Vehicle have missed the service due date, one of the
Limited Warranty and on service products. following messages appears in the display and
Maintenance services must be carried out in warning tone also sounds.
accordance with the provisions and recommen- R¯ Service A overdue by ... days
dations in the Maintenance Booklet. Not doing
R¯ Service A overdue by ... km (km)
so could void the warranty claim and lead to
refusal of goodwill gestures after the manufac- Vehicles without steering wheel buttons: if
turer has submitted a damage report. you have missed the service due date, the ¯
or ° symbol for the service flashes for ten
i Observe the notes on genuine Sprinter parts seconds after the ignition is switched on. A
(Y page 29). minus sign also appears in front of the service
due date.
Service interval display Calling up the service due date

General notes X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.
The display is activated.
A service that is due is displayed in the service
interval display about one month in advance. A Vehicles without steering wheel buttons
message is then displayed while the vehicle is in X Press the 4 menu button on the instrument
motion or when the ignition is switched on. cluster repeatedly until the ¯ or °
i The service interval display does not provide symbol for the service appears in the display.
information about the engine oil level. The
Z
228 Battery
Additionally, you will see the remaining dis- G WARNING

tance in miles (mi) or kilometers (km) or the
remaining time in days (d). Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation
of sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-
Vehicles with steering wheel buttons
sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an
X Press the V or U button on the steering explosion.
wheel until the standard display (Y page 166)
appears in the display. Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle
body to remove any existing electrostatic
X Press the & or * button on the steering
wheel repeatedly until the service message build-up.
appears in the display, for example:
The flammable gas mix is produced when the
R¯ Service A in ... days
battery is charged or when the vehicle is jump-
R¯ Service A in ... mi (km) started.
Always make sure that neither you nor the bat-
tery are electro statically charged. Electrostatic
Battery charging results, for example, from:
Rwearing synthetic clothing

Rfriction between clothing and the seat
Work on the battery, e.g. removing or installing, Rdragging or pushing the battery across carpet
requires specialist knowledge and the use of flooring or any other synthetic materials
special tools. Therefore, always have work on Rrubbing the battery with cloths or towels.
the battery carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop. Comply with the following safety precautions
and take protective measures when handling
G WARNING batteries.
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery Risk of explosion. Explosive oxyhy-
can lead, for example, to a short circuit and drogen is produced when batteries
thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can are being charged. Only charge bat-
teries in well-ventilated areas.
lead to function restrictions applying to
Fire, open flames and smoking are
safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting sys-
therefore prohibited when working
tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the on the battery. Avoid creating
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The oper- sparks.
ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. Battery acid is caustic. Avoid con-
You could lose control of the vehicle, for tact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
example: Wear acid-proof protective gloves. If
skin or clothes are splashed with
Rwhen braking acid, neutralize the splashes imme-
Rin the event of abrupt steering maneuvers diately with soapy water or an acid
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not neutralizer, and then clean the affec-
ted areas with water. Consult a doc-
adapted to the road conditions tor if necessary.
There is a risk of an accident. Wear eye protection. When mixing
In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci- water and acid, the liquid can splash
dent, contact a qualified specialist workshop into your eyes. Rinse acid splashes
immediately. Do not drive any further. You to the eyes immediately with clean
water and contact a doctor immedi-
should have all work involving the battery car- ately.
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Keep children at a safe distance.
Children are not able to assess the
Further information can be found under "ABS"
(Y page 54) and under "ESP®" (Y page 56).
Battery 229
dangers posed by batteries and Otherwise, you need to check the battery's
acid. condition of charge every three weeks, since
When handling batteries, observe standby power consumption can drain the
the safety precautions and special battery. If the battery voltage is lower than
protective measures contained in 12.2 V, the battery must be charged. Other-
this Operator's Manual. wise, the battery may be damaged by exhaus-
tive discharging.
H Environmental note Be sure to observe the notes on charging the
Batteries contain dangerous batteries (Y page 233).
the household rubbish. They Installation locations
must be collected separately Your vehicle may be equipped with three bat-
and recycled to protect the teries, depending on the equipment version:
environment. RStarter battery in the battery case in the left

Dispose of batteries in an footwell
environmentally friendly RAdditional battery in the engine compartment
manner. Take discharged RAuxiliary battery under the left-hand front
batteries to a qualified spe- seat
cialist workshop or a special Have the auxiliary battery removed at a qualified
collection point for used bat- specialist workshop.
teries.
Observe the following notes: Installing/removing the floor cover-

ing (starter battery)
RRecharge the battery more frequently, if you:
- predominantly drive short distances G WARNING
- predominantly drive at low outside temper- Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
atures pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
- park the vehicle for longer than The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
three weeks. jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
In order for the batteries to achieve their max-
imum possible service life, they must always Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
be sufficiently charged. stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
RWhen you park the vehicle, remove the key if the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
you do not require any electrical consumers. securely and as specified in order to ensure
The vehicle will then use very little energy, sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
thus conserving battery power. loose floormats and do not place floormats on
RWhen replacing a battery, only use batteries top of one another.
that are recommended for use in Sprinter
vehicles.
RHave the battery removed at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
RIf you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
three weeks:
- consult a qualified specialist workshop or
- switch off the power supply using the bat-
tery main switch (Y page 118) or
- disconnect the batteries (Y page 230).
Z
230 Battery
Disconnecting the starter battery

! Switch off the engine and remove the key
from the ignition lock. Firstly remove the bat-
tery terminals. Otherwise, you could destroy
electronic components such as the alterna-
tor.
Always disconnect the starter battery in the
battery case in the left-hand side footwell
first.
! Always disconnect the battery in the order
described below. Never swap the terminal
X Switch off all electrical consumers. clamps. You may otherwise damage the vehi-
X To remove: remove screws = and take off cle electronics.
trim ;. If the vehicle is expected to be parked or out of
X Remove floor covering :. use for over three weeks, disconnect the bat-
X To install: insert floor covering : and align teries. This will prevent battery discharge
with the driver's seat base and the doorway. caused by off-load current consumption.
X Put trim ; in place and screw screws =
back in.
Disconnecting/connecting the
starter battery
G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produ-
ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or Battery cover in the left footwell
sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can X Switch off all electrical consumers.
ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. X Switch off the engine and remove the key
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a from the ignition lock.
connected battery does not come into con- X Remove the floor covering (Y page 229).
tact with vehicle parts. X Loosen screws ; and slide battery cover :
RNever place metal objects or tools on a bat- in the direction of the arrow.
The screws must protrude beyond the larger
tery.
recesses.
RIt is important that you observe the descri- X Remove battery cover : upwards.
bed order of the battery terminals when
connecting and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the
battery poles with identical polarity are
connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the
described order when connecting and dis-
connecting the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery
terminals while the engine is running.
Battery 231
Removing/installing the starter bat-

tery
Removing the starter battery
Starter battery in the left footwell

X First loosen and remove the negative terminal
clamp so that it is no longer in contact with
the terminal.

X Remove the cover from the positive terminal.
X Disconnect the battery (Y page 230).
X Loosen the positive terminal clamp and fold it
up to the side together with the pre-fuse box.
X Pull breather hose with connector bracket ;
from connection : on the degassing cover.
Reconnecting the starter battery

! Always connect the battery in the order
clamps. You may otherwise damage the vehi-
cle electronics.
X Fold the positive terminal clamp with the pre-
fuse box down to the terminal.
X Connect the positive terminal clamp.
X Attach the cover to the positive terminal.
X Connect the negative terminal clamp.
X Position battery cover : so that screws ; X Loosen the bolts holding retainer =, which
are positioned over the large recesses. prevents the battery from moving around.
X Slide battery cover : in the direction of
travel into the smaller recesses.
X Tighten screws ;.
X Install the floor covering (Y page 229).
Carry out the following work after connecting

the battery:
X Reset the side windows (Y page 73).
X Pull retainer = upwards.

X Slide the battery from its anchorage in the
direction of travel.
X Fold the bar of the battery upwards and
remove the battery from the battery case.
Z
232 Battery
Installing the starter battery electronic components such as the alterna-

tor.
X Insert the battery into the battery case. Always disconnect the starter battery in the
X Fold down the bar of the battery. battery case in the left-hand side footwell
X Slide the battery into its anchorage in the first.
opposite direction to the direction of travel.
X Insert retainer =.
! Always disconnect the battery in the order
X Tighten the bolts on retainer = which holds clamps. You may otherwise damage the vehi-
the battery in place. cle electronics.
X Attach breather hose with connector
bracket ; to connection : of the ventilation
cover.
X Connect the battery (Y page 230).
Disconnecting and connecting the

additional battery (engine compart-
ment)
G WARNING Additional battery in the engine compartment
During the charging process, a battery produ- X Switch off all electrical consumers.
ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or X Switch off the engine and remove the key
sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can from the ignition lock.
ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. X Open the hood (Y page 219).
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a X First loosen and remove the negative terminal
connected battery does not come into con- clamp so that it is no longer in contact with
the terminal.
tact with vehicle parts.
X Remove the cover from the positive terminal.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a bat-
X Loosen and remove the positive terminal
tery. clamp.
RIt is important that you observe the descri-
bed order of the battery terminals when Connecting the additional battery
connecting and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the ! Always connect the battery in the order
battery poles with identical polarity are clamps. You may otherwise damage the vehi-
connected. cle electronics.
RIt is particularly important to observe the X Connect the positive terminal clamp.
described order when connecting and dis- X Attach the cover to the positive terminal.
connecting the jumper cables. X Connect the negative terminal clamp.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery X Close the hood.
terminals while the engine is running.
Carry out the following work after connecting
the battery:
Disconnecting the additional battery X Reset the side windows (Y page 73).
! Switch off the engine and remove the key
from the ignition lock. Firstly remove the bat-
tery terminals. Otherwise, you could destroy
Battery 233
Installing and removing the additional G WARNING

battery (engine compartment) Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Removing the additional battery Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do
not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over
X Disconnect the battery (Y page 232). the battery. Keep children away from batter-
X Loosen the bolts holding the retainer that pre- ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with
vents the battery from moving around. plenty of clean water and seek medical atten-
X Remove the battery holder and take out the
tion.
battery.
! Only charge the installed battery with a bat-
Installing the additional battery tery charger that has been tested and
approved by the distributor named on the
X Insert the battery into the battery case. inside of the front cover. This device allows
X Insert the battery holder. the battery to be charged when it is installed
X Tighten the bolts holding the retainer that in the vehicle. The vehicle's electronics may

prevents the battery in the engine compart- otherwise be damaged.
ment from moving around. A battery charger unit specially adapted for
X Connect the battery (Y page 232). Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an
accessory. Only this device permits the charging
of the battery in its installed position. Only
Charging charge the installed battery with a battery
G WARNING charger that has been tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz, using the jump-start connec-
A discharged battery can freeze at tempera- tion point in the engine compartment. Contact
tures below freezing point. When jump-start- an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for infor-
ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases mation and availability. Read the operating
can escape from the battery. There is a risk of instructions for your charger before charging
an explosion. the battery.
The additional battery cannot be charged from
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before the jump-starting connection point.
charging it or jump-starting. Recharge the battery more frequently if you use
the vehicle mainly for short trips and/or drive at
If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up in low outside temperatures.
the instrument cluster when temperatures are
low, it is probably because the discharged bat- X Charge the battery. Observe the notes in the
tery has frozen. Should this be the case, do not operating instructions for your battery
jump-start the vehicle or charge the battery. The charger.
service life of a thawed battery may be shorter. X If necessary, install the battery. Observe the
Start-up behavior may deteriorate, in particular notes on reconnecting the battery.
at low temperatures. Have the thawed battery
checked at a qualified specialist workshop. i If a battery is not installed and not in service,
you should charge it every three months. This
G WARNING will counter self-discharging and prevent bat-
During charging and jump-starting, explosive tery damage.
gases can escape from the battery. There is a
risk of an explosion.
Care
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ! Dirty battery clamps and battery surfaces
ventilation while charging and jump-starting. cause leak currents which lead to the batter-
Do not lean over a battery. ies discharging.
Z
234 Care
! Do not use cleaning agents containing fuel. rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore,
Cleaning agents containing fuel corrode the drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By
battery housing. heating up the brakes, the brake discs and
pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a
! If dirt gets into the battery cell, battery self- long period of time.
discharge will increase and the battery may
be damaged. H Environmental note
The following points on battery care must be Only clean your vehicle at specially designed
observed: wash bays. Dispose of empty containers and
X Regularly check the battery terminals and the used cleaning products in an environmentally
fastening of the negative cable to the chassis responsible manner.
to ensure that they are firmly seated.
X Always keep the battery terminals and battery H Environmental note
surfaces clean and dry. Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning
X Lightly grease the undersides of the battery
cloths in an environmentally responsible man-
terminals with acid-resistant grease.
ner.
X Only clean the battery casing with a commer-
cially available cleaning product. Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for
retaining the quality in the long term.
Use care products and cleaning agents recom-
Care mended and approved for Sprinter vehicles.
Notes on care
G WARNING Washing the vehicle and cleaning the
paintwork
If you use openings in the bodywork or
detachable parts as steps, you could: Automatic car wash
Rslip and/or fall G WARNING
Rdamage the vehicle and cause yourself to
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing
fall.
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
After the vehicle has been washed, brake
Always use secure climbing aids, e.g. a suita- carefully while paying attention to the traffic
ble ladder. conditions until full braking power is restored.
! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of ! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless
the following: Automatic Car Wash as these use special
Rdry, rough or hard cloths cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can
Rabrasive cleaning agents damage the paintwork or plastic parts.
Rsolvents ! Make sure that the automatic car wash is
Rcleaning agents containing solvents suitable for the size of the vehicle.
Do not scrub. Before washing the vehicle in an automatic
Do not touch the surfaces or protective films car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors and
with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. remove any additional antennas. Otherwise,
You could otherwise scratch or damage the the exterior mirror, antenna or the vehicle
surfaces and protective film. itself could be damaged.
Make sure that the exterior mirrors are fully
! Do not park your vehicle for a long period of folded out again and that any additional
time directly after cleaning, particularly after antennas are re-installed when you leave the
cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner. automatic car wash.
Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor-
Care 235
! Make sure that: nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-
Rthe side windows and the roof are com- edly. There is a risk of an accident.
pletely closed Do not use power washers with circular jet
Rthe climate control blower is switched off nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
Rthe windshield wiper switch is at position 0 tires or chassis components replaced imme-
The vehicle could otherwise be damaged. diately.
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car
wash from the very start. ! Under no circumstances use power washers
Wash off excess dirt before cleaning the vehicle in the vehicle interior. The pressurized water
in an automatic car wash. and associated spray produced by the power
washer could cause extensive damage to the
After putting the vehicle through an automatic vehicle.
car wash, wipe off wax from:
Rthe rear view camera lens (Y page 237) ! Observe the minimum distance to be main-
tained between the nozzle of the high-pres-
Rthe windshield
sure cleaner and the object to be cleaned:

Rthe windshield wiper blades
Rapproximately 2.2 ft(70 cm) when using
This will prevent smears and reduce wiping round-jet nozzles
noises caused by residue on the windshield.
Rapproximately 1 ft (30 cm) when using 25°
flat-spray jets and concentrated-power jets
Washing by hand Keep the water jet moving while cleaning. To
In some countries, washing by hand is only avoid causing damage, do not point the water
allowed at specially equipped washing bays. jet directly at:
Observe the legal requirements of the country Rdoor joints
you are currently in when washing by hand. Rbrake hoses
X Do not use hot water and do not wash the Relectrical components
vehicle in direct sunlight. Relectrical connections
X Use a soft car sponge.
Rseals
X Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. a car shampoo
Rdrive train, especially not at the intermedi-
approved for use with Sprinter vehicles.
ate bearing of the propeller shaft
X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gen-
Rrear view camera
tle jet of water.
X Do not point the water jet directly towards the
Keep a minimum distance of 1.6 ft(50 cm).
air inlets.
X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge Cleaning the engine
frequently. ! Water must not enter intake or ventilation
X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry openings. When cleaning with high pressure
thoroughly with a chamois. water or steam cleaners, the spray must not
X Do not let the cleaning agents dry on the be aimed directly at electrical components or
paintwork. the terminals of electrical lines.
When using the vehicle in winter, remove all Preserve the engine after the engine has been
traces of road salt deposits carefully and as cleaned. Protect the belt drive system from
soon as possible. exposure to the preservative agent.
Also observe the information under "Power
Power washers washers" (Y page 235).
G WARNING
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
to the tires or chassis components. Compo-
Z
236 Care
Cleaning the paintwork Before cleaning the windshield
! Do not affix: X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock

or remove it.
Rstickers
X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the
Rfilms windshield until you feel them engage.
Rmagnetic plates or similar items Before switching the ignition on again, fold
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise the windshield wipers back into position.
damage the paintwork. Cleaning the windows
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by X Clean the inside and outside of the windows
corrosion and damage caused by inadequate with a damp cloth and a cleaning agent that is
care cannot always be completely repaired. In recommended and approved for Sprinter
such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. vehicles.
X Remove impurities immediately, where pos-
sible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard.
X Soak insect remains with insect remover and Exterior
rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off Cleaning the wheels
the treated areas afterwards.
X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, ! Do not use any acidic or alkaline cleaning
fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a agents. They can cause corrosion on the
cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter wheel bolts (wheel nuts) or the retainer
fluid. springs for the wheel-balancing weights.
X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended
X Use silicone remover to remove wax. period straight after cleaning it, particularly
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
Cleaning the windows increased corrosion of the brake discs and
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
G WARNING should drive for a few minutes after cleaning.
You could become trapped by the windshield Braking heats the brake discs and the brake
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of can then be parked.
injury. If you clean the wheels with a power washer,
Always switch off the windshield wipers and observe the safety notes for the power washer
(Y page 235). You could otherwise damage the
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or tires.
wiper blades.
Cleaning the wiper blades
! Do not fold the windshield wipers away from
the windshield unless the hood is closed. Oth- G WARNING
erwise, you could damage the hood.
You could become trapped by the windshield
! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
back. The windshield could be damaged if the windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
injury.
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, Always switch off the windshield wipers and
solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
vents to clean the inside of the windows. Do
not touch the insides of the windows with wiper blades.
hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There
is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows.
Care 237
! Do not fold the windshield wipers away from If you clean the sensors with a power washer
the windshield unless the hood is closed. Oth- or steam cleaner, observe the information
erwise, you could damage the hood. provided by the manufacturer regarding the
distance to be maintained between the vehi-
! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the cle and the nozzle of the power washer.
wiper blade could be damaged.
! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do
not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graph-
ite coating could be damaged. This could
cause wiper noise.
! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
back. The windshield could be damaged if the
wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition
lock or remove the SmartKey.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the
windshield until you feel them engage. PARKTRONIC sensors (example: front bumper, left
X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp side of vehicle)
cloth. X Clean all sensors : in the front and rear
X Fold back the wiper arms before switching on bumpers with water, shampoo and a soft
the ignition. cloth.
Cleaning the exterior lighting Cleaning the rear view camera

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths ! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths and do
which are suitable for plastic light lenses. not scrub. You could otherwise scratch or
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths damage the lens of the reversing camera.
could scratch or damage the plastic light len- When cleaning the vehicle with a high-pres-
ses. sure or steam cleaner, observe a minimum
X Clean the plastic covers of the exterior light- distance of 1.6 ft (50 cm) to the rear view
ing with a damp sponge and a mild cleaning camera. Do not aim directly at the rear view
agent, e.g. car shampoo for Sprinter vehicles, camera. You could otherwise damage the rear
or with cleaning cloths. view camera.
Cleaning the mirror turn signal

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable
cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could
scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the
mirror turn signals.
X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn sig-
nals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet
sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. car
shampoo or cleaning cloths.
Rear view camera in the middle of the roof above
the high-mounted brake lamp
Cleaning the sensors
: Camera lens
! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths and do X Clean camera lens : with clean water and a
not scrub. You will otherwise scratch or dam- soft cloth.
age the sensors.
Z
238 Care
Make sure that you do not apply any wax to Keep step in the bumper : free from dirt, such
camera lens : when waxing the vehicle. If nec- as:
essary, remove the wax using water, shampoo Rmud
and a soft cloth.
Rclay
Rsnow
Cleaning the sliding door
Rice
X Remove foreign objects from the vicinity of X Clean access step in the bumper : with a
the contact surfaces and contact pins of the power washer.
sliding door.
X Clean the contact surfaces and contact pins
with a mild cleaning agent and a soft cloth. Cleaning the trailer tow hitch
Do not oil or grease the contact plates and con- ! Do not clean the ball coupling with a power
tact pins. washer. Do not use solvents.
! Observe the notes on care in the Operator's
Steps
Manual for the trailer tow hitch and the ball

coupling manufacturer.
Cleaning the electrical step
You can also have the maintenance work on the
Clean the electrically operated step at least ball coupling and the trailer tow hitch carried out
once a month. Make sure that no dirt accumu- by a qualified specialist workshop.
lates in the housing or on the step.
X Extend the electrical step (Y page 68).
X Close the sliding door until the door lock Interior
engages.
The electrical step remains extended for Cleaning the interior
cleaning.
X Clean the electrical step and the housing with ! When using liquids to clean the vehicle inte-
a power washer. rior, observe the following points:
X After cleaning, spray the step guides on each RUnder no circumstances use power wash-
side with silicone spray when the housing and ers.
electrical step are dry. RMake sure that no fluids enter or remain in
Do not use oil or grease as a lubricant. gaps and cavities.
X Retract the electrical step. REnsure sufficient ventilation when clean-
ing.
Access step in the bumper RMake sure that the vehicle interior is com-
pletely dry after cleaning.
Cleaning the display

! For cleaning, do not use any of the following:
Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline
Rabrasive cleaning agents
Rcommercially-available household cleaning
agents
These may damage the display surface. Do
not put pressure on the display surface when
cleaning. This could lead to irreparable dam-
Example: access step in the bumper
age to the display.
Pay attention to the important safety notes in
the "Notes on care" (Y page 234) and "Power
washers" (Y page 235) sections.
Care 239
X Switch off the audio equipment and let the X Wipe the trim elements with a damp, lint-free
display cool down. cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
X Clean the display surface with a commercially X Heavy soiling: use care products and clean-
available microfiber cloth and cleaner for ing agents recommended and approved for
TFT/LCD displays. Sprinter vehicles.
X Dry the display surface using a dry microfiber
cloth. Cleaning the seat covers
Cleaning the plastic trim ! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean artifi-
cial leather covers. If used often, a microfiber
G WARNING cloth can damage the cover.
Care products and cleaning agents containing ! Clean:
solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to Rartificialleather covers with a cloth mois-
become porous. As a result, plastic parts may tened with a solution containing 1% deter-
come loose in the event of air bag deploy- gent, e.g. dish washing liquid.

ment. There is a risk of injury. Rcloth covers with a microfiber cloth mois-
Do not use any care products and cleaning tened with a solution containing 1% deter-
gent, e.g. dish washing liquid. Wipe entire
agents to clean the cockpit. seat sections carefully to avoid leaving visi-
ble lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards.
! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces: Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt
Rstickers and how long it has been there.
Rfilms
Rscented oil bottles or similar items Cleaning the seat belts
You can otherwise damage the plastic.
G WARNING
! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or Seat belts can become severely weakened if
sunscreen to come into contact with the plas- bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat
tic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of
the surfaces. belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of
an accident. This poses an increased risk of
X Wipe the plastic trim and the cockpit with a
injury or fatal injury.
damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
X Heavy soiling: use a mild detergent or care Never bleach or dye the seat belts.
products and cleaning agents recommended
and approved by Mercedes-Benz. ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical
cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by
heating at temperatures above 176 ‡ (80 †)
Cleaning the steering wheel and selec- or in direct sunlight.
tor lever Remove any stains or dirt immediately. This will
X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth. avoid residue or damage.
X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution.
Cleaning the trim elements

Cleaning the headliner
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents
such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes X Use a soft brush or dry shampoo to remove
or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damag- heavy soiling.
ing the surface.
Z
240 Care
Cleaning the curtains

! The curtains must not be washed. Washing
could cause the curtains to shrink and lose
their fire-retardant properties. Always have
the curtains dry-cleaned.
Where will I find...? 241
Useful information Stowage compartment in the front-

passenger footwell
safety.
Where will I find...? Unlocking and removing the cover

Vehicle tool kit X Turn quick-release fastener : counter-clock-
wise or clockwise 2.
General notes
Breakdown assistance
X Slightly raise and pull out the cover.
The vehicle tool kit is in the stowage compart-

ment in the footwell on the front-passenger
side.
The vehicle tool kit consists of:
Ra towing eye
Ra screwdriver with Torx, Phillips and slotted
bits
If your vehicle is equipped with a spare wheel
bracket and a jack, the vehicle tool kit addition-
ally contains:
Ra lug wrench
Ra wrench Removing the vehicle tool kit and the jack
Ra pump lever rod X Remove vehicle tool kit A.
i The jack has a maximum weight of 7.5 kg X Pull up quick-release lever = and unhook the
depending on the vehicle's equipment. retaining strap of jack ?.
The maximum payload of the jack can be X Lift jack ? upwards out of the holder.
found on the sticker on the jack itself. i When stowing away the jack, place it in the
In the event of a malfunction, please contact a holder as shown in the illustration. Make sure
qualified specialist workshop. that the retaining strap of the jack is hooked
Jack maintenance in and tensioned.
Inserting and engaging the cover
X After use: clean all movable parts and grease
again. X Slide in the cover and fold it down.
X Every six months: extend and retract the X Press down quick-release fastener : until it
piston fully. engages.
242 Where will I find...?
Warning triangle and warning lamp X Lift warning triangle : up and out of the
bracket.
Removing the warning lamp
First-aid kit
X Turn the quick-release fasteners to position

2.
The cover is unlocked. X Turn the quick-release fasteners to position
X Lift up the cover. 2.
X Take warning lamp = out of the retainer. The cover is unlocked.
X Fold the cover up and turn the quick-release X Lift up the cover.
fasteners to position 1. X Take first-aid kit = out of the retainer.
The cover is locked. X Fold the cover up and turn the quick-release
fasteners to position 1.
Removing the warning triangle The cover is locked.
i Check the expiration date on the first-aid kit
at least once a year. Replace any expired or
missing contents.
Warning triangles at the back of the driver's seat

base
Jump-starting 243
Fire extinguisher G WARNING

Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Removing the fire extinguisher
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do
not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over
the battery. Keep children away from batter-
ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with
plenty of clean water and seek medical atten-
tion.
Do not use a rapid charging device to start the

vehicle. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,
the engine can be jump-started from another
vehicle or from a donor battery using jumper
cables. For this purpose, the vehicle has a jump-
starting connection point in the engine com-
Fire extinguisher at the front of the base of the co-
driver's seat partment.
The additional battery in the engine compart-
X Pull tabs ; upwards.
ment is not suitable for jump-starting opera-
X Take fire extinguisher : out of its holder. tions. If your vehicle requires jump-starting, or if
Please read the instructions on fire extin- you use it to jump-start another vehicle, use the
guisher : carefully and familiarize yourself with jump-starting connection point in the engine
its operation. Have fire extinguisher : refilled compartment.
after each use and checked every one or two When jump-starting, observe the following
years. It may otherwise fail in an emergency. points:
Observe the legal requirements for each indi- RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If
vidual country. the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,
jump-start the vehicle using a donor battery
or a jump-starting device.
Flat tire RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen.
Let the battery thaw first.
Information on breakdown assistance in the RJump-starting may only be performed from
case of a flat tire can be found in the chapter batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
"Wheels and tires" (Y page 267). ROnly use jumper cables that have a sufficient
cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
RIf the battery is fully discharged, attach the
Jump-starting battery of another vehicle for a few minutes
before attempting to start. This charges the
Important safety notes empty battery a little.
RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
G WARNING
Make sure that:
During charging and jump-starting, explosive
Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.
gases can escape from the battery. There is a
Rbare parts of the terminal clamps do not come
risk of an explosion.
into contact with other metal parts while the
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating jumper cables are connected to the battery.
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact
ventilation while charging and jump-starting. with parts such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
Do not lean over a battery. These parts move when the engine is started
and while it is running.
Z
244 Tow-starting and towing away
i Jumper cables and further information G WARNING

regarding jump starting can be obtained at
any qualified specialist workshop. When towing or tow-starting another vehicle
and its weight is greater than the permissible
gross weight of your vehicle, the:
Before connecting the jumper cables Rthe towing eye could detach itself
On vehicles with a battery main switch, check Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll-
whether the battery main switch is switched on over.
(Y page 118). There is a risk of an accident.
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,
X Move the selector lever of the automatic
its weight should not be greater than the per-
transmission to position P.
missible gross weight of your vehicle.
X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. audio
equipment, blower. Information on the gross vehicle weight can be
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock found on the vehicle identification plate
and remove it (Y page 119). (Y page 276).
! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the
towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could be

damaged.
Tow-starting and towing away ! Observe the following points when towing
Important safety notes with a tow rope:
RSecure the tow rope on the same side on
G WARNING both vehicles.
Functions relevant to safety are restricted or REnsure that the tow cable is not longer than
no longer available if: legally permitted. Mark the tow cable in the
middle, e.g. with a white cloth (30 x 30 cm).
Rthe engine is not running. This will make other road users aware that
Rthe brake system or the power steering is the vehicle is being towed.
malfunctioning. ROnly secure the tow cable to the towing
Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply

eye.
RObserve the brake lamps of the towing
or the vehicle's electrical system.
vehicle while driving. Always maintain a dis-
If your vehicle is being towed, much more tance so that the tow rope does not sag.
force may be necessary to steer or brake. RDo not use steel cables or chains to tow
There is a risk of an accident. your vehicle. You could otherwise damage
In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing, the vehicle.
make sure that the steering moves freely. ! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, this
could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover
G WARNING the vehicle with a crane.
You can no longer steer the vehicle if the ! When towing, pull away slowly and
steering wheel lock has been engaged. There smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the
is a risk of an accident. vehicles could be damaged.
Always switch off the ignition when towing the When towing away, you must observe the legal
vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar. requirements for the country in which you are
currently driving.
It is preferable to have the vehicle transported
on a transporter or trailer instead of towing it.
Tow-starting and towing away 245
The automatic transmission selector lever must Installing the front towing eye
be in the N position when towing the vehicle. X Take the towing eye and screwdriver from the
The battery must be connected and charged. vehicle tool kit (Y page 241).
Otherwise, you: X Press cover : and remove cover : from the
Rcannot turn the key in the ignition lock to opening.
position 2 You will see the fixture for the towing eye.
Rcannot move the selector lever to position N X Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the stop.
on vehicles with automatic transmission X Insert screwdriver into the towing eye and
Before the vehicle is towed, switch off the auto- tighten it.
matic locking feature (Y page 66). You could Removing the front towing eye
otherwise lock yourself out of the vehicle when
pushing or towing away the vehicle. X Remove the screwdriver from the vehicle tool
kit.
X Insert the screwdriver into the towing eye and
Installing/removing the towing eye turn the screwdriver counter-clockwise.
X Unscrew the towing eye.
X Insert cover : with the lug at the bottom and
press it in at the top until it engages.
X Place the towing eye and screwdriver back in
the vehicle tool kit.
Towing away in the event of malfunc-

tions
Front or rear axle damage on all-wheel-
drive vehicles
The fixture for the front towing eye is located in the
bumper. ! For vehicles with all-wheel drive, all four
wheels must be raised for towing away. Oth-
erwise, you may damage the transfer case.
If the vehicle can only be raised by the front
axle, you must remove the propeller shaft
between the rear axle and the transfer case.
Always use new bolts when installing the pro-
peller shaft.
If the vehicle has front or rear axle damage, have
it transported on a transporter or trailer.
With transmission damage

Rear towing eye under the bumper, attached to the ! Always use new bolts when installing the
chassis propeller shafts.
Your vehicle may be equipped with rear towing i Only have the propeller shafts fitted or
eye ;. If you tow or tow-start a vehicle, attach removed by qualified, skilled personnel.
the towing device to rear towing eye ;. If the vehicle has transmission damage, have the
If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer tow propeller shaft removed before towing away.
hitch, attach the towing device to the trailer tow
hitch (Y page 154).
Z
246 Tow-starting and towing away
Towing with the front or rear axle Towing the vehicle with both axles on
raised the ground
General notes Important safety notes
! The ignition must be switched off if the vehi- G WARNING
cle is being towed with the front or rear axle
You can no longer steer the vehicle if the
raised. Otherwise, ESP® may intervene and
damage the brake system. steering wheel lock has been engaged. There
is a risk of an accident.
! Always use new bolts when installing the Always switch off the ignition when towing the
propeller shafts.
vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.
i Only have the propeller shafts installed and
removed by qualified, skilled personnel. ! Do not exceed a towing speed of 31 mph
Observe the following before towing a vehicle (50 km/h). You could otherwise damage the
with a raised front or rear axle: transmission.
Rthe information on towing in the event of mal- i Only have the propeller shafts fitted and
functions (Y page 245) and removed by qualified, skilled personnel.
Rthe important safety notes (Y page 244). Before towing the vehicle, observe the follow-
If the front axle is damaged, raise the vehicle at ing:
the front axle and if the rear axle is damaged, Rthe information on towing in the event of mal-
raise the vehicle at the rear axle. functions (Y page 245) and
Rthe important safety notes (Y page 244).
Towing
If the front axle is raised, the vehicle may be Towing
towed a maximum of 30 miles (50 km). For a
towing distance of over 30 miles (50 km), the You may only tow the vehicle a maximum dis-
propeller shafts to the driven axles must be tance of 30 miles (50 km). For a towing distance
removed. of over 30 miles (50 km), the propeller shafts to
the driven axles must be removed.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
depressed.
N.
N.
X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock
X Release the brake pedal.
and leave it in this position.
X Release the parking brake.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 85). X Leave the key in position 2 in the ignition lock.
X Release the brake pedal. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
X Release the parking brake.
(Y page 85).
X Do not exceed the towing speed of 30 mph
X If the front axle is raised, do not exceed the
towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) and the (50 km/h) and the towing distance of
towing distance of 30 miles (50 km). 30 miles (50 km).
Recovering a vehicle that is stuck

! When recovering a vehicle that has become
stuck, pull it as smoothly and evenly as pos-
sible. Excessive tractive power could damage
the vehicles.
Electrical fuses 247
If the drive wheels get trapped on loose or

muddy ground, recover the vehicle with the
utmost care. This is especially the case if the
vehicle is laden.
Never attempt to recover a vehicle with a trailer
attached.
Pull out the vehicle backwards, if possible, using
the tracks it made when it became stuck.
Transporting the vehicle

! You may only secure the vehicle by the
wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as
axle or steering components. Otherwise, the
vehicle could be damaged.
Tow-starting (emergency engine
starting)
Vehicles with automatic transmission
! Vehicles with automatic transmission must
not be tow-started. You could otherwise dam-
age the automatic transmission.
You can find information on jump-starting under
"Jump-starting“ (Y page 243).
Electrical fuses
The fuse allocation chart and further information

on the electric fuses and relays can be found in
the "Fuse allocation chart" supplement.
Z
248 Operation
Useful information Before purchasing and using non-approved

accessories, visit a qualified specialist work-
shop and inquire about:
well as standard and optional equipment of your Rsuitability
vehicle that were available at the time of going Rlegal stipulations
to print. Country-specific variations are possi- Rfactory recommendations
Contact an authorized Sprinter dealer if you
require information on tested and recommen-
ded wheels and tires for summer and winter
safety.
driving. Advice on purchasing and caring for
Read the information on qualified specialist tires is also available there.
Information on tire and wheel dimensions and
types as well as the recommended tire pressure
for your vehicle can be found in the "Tire pres-
Important safety notes sure" section (Y page 257).
This data can also be found on the Tire and
G Warning Loading Information placard on the B-pillar.
A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer- Modifications to the brake system or wheels are
not permitted. The use of a spacer and brake
ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.
dust shields is not permitted. This invalidates
There is a risk of an accident. the general operating permit for the vehicle.
do not drive with a flat tire. Immediately
i Further information on wheels and tires can
replace the flat tire with your spare wheel, or be obtained at any qualified specialist work-
consult a qualified specialist workshop. shop.
Wheels and tires
G WARNING
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, Operation
the wheel brakes or suspension components
may be damaged. There is a risk of an acci- Information for a journey
dent. If the vehicle is heavily laden, check the tire
Always replace wheels and tires with those pressures, and correct them, if necessary
(Y page 251).
that fulfill the specifications of the original
part. While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises
and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pull-
When replacing wheels, make sure to use the ing to one side. This may indicate that the
correct: wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that
a tire is defective, reduce your speed immedi-
Rdesignation
ately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to
Rmodel check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden
When replacing tires, make sure to use the tire damage could also be causing the unusual
correct: handling characteristics. If you find no signs of
damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a
Rdesignation qualified specialist workshop.
Rmanufacturer When parking your vehicle, make sure that the
tires do not get deformed by the curb or other
Rmodel
obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over curbs,
speed humps or similar elevations, try to do so
Accessories that are not approved for your vehi- slowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise, the
cle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used cor- tires, particularly the sidewalls, can get dam-
rectly can impair operating safety. aged.
Operation 249
Regular wheel and tire checks speed is not adapted to suit the driving con-
ditions. There is a risk of accident.
G WARNING
If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres- may exhibit different levels of wear at differ-
sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, you
your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. should regularly check the tread depth and
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage the condition of the tread across the entire
and replace any damaged tires immediately. width of all tires.
Check the wheels and tires of your vehicle for Minimum tire tread depth for:
damage regularly, i.e. at least every two weeks, RSummer tires: â in (3 mm)
as well as after driving off-road or on rough RM+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tire
pressure. Pay particular attention to damage For safety reasons, replace the tires before
such as: the legally prescribed limit for the minimum
Rcuts in the tires tire tread depth is reached.
Rpunctures
Rtears in the tires
Rbulges on tires
Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the
condition of the tread across the whole width of
the tire (Y page 249). If necessary, turn the
Wheels and tires

front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the
inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the
valve against dirt and moisture. Do not install
anything onto the valve other than the standard
valve cap or other valve caps approved for your Bar marking : for tread wear is integrated into
vehicle by dealers listed on the inside of the the tire tread.
front cover. Do not install any other valve caps Tread wear indicators (TWIs) are required by
or systems, e.g. tire pressure monitor systems. law. Six indicators are positioned over the tire
Regularly check the pressure of all the tires, tread. They are visible once the tread depth is
particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire approximately á in. (1.6 mm). If this is the
pressure if necessary (Y page 251). case, the tire is so worn that it must be replaced.
The service life of tires depends on various fac-
tors, including the following:
RDriving style Selecting, mounting and replacing
RTire pressure tires
RMileage ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same type
and make.
ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the
Tire tread wheels.
RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for the
G WARNING first 65 miles (100 km).
Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.
The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.
This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk
of hydroplaning increases, in particular where
Z
250 Operation in winter
RDo not drive with tires which have too little be severely affected. There is a risk of an acci-
tread depth, as this significantly reduces the dent.
traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).
RReplace the tires after six years at the latest, In order to reduce risks:
regardless of wear. This also applies to the Ryou should therefore adapt your driving
spare wheel. style and drive carefully.
Rnever mount more than one spare wheel
that differs from the wheel to be replaced.
Operation in winter
Ronly use a spare wheel that differs from the
General notes wheel to be replaced for a short time.
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified Rdo not deactivate ESP®.
specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Rhave a spare wheel that differs from the
Prior to the onset of winter, ensure that snow wheel that has been changed replaced at
chains are stowed in the vehicle (Y page 251). the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Also observe the notes in the "Changing a You must observe the correct wheel and
wheel" section (Y page 267).
tire dimensions as well as the wheel type.
Regularly check the vehicle and remove snow or
ice when traveling in wintry conditions.
G WARNING
An accumulation of snow and ice, particularly
when frozen, caught in the area around the air M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than
intake slots, moving parts, the axles and the ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter
wheel arches may: and do not provide sufficient traction. There is
Wheels and tires
Rrestrict air intake

Rdamage vehicle parts M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in
Rcause malfunctions by restricting the mobility (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
intended by the design (e.g. reduced possible
steering input). Use winter tires or all-season tires at tempera-
If there is any damage, inform a qualified spe- tures below 45 ‡ (+7 †). Both types of tire are
cialist workshop. identified by the M+S marking.
Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake
symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide
Driving with summer tires the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.
Only these tires will allow driving safety systems
At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in
tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and winter. These tires have been developed specif-
braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle ically for driving in snow.
to M+S tire. Using summer tires at very cold
For safe driving, use M+S tires of the same make
temperatures could cause tears to form,
and tread pattern on all wheels.
thereby damaging the tires permanently. We
cannot accept responsibility for this type of Always observe the maximum permissible
damage. speed specified for the M+S tires you have
mounted.
If you install M+S tires that have a lower maxi-
M+S tires mum permissible speed than the maximum per-
missible speed of the vehicle, affix an appropri-
G WARNING ate warning sign in the driver's field of vision.
You can obtain this at a qualified specialist work-
Wheel and tire dimensions as well as the type shop.
of tire can vary between the spare wheel and
the wheel to be replaced. When the spare
wheel is mounted, driving characteristics may
Tire pressure 251
Once you have mounted the winter tires: snow chains, note the permissible tire and
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 251).
snow chain dimensions.
RMount snow chains only in pairs and only to
X Reactivate the tire pressure moni-
the rear wheels. On vehicles with twin tires,
tor* (Y page 256).
mount the snow chains to the outer wheels.
Observe the manufacturer's mounting
instructions.
Snow chains RVehicles with all-wheel-drive: snow chains
are not permitted on the front axle. There is
G WARNING not sufficient space for commercially-availa-
If you drive too fast with snow chains moun- ble snow chains. Information about snow
ted, they may snap. As a result, you could chains for all-wheel-drive vehicles can be
injure others and damage the vehicle. There is obtained from an authorized Sprinter Dealer.
ROnly use snow chains when the road is cov-
ered by a layer of snow. Remove the snow
Observe the maximum permissible speed for chains as soon as possible when you come to
operation with snow chains. a road that is not snow-covered.
RThe use of snow chains may be restricted by
When driving with snow chains installed, do not local regulations. Observe the appropriate
exceed the maximum permissible speed of regulations before mounting snow chains.
30 mph (50 km/h). Observe the country-spe- RActivate all-wheel drive before driving off with
cific laws and regulations for operation with
snow chains (Y page 147).
snow chains.
RWhen driving with snow chains installed, do
! Check the snow chains for damage before not exceed the maximum permissible speed
mounting them. Damaged or worn snow of 30 mph (50 km/h).
Wheels and tires

chains may snap and damage the following RCheck the tension of the chains after a dis-
components: tance of approximately 0.5 miles (1.0 km).
Rwheel You can deactivate ASR (Y page 55) when pull-
Rwheel housing ing away with snow chains mounted. This allows
Rwheel suspension the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, ach-
ieving an increased driving force (cutting
For this reason, you must use only snow action).
chains that are free of defects. Observe the
manufacturer's mounting instructions.
! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you mount Tire pressure
snow chains on steel wheels, you may dam-
age the hub caps. Remove the hub caps from Tire pressure specifications
the relevant wheels before mounting the
snow chains. Important safety notes
Snow chains increase traction on roads in wintry G WARNING
conditions.
For reasons of safety we only recommend using Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the
snow chains or traction aids that are approved following risks:
for the Sprinter. The snow chains or traction aids Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load
must be of class U or meet the SAE type U
specification. Information on snow chains is and vehicle speed increase.
available at any qualified specialist workshop. Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or
When mounting snow chains, please bear the unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
following points in mind: traction.
RSnow chains cannot be mounted on all Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-
wheel/tire combinations. When mounting the ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.
* optional Z
252 Tire pressure
There is a risk of an accident. Tire and Loading Information placard

Follow recommended tire inflation pressures
and check the pressure of all the tires includ-
ing the spare wheel:
Rmonthly, at least
Rif the load changes
Rbefore beginning a long journey
Runder different operating conditions, e.g.
off-road driving
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
i The specifications shown on the sample Tire Example: Tire and Loading Information placard4
and Loading Information placard and tire The Tire and Loading Information placard is on
pressure plate are examples. Tire pressure the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle
data are vehicle-specific and may deviate (Y page 259).
from the data illustrated here. The tire pres-
sure data applicable to your vehicle can be The Tire and Loading Information placard con-
found on the Tire and Loading Information tains recommended tire pressures : for cold
placard or tire pressure plate of your vehicle. tires. Recommended tire pressures : are valid
for the maximum permissible load and up to the
H Environmental note maximum permissible speed of the vehicle.
Check the tire pressure regularly, at least
Tire pressure plate
Wheels and tires
every 14 days.
General notes
You will find information on tire pressure for the
vehicle's factory-mounted tires on the plates
described here.
The recommended tire pressure can be found
on the Tire and Loading Information placard4 or
the tire pressure table on the B-pillar on the
driver's side of your vehicle.
Further information on tire pressure can be
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Example: tire pressure table
The tire pressure plate is located on the B-pillar
on the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 259).
The tire pressure table contains recommended
tire pressures for cold tires. Recommended tire
pressures are valid for the maximum permissi-
ble load and up to the maximum permissible
speed of the vehicle.
4 Only for vehicles with a gross vehicle weight of less than 10,000 lbs (4,536 kg)
Tire pressure 253
Important notes on tire pressure Observe the recommended tire pressures for
cold tires:
G WARNING Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard5
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the on the B-pillar on the driver's side, or
wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire Ron the tire pressure plate on the B-pillar on the
pressure that is too low may result in a tire driver's side of the vehicle
blow-out. There is a risk of an accident.
RCheck the tire for foreign objects.
Underinflated or overinflated tires
RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the
valve is leaking. Underinflated tires:
If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-
tact a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
Tires with pressure that is too low can over-
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,
pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-
not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-
pressure. On vehicles equipped with the elec-
ing properties and the driving characteristics.
tronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressure
can be checked using the on-board computer. There is a risk of an accident.
The tire temperature and pressure increase Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the
when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent tires, including the spare wheel.
on the driving speed and the load.
Therefore, you should only correct tire pressure Underinflated tires can:
Wheels and tires

when the tires are cold. Rfail
from being overheated
The tires are cold: Radverselyaffect handling
Rif the vehicle has been parked for at least Rwear excessively and/or unevenly
three hours without direct sunlight on the Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption
tires, and
Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than
Overinflated tires
1 mile (1.6 km)
Tire temperature changes depending on the G WARNING
ambient temperature, driving speed and tire
Tires with excessively high pressure can burst
load. If the tire temperature changes by 18 ‡
(10 †), the tire pressure changes by approx- because they are damaged more easily by
imately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they
account when checking the pressure of warm also suffer from irregular wear, which can
tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is too low severely impair the braking properties and the
for the current operating conditions. If you driving characteristics. There is a risk of an
check the tire pressure when the tires are warm, accident.
it results in a higher value than when the tires
are cold. This is normal. Do not under any cir- Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the
cumstances release the air in order to adjust the tires, including the spare wheel.
pressure to the prescribed value for cold tires.
The tire pressure would otherwise be too low. Overinflated tires can:
Rincreasethe braking distance
Radverselyaffect handling
Rwear excessively and/or unevenly
5 Only for vehicles with a gross weight of less than 10,000 lbs (4,536 kg).
Z
254 Tire pressure
Radversely affect ride comfort Checking the tire pressure manually

Rbe more susceptible to damage
In order to determine and adjust the tire pres-
sures, proceed as follows:
Maximum tire pressures
X Remove the valve cap of the tire you wish to
check.
X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto
the valve.
X Read the tire pressure and compare it with the
recommended value on the loading informa-
tion table or the tire pressure table
(Y page 251).
X If the tire pressure is too low, increase it to the
recommended value.
X If the tire pressure is too high, release air by
pressing down the metal pin in the valve. Use
: Maximum permitted tire pressure (example) the tip of a pen, for example. Then, check the
tire pressure again using the tire pressure
Never exceed the maximum permissible tire gauge.
inflation pressure. When adjusting the tire pres- X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
sures always observe the recommended tire
X Repeat the steps for the other tires.
pressure for your vehicle (Y page 251).
i The actual values for tires are specific to
each vehicle and may deviate from the values
Tire pressure monitor
Wheels and tires
in the illustration.
Tire valve G WARNING
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
G WARNING
should be checked at least once a month
Tire valve that are not approved for your vehi- when cold and inflated to the pressure rec-
cle by the distributor named on the inside ommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
cover page may result in a loss of tire pres- the Tire and Loading Information placard on
sure. This may affect road safety. There is a the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure
risk of an accident. label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your
Only use tire valve that are approved for your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
vehicle by the distributor named on the inside size indicated on the Tire and Loading Infor-
cover page. Always make sure you have the mation placard or the tire pressure label, you
correct tire valve type for the tires on your should determine the proper tire pressure for
vehicle. those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
! Do not screw additional weights (check
valves, etc.) onto the tire valves. The elec- been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
tronic components could thus be damaged. system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-
sure telltale when one or more of your tires
Only for vehicles without a tire pressure moni-
tor: are significantly underinflated. Accordingly,
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates,
mends that you only use tire valves that have you should stop and check your tires as soon
been tested for use on your vehicle. as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly underin-
Tire pressure 255
flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can You should always adjust the tire pressure
lead to tire failure. Underinflation also according to the vehicle load. Restart the tire
pressure monitor if you change the tire pres-
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and sure.
may affect the vehicle's handling and stop- The tire pressure monitor does not warn you if a
ping ability. tire pressure is incorrect. Observe the notes on
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute the recommended tire pressure (Y page 251).
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv- The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you
er's responsibility to maintain correct tire of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. following pen-
pressure, even if underinflation has not etration by a foreign object. In this event, brake
the vehicle until it comes to a standstill. Do not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the
carry out any sudden steering maneuvers.
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
The tire pressure monitor has a yellow h
USA only: warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indi-
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a cating pressure loss/malfunctions (USA) or
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if the pressure loss (Canada). Depending on how the
warning lamp flashes or lights up, an underin-
system is not operating properly. The TPMS
flated tire or a malfunction in the tire pressure
malfunction indicator is combined with the monitor is displayed:
low tire pressure telltale. When the system
Rif the h warning lamp is lit continuously,
detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will the tire pressure on one or more tires is sig-
flash for approximately a minute and then nificantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is
remain continuously illuminated. This not malfunctioning.
sequence will be repeated every time the vehi- RUSA only: if the h warning lamp flashes for
cle is started as long as the malfunction 60 seconds and then remains lit constantly,
Wheels and tires

exists. the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, Only vehicles with steering wheel buttons: the
the system may not be able to detect or signal on-board computer displays information on tire
pressure. After a few minutes of driving, the cur-
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc- rent tire pressure of each tire is shown in the on-
tions may occur for a variety of reasons, board computer.
including the mounting of incompatible USA only: if the tire pressure monitor is mal-
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on functioning, it may be more than 10 minutes
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func- before the malfunction is shown. The h tire
tioning properly. Always check the TPMS mal- pressure warning lamp flashes for 60 seconds
function telltale after replacing one or more and then remains lit. When the malfunction has
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that been rectified, the h tire pressure warning
lamp goes out after a few minutes of driving.
the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
The tire pressure values indicated by the on-
allow the TPMS to continue to function prop- board computer may differ from those meas-
erly. ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. The
tire pressures shown by the on-board computer
Vehicles with a tire pressure monitor are equip- refer to those measured at sea level. At high
ped with sensors in the wheels that monitor the altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a
tire pressure of all four tires. The tire pressure pressure gauge are higher than those shown by
monitor monitors the pressure in all four tires; the on-board computer. In this case, do not
you set this pressure when you activate the tire reduce the tire pressures.
pressure monitor. The tire pressure monitor
If radio transmitting equipment (e.g. wireless
warns you when the pressure drops in one or
headphones, two-way radios) is operated inside
more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only
the vehicle or in the vicinity of the vehicle, this
functions if the corresponding sensors are
can interfere with the operation of the tire pres-
installed on all wheels.
sure monitor.
Z
256 Tire pressure
Checking the tire pressure electroni- The tire pressure of the affected wheel is high-
cally (vehicles with steering wheel but- lighted in yellow in the on-board computer.
tons)
Restarting the tire pressure monitor
When you restart the tire pressure monitor, the
currently set tire pressures are taken as refer-
ence values for monitoring.
In most cases, the tire pressure monitor detects
the new reference values automatically, e.g.
after you have:
Rchanged the tire pressure
Tire pressure display
Rchanged wheels or tires
Rinstalled new wheels or tires
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. However, you can also define reference values
X Press the V or U button repeatedly manually as described here.
until the standard display is shown Before restarting the tire pressure monitor:
(Y page 166).
X Press the 9 or : button repeatedly X Set the tire pressure to the value recommen-
until the current pressure of the individual ded on the Tire and Loading Information plac-
tires is shown in the display. ard or the tire pressure table on the B-pillar on
the driver's side (Y page 251).
If the vehicle is parked for longer than Observe the notes on tire pressure when
20 minutes or you then drive at less than 18 mph doing so (Y page 251).
(30 km/h), the Tire pres. displayed
Wheels and tires
X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on

after driving for several minutes mes-
sage appears. all four wheels.
Restarting the tire pressure monitor (vehi-
i The tire pressure value shown in the display cles without steering wheel buttons):
may differ from those measured at a gas sta-
tion using a pressure gauge. The on-board X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.
computer will generally give you a more exact X Press the 4 menu button on the instrument
value. cluster repeatedly until the display shows the
following message:
Tire pressure loss warning system +CAL- TPMS
X Press the f button on the instrument clus-
Vehicles with steering wheel buttons ter.
If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure The display shows:
loss in one or more tires, the on-board computer OK TPMS
displays the yellow Tire pres. Adjust pres. The tire pressure monitor activation process
warning message. The h tire pressure loss has begun. The tire pressure measured for the
warning lamp in the instrument cluster individual wheels are stored as the new ref-
(Y page 202) flashes for about 60 seconds and erence values, provided that the tire pressure
then remains lit. monitor considers them to be plausible.
The tire pressure of the affected wheel is high- If you wish to cancel the restart:
lighted in yellow in the on-board computer.
If the tire pressure monitor detects a significant X Press the g button or the 4 menu button on
pressure loss in one or more tires, the on-board the instrument cluster.
computer displays the red Tire pres. Warn‐ The activation process is canceled automati-
ing Tire defect warning message. The h cally if 30 seconds elapse without input.
tire pressure loss warning lamp in the instru-
ment cluster (Y page 202) flashes for about 60
seconds and then remains lit. An additional
Tire pressure 257
Restarting the tire pressure monitor (vehi- Monitor current tire pressure?
cles with steering wheel buttons): X Press the W button on the steering wheel.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. The display shows the following message:
X Press the V or U button on the steering Tire pres. monitor reactivated
wheel until the standard display (Y page 166) The tire pressure monitor activation process
appears in the display. has begun. The tire pressure measured for the
X Press the 9 or : button on the steering individual wheels are stored as the new ref-
wheel repeatedly until the current pressure of erence values, provided that the tire pressure
the individual tires is displayed or the display monitor considers them to be plausible.
shows the following message: If you wish to cancel the restart:
Tire pres. displayed after driving
for several minutes X Press the X button on the steering wheel.
X Press the 9 reset button on the instrument
cluster.
The display shows the following message:
Tire pressure table

Front axle tire pressure values: the following tire pressure values only apply to vehicles with a
permissible front axle load of 3970 lbs (1801 kg), 4080 lbs (1851 kg), 4100 lbs (1860 kg) or 4410 lbs
(2000 kg).
Tires/disc wheel Front axle load
Wheels and tires

3970 lbs 4080 lbs 4410 lbs
(1801 kg) (1851 kg) (2000 kg)
4100 lbs
(1860 kg)
205/75 R 16 C 110/108R — 400 kPa 420 kPa
6.5J x 16 ET 626 (4.0 bar/58 psi) (4.2 bar/61 psi)
LT 215/85 R 16 115/112N — 380 kPa 420 kPa

5.5Jx16 (3.8 bar/55 psi) (4.2 bar/61 psi)
Half distance between centers: 4.94 in
(125.5 mm)
LT 215/85 R 16 115/112Q — 380 kPa 420 kPa
5.5Jx16 (3.8 bar/55 psi) (4.2 bar/61 psi)
(125.5 mm)
LT 245/75 R 16 120/116N 340 kPa — —
6.5J x 16 (3.4 bar/49 psi)
Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)
6 Vehicles with Super Single tires.
Z
258 Tire pressure
Tires/disc wheel Front axle load

3970 lbs 4080 lbs 4410 lbs
(1801 kg) (1851 kg) (2000 kg)
4100 lbs
(1860 kg)
LT 245/75 R 16 120/116Q 340 kPa — —
6.5J x 16 (3.4 bar/49 psi)
235/65 R 16 C 121N (118R) — 380 kPa 420 kPa
6.5J x 16 (3.8 bar/55 psi) (4.2 bar/61 psi)
Spare wheel for vehicles with
Super Single tires
Rear axle tire pressure values: the following tire pressure values only apply to vehicles with a
permissible rear axle load of 5360 lbs (2431 kg), 7060 lbs (3202 kg) or 7720 lbs (3502 kg).
Tires/disc wheel Rear axle load
5360 lbs 7060 lbs 7720 lbs
(2431 kg) (3202 kg) (3502 kg)
LT 215/85 R 16 115/112N — 380 kPa 420 kPa
Wheels and tires
5.5Jx16 (3.8 bar/55 psi) (4.2 bar/61 psi)

(125.5 mm)
LT 215/85 R 16 115/112Q — 380 kPa 420 kPa
5.5Jx16 (3.8 bar/55 psi) (4.2 bar/61 psi)
(125.5 mm)
LT 245/75 R 16 120/116N 480 kPa — —
6.5J x 16 (4.8 bar/70 psi)
285/65 R 16 C 128/126N (121R) — 450 kPa —
285/65 R 16 C 128/126 N (123 R)7 (4.5 bar/65 psi)
8.5J x 16 ET 63
235/65 R 16 C 121N (118R) — 520 kPa —
6.5J x 16 (5.2 bar/75 psi)
Spare wheel for vehicles with
Super Single tires
7 Super Single tires.

Loading the vehicle 259
Loading the vehicle maximum gross axle weight rating for the
front or rear axle.
Instruction labels for tires and loads
G WARNING Tire and Loading Information placard
Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a
blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the General notes
steering and driving characteristics and lead Only vehicles with a gross weight of less than
to brake failure. There is a risk of accident. 10,000 lbs (4,536 kg) have a Tire and Loading
Observe the load rating of the tires. The load Information placard on the B-pillar on the driv-
rating must be at least half of the GAWR of er's side.
your vehicle. Never overload the tires by
exceeding the maximum load. Maximum permissible gross vehicle
weight rating
Wheels and tires

The Tire and Loading Information placard on the : Maximum number of seats
driver’s door B-pillar
; Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight
Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the rating
maximum possible load.
X Specification for maximum gross vehicle
(1) Only for vehicles with a gross weight of less weight ; is listed in the Tire and Loading
than 10,000 lbs (4,536 kg): Information placard: "The gross weight of
Tire and Loading Information placard : is occupants and luggage must not exceed XXX
on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Tire and kilograms or XXX lbs."
Loading Information placard : shows the The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, cargo,
permissible number of occupants and the luggage and trailer load/noseweight (if applica-
maximum permissible load of the vehicle. It ble) must not exceed the specified value.
also contains details of the tire sizes and
corresponding pressures for tires mounted i The details on the Tire and Loading Infor-
at the factory. mation placard illustration are only an exam-
(2) The vehicle identification plate is located on ple. The maximum permissible gross vehicle
the base of the driver's seat. The vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific and may dif-
identification plate informs you of the gross fer from that which is illustrated. You can find
vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the the valid maximum permissible gross vehicle
vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the weight rating for your vehicle on the Tire and
fuel and the cargo. You can also find infor- Loading Information placard.
mation about the maximum Gross Axle
Weight Rating on the front and rear axle.
The maximum gross axle weight rating is
the maximum weight that can be carried by
one axle (front or rear axle). Do not exceed
the maximum gross vehicle weight or the
Z
260 Loading the vehicle
Number of seats Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 in

accordance with the "National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".
X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's
Tire and Loading Information placard.
X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be travel-
ing in your vehicle.
X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or
XXX lbs.
: Maximum number of seats X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the avail-
; Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight able amount of cargo and luggage load capa-
rating city. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 pound
Maximum number of seats : determines the passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
maximum number of occupants allowed to available cargo and luggage load capacity is
travel in the vehicle. This information can be 650 lbs (1400 Ò 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
found on the Tire and Loading Information plac-
ard. X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-
i The details on the Tire and Loading Infor- cle. For reasons of safety, that weight must
mation placard illustration are only an exam- not exceed the available cargo and luggage
ple. The number of seats is vehicle-specific
Wheels and tires
cargo capacity calculated in step 4.

and can differ from the details shown. The X Step 6 (if applicable): If you intend to tow a
number of seats in your vehicle can be found trailer behind your vehicle, the load on the
on the Tire and Loading Information placard. trailer is transferred to your vehicle. Please
consult the Tire and Loading Information plac-
Determining the maximum load ard, to determine how this reduces the avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity of your
Individual steps vehicle.
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Example: Steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples of how to calculate total load and cargo capacities with varying
seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a maximum
load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the
actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard .
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Step 1 Combined maximum 1500 lbs 1500 lbs 1500 lbs
weight of occupants (680 kg) (680 kg) (680 kg)
and cargo (data from
the Tire and Loading
Information placard)
Loading the vehicle 261

Step 2 Number of people in 5 3 1
the vehicle (driver and
occupants)
Distribution of the Front: 2 Front: 1 Front: 1
occupants Rear: 3 Rear: 2
Weight of the occu- Occupant 1: Occupant 1: Occupant 1:
pants 150 lbs (68 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
Occupant 2: Occupant 2:
180 lbs (82 kg) 190 lbs (86 kg)
Occupant 3: Occupant 3:
160 lbs (73 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
Occupant 4:
140 lbs (63 kg)
Occupant 5:
120 lbs (54 kg)
Gross weight of all 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
occupants
Wheels and tires

Step 3 Permissible cargo and 1500 lbs 1500 lbs 1500 lbs
trailer load/nose- (680 kg) Ò750 lbs (680 kg) Ò540 lbs (680 kg) Ò150 lbs
weight (maximum (340 kg) = (245 kg) = (68 kg) =
gross vehicle weight 750 lbs (340 kg) 960 lbs (435 kg) 1350 lbs
rating from the Tire (612 kg)
and Loading Informa-
tion placard minus the
gross weight of all
occupants)
The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.
Further information can be found under "Towing a trailer" (Y page 158).
Vehicle identification plate Gross axle weight rating: the maximum per-
missible load that can be carried by one axle
Even if you have calculated the total cargo care- (front or rear axle).
fully, you should still make sure that the gross To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the
vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight maximum permissible values (gross vehicle
rating are not exceeded. Details about this can weight and maximum gross axle weight rating),
be found on the vehicle identification plate on have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occu-
the driver seat frame of your vehicle pants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable)
(Y page 276). weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge.
Gross vehicle weight: the gross weight of the
vehicle, all passengers, cargo and trailer load/
noseweight (if applicable) must not exceed the
permissible gross vehicle weight.
Z
262 What you should know about wheels and tires
Trailer load/noseweight Tire size designation, load bearing index

and speed index
The trailer load/noseweight affects the gross
weight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached, the G WARNING
trailer load/noseweight is included in the load
along with occupants and luggage. The trailer Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-
load/noseweight is usually approximately 10% city and the approved maximum speed could
of the gross weight of the trailer and its load. lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There
is a risk of accident.
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
What you should know about wheels approved for your vehicle model. Observe the
and tires tire load rating and speed rating required for
Tire labeling your vehicle.
Overview
Wheels and tires
: Design standard
; Tire width
= Nominal aspect ratio in %
? Tire code
A Rim diameter
B Load bearing index
C Speed index
: DOT, Tire Identification Number General: depending on the manufacturer's
(Y page 264) standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may
; Maximum tire load (Y page 264) not contain any letters or may contain one let-
= Maximum tire pressure (Y page 254) ter : that precedes the size description
? Manufacturer If "LT" precedes the size description (as shown
A Tire material (Y page 264) above): these are light truck tires according to
B Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity U.S. manufacturing standards.
and speed index (Y page 262) If "C" precedes the size description: these are
C Tire name commercial motor vehicle tires according to
European manufacturing standards.
The markings described above are on the tire in
addition to the tire name (sales designation) and Tire width: tire width ; shows the nominal tire
the manufacturer's name. width in millimeters.
Aspect ratio: aspect ratio = is the size ratio
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate between the tire height and tire width and is
from the data in the example. shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calculated
by dividing the tire width by the tire height.
What you should know about wheels and tires 263
Tire code: tire code ? specifies the tire type. i Not all tires that have the M+S identification
"R" represents radial tires. "D" represents diag- offer the driving characteristics of winter
onal tires, "B" represents diagonal radial tires. tires. In addition to the M+S marking, winter
Rim diameter: rim diameter A is the diameter tires also have the i snowflake symbol on
of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the
flange. The rim diameter is specified in requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers
inches (in). Association (RMA) and the Rubber Associa-
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index B is a tion of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire trac-
numerical code that specifies the maximum tion on snow. They have been especially
load-bearing capacity of a tire. developed for driving on snow.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the Further information on the reading of tire infor-
specified load limit. The maximum permissible mation can be obtained at any qualified special-
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and ist workshop.
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side (Y page 259). Load index
Example:
The load-bearing index 120 indicates a maxi-
mum load of 3,042 lb (1,380 kg) for the tire. If
two load-bearing capacity indices are specified
(as shown above), the first number states the
load-bearing capacity for single tires, the sec-
ond number the load-bearing capacity for twin
tires. For further information on the maximum
tire load in kilograms and pounds, see
(Y page 264).
Wheels and tires

For further information on the load-bearing
index, see "Load index" (Y page 263).
Speed rating: speed rating C specifies the
In addition to the load-bearing index, load rat-
approved maximum speed of the tire.
ing : may be imprinted after the letters that
Regardless of the speed index always observe identify speed rating on the sidewall of the tire
the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your (Y page 262).
driving style to the traffic conditions. RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate example above), represents a standard load
from the data in the example. (SL) tire
RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire
Index Speed rating RLight Load: represents a light load tire
F up to 50 mph (80 km/h) RC, D, E: represents a load range that depends
on the maximum load that the tire can carry at
G up to 56 mph (90 km/h) a certain pressure
J up to 62 mph (100 km/h) i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data in the example.
K up to 68 mph (110 km/h)
L up to 74 mph (120 km/h)
M up to 80 mph (130 km/h)
N up to 87 mph (140 km/h)
P up to 93 mph (150 km/h)
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R over 106 mph (170 km/h)
Z
Maximum tire load the requirements of the U.S. Department of

Transportation.
Manufacturer identification code: manufac-
turer identification code ; provides details on
the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code
with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code
with four symbols.
Further information about retreaded tires
(Y page 248).
Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.
Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used by
the manufacturer as a code to describe specific
characteristics of the tire.
Maximum tire load : is the maximum permis- Date of manufacture: date of manufacture A
sible weight for which the tire is approved. provides information about the age of a tire. The
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the first and second positions represent the week of
specified load limit. The maximum permissible manufacture, starting with "01" for the first cal-
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and endar week. Positions three and four represent
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that
the driver's side (Y page 259). is marked with "3208", was manufactured in
week 32 in 2008.
i The actual values for tires are specific to
each vehicle and may deviate from the values i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
in the illustration. from the data in the example.
Wheels and tires
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) Tire characteristics

U.S. tire regulations stipulate that every tire
manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in
or on the sidewall of each tire produced.
This information describes the type of tire cord

and the number of layers in sidewall : and
under tire tread ;.
The TIN is a unique identification number. The i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders from the data in the example.
to inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-
relevant matters. It makes it possible for the Definitions for tires and loading
purchaser to easily identify the affected tires.
The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifica- Tire structure and characteristics
tion code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? and Describes the number of layers or the number of
manufacturing date A. rubber-coated belts in the tire tread and the tire
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire wall. These consist of steel, nylon, polyester,
symbol : indicates that the tire complies with and other materials.
What you should know about wheels and tires 265
Bar tification plate on the driver seat frame

Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds (Y page 276).
per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa) Speed index
are the equivalent of 1 bar.
The speed index is part of the tire identification.
DOT (Department of Transportation) It specifies the speed range for which the tire is
DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements of the approved.
United States Department of Transportation. GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)
Average weight of vehicle occupants GTW is the total of weight of a trailer and the
The number of occupants for which the vehicle weight of the load, accessories etc. on the
is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs). trailer.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)

A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of
with regard to tread quality, traction and tem- the vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel,
perature characteristics. The quality grading accessories installed, occupants, luggage and
assessment is made by the manufacturer fol- the drawbar noseweight if applicable. The gross
lowing specifications from the U.S government. vehicle weight may never exceed the gross vehi-
The quality grade of a tire is imprinted on the cle weight rating (GVWR) specified on the vehi-
sidewall of the tire. cle identification plate at the base of the driver's
seat (Y page 276).
Recommended tire pressure
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
The recommended tire pressures are the pres-
sures specified for the tires mounted on the The GVWR is the maximum permitted gross
Wheels and tires

vehicle at the factory. weight of the fully laden vehicle (weight of the
vehicle including all accessories, occupants,
The tire and load information table8 contains the fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight if
recommended tire pressures for cold tires, the applicable). The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is
maximum permissible load and the maximum specified on the vehicle identification plate on
permissible vehicle speed. the driver seat frame (Y page 276).
The tire pressure table contains the recommen-
ded tire pressure for cold tires under various Maximum weight of the laden vehicle
operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed The maximum weight is the sum of:
of the vehicle.
Rthe curb weight of the vehicle
Increased vehicle weight due to optional Rthe weight of the accessories
equipment Rthe load limit
The combined weight of all standard and Rthe weight of the factory installed optional
optional equipment available for the vehicle, equipment
regardless of whether it is actually installed on
the vehicle or not. Kilopascal (kPa)
Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa are the
Wheel rim equivalent of 1 psi. Another tire pressure unit is
The part of the wheel on which the tire is moun- bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of
ted. 1 bar.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) Load index
GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight rating. In addition to the load bearing index, a load
The actual load on an axle must never exceed index can be stamped onto the sidewall of the
the gross axle weight rating. The Gross Axle tire. It specifies the load-bearing capacity of the
Weight Rating can be found on the vehicle iden- tire more precisely.
8 Only for vehicles with a gross weight of less than 10,000 lbs (4536 kg).
Z
Curb weight Sidewall

The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment The part of the tire between the tread and the
including the maximum filling capacity of fuel, tire bead.
oil, and coolant. It also includes the air-condi-
tioning system and optional equipment if these Weight of optional extras
are installed on the vehicle, but does not include The combined weight of those optional extras
passengers or luggage. that weigh more than the replaced standard
parts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These
Maximum tire load optional extras, such as high-performance
The maximum tire load in kilograms or pounds is brakes, a roof rack or a high-performance bat-
the maximum weight for which a tire is tery, are not included in the curb weight and the
approved. weight of the accessories.
Maximum permissible tire pressure TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire. A unique identification number which can be
used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for
Maximum load on one tire example for a product recall, and thus identify
Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by the purchasers. The TIN is composed of the
dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by manufacturer identification code, tire size, tire
two. model code and manufacturing date.
PSI (Pounds per square inch) Load bearing index
Standard unit of measurement for tire pressure. The load bearing index (also load index) is a code
that contains the maximum load bearing capa-
Aspect ratio city of a tire.
Wheels and tires
Relationship between tire height and width in

percent. Traction
Traction is the result of friction between the tires
tire pressure and the road surface.
Pressure inside the tire applying an outward
force to every square inch of the tire's surface. TWR (permissible trailer drawbar load)
Tire pressure is specified in pounds per square The TWR is the maximum permissible weight
inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar. Tire pres- that may act on the ball coupling of the trailer
sure should only be corrected when the tires are tow hitch.
cold.
Wear indicator
Cold tire pressure Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distrib-
The tires are cold: uted over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level
Rif the vehicle has been parked for at least
with the bars, the wear limit of á in (1.6 mm)
has been reached.
three hours without direct sunlight on the
tires, and Distribution of the vehicle occupants
Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than
The distribution of vehicle occupants over des-
1 mile (1.6 km) ignated seat positions in a vehicle.
Tire tread Maximum permissible payload weight
The part of the tire that comes into contact with Nominal load and goods/luggage load plus
the road. 68 kg (150 lbs) multiplied by the number of
Tire bead seats in the vehicle.
The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely
on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the
bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from
the wheel rim.
Changing wheels 267
Flat tire Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the
brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is rota-
General notes ted.
Check the tire pressure and reactivate the tire
If your vehicle is equipped with a spare wheel, pressure monitor if necessary.
the spare wheel is under the rear of the vehicle
(Y page 273).
Information about installing a wheel can be
found in the "Wheel change" section
(Y page 268).
Changing wheels
Rotating the wheels
G WARNING
Interchanging the front and rear wheels may
Diagram showing tire rotation for single and dual
severely impair the driving characteristics if tires
the wheels or tires have different dimensions.
Single tires: if the tires are of identical dimen-
The wheel brakes or suspension components
sions, you can rotate both wheels on both the
may also be damaged. There is a risk of acci- front and rear axles so that the tires' original
dent. direction of rotation is maintained. On unidirec-
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels tional tires, an arrow on the sidewall shows the
Wheels and tires

and tires are of the same dimensions. prescribed direction of rotation of the tire.
Twin rear tires: if the tires are of identical
! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure dimensions, you can rotate the wheels on the
monitor, electronic components are located front axle and the inner wheels on the rear axle
in the wheel. in pairs such that the original direction of tire
Tire-mounting tools should not be used near rotation is retained. With unidirectional tires,
the valve. This could damage the electronic you may rotate the outside wheels at the rear
components. axle from one side to the other.
Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Direction of rotation
Always observe the instructions and safety
notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section Tires with a specified direction of rotation have
(Y page 268). additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydro-
The wear patterns on the front and rear tires planing. You will only gain these benefits if the
differ, depending on the operating conditions. correct direction of rotation is observed.
Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its
has formed on the tires. Front tires typically correct direction of rotation.
wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in You may mount a spare wheel against the direc-
the center. tion of rotation. Observe the time restriction on
If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you use as well as the speed limitation specified on
can rotate the tires according to the intervals in the spare wheel.
the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your
vehicle documents. If no warranty book is avail-
able, the tires should be rotated every 3,000 to Storing wheels
6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km), or earlier if
tire wear requires. Do not change the direction Store wheels that are not being used in a cool,
of rotation. dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires
from contact with oil, grease and fuel.
Z
268 Changing wheels
Mounting a wheel
Vehicle preparation
X Stop the vehicle as far away as possible from
traffic and on a level, firm and non-slip sur-
face.
X If your vehicle poses a risk to approaching
traffic, switch on the hazard warning lamps.
X Turn the front wheels to the straight-ahead
position.
X Move the selector lever of the automatic X Assemble the lug wrench extension using the
transmission to position P. middle rod and the rod with the largest diam-
X Switch off the engine. eter from the three-piece jack pump lever.
X Passengers should leave the vehicle. Make X Starting with the middle rod, slide the lug
sure that the passengers are not endangered wrench extension as far as it will go onto the
as they do so. lug wrench.
X Make sure that no one is near the danger area X Using lug wrench :, loosen the wheel bolts/
while the wheel is being changed. Anyone wheel nuts on the wheel to be changed by
who is not directly assisting in the wheel about one full turn. Do not unscrew the wheel
change should, for example, stand behind the bolts/nuts completely.
barrier.
X Place the warning triangle or warning lamp at Raising the vehicle
Wheels and tires
a suitable distance.
Observe legal requirements. G WARNING
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling If you do not position the jack correctly at the
away. appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
i Observe the safety notes on parking in the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
section on "Driving and parking" There is a risk of injury.
(Y page 129). Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-
X On level terrain: place chocks or other suit- ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack
able objects under the front and rear of the must be positioned vertically, directly under
wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel to the jacking point of the vehicle.
be changed.
X On slight inclines: place chocks or other
G WARNING
suitable objects under the wheels on the front
and rear axles opposite the wheel to be On uphill and downhill slopes, the jack could
changed. tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk
X Take the vehicle tool kit and the jack from the of injury.
footwell on the front-passenger side Do not change wheels on uphill or downhill
(Y page 241).
gradients. Notify a qualified specialist work-
X Remove the spare wheel from the spare wheel
shop.
bracket (Y page 274). Observe the safety
notes in the "Spare wheel" section
(Y page 273). ! Only position the jack on the jacking points
intended for this purpose. You could other-
X On wheels with wheel bolts, remove the hub wise damage the vehicle.
caps.
Changing wheels 269
Observe the following when raising the vehicle:

RWhen raising the vehicle, only use the jack
which Mercedes-Benz has specifically
approved for your vehicle.
RThe vehicle's jack is intended only to raise the
vehicle for a short time when changing a
wheel. It is not suited for performing mainte-
nance work under the vehicle.
RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and down-
hill slopes.
RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from roll-
ing away by applying the parking brake and Hydraulic jack
inserting wheel chocks. Never disengage the
parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Preparing the hydraulic jack
RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and X Insert the third rod of jack pump lever : into
non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, the lug wrench extension.
load-bearing underlay must be used. On a Jack pump lever : is assembled.
slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be X Close pressure release screw ;.
used, e.g. rubber mats.
X To do this, use the flattened section on pump
RMake sure that the distance between the
lever : to turn pressure release screw ;
underside of the tires and the ground does not
clockwise to the stop.
exceed 1.2 in(3 cm).
RNever place your hands or feet under the i Do not turn pressure release screw ; more
raised vehicle. than one or two full turns. Hydraulic fluid
could otherwise escape.
Wheels and tires

RNever lie under the raised vehicle.
X Insert pump lever : into the recess on the
RNever start the engine when the vehicle is
raised. jack and secure by turning it clockwise.
X Place the jack vertically beneath the jacking
RNever open or close a door when the vehicle
is raised. points described below.
RMake sure that no persons are present in the
vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
! Only use the jack pump lever middle rod and
the rod with the largest diameter as a lug
wrench extension. Only slide the middle rod
as far as it will go onto the lug wrench. The
rods may otherwise bend and be distorted to
such an extent that they can no longer be
used as a pump lever for the jack.
! Do not place the jack on the leaf spring or
the differential case.
Jacking point, front axle
X Place the jack under the jacking point in front
of the front axle.
X Vehicles with all-wheel drive: unscrew jack
spindle = counter-clockwise as far as it will
go.
Z
270 Changing wheels
Removing a wheel
! Do not place the wheel bolts or the wheel
nuts in sand or dirt. The threads of the wheel
bolts and wheel nuts could otherwise be dam-
aged when being tightened.
X Unscrew the wheel bolts or nuts.
X On front wheels with wheel nuts, remove the
wheel nut cover.
X Remove the wheel.
Jacking point, rear axle (example: vehicle type Installing the adapter
2500)
G WARNING
If you tighten the adapter bolts when the vehi-
cle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a
risk of injury.
Make sure that the vehicle is properly pre-
pared for a wheel change. Tighten the adapter
bolts with particular care and attention.
Always observe the instructions and safety

notes on "Changing a wheel" (Y page 267).
Wheels and tires
G WARNING
Jacking point, rear axle (example: vehicle type If you do not tighten the bolts of the adapter to
3500)
the specified tightening torque, the adapter
X Place the jack under the jacking point in front may come loose with the spare wheel. There
of the rear axle.
is a risk of an accident.
Tighten the bolts of the adapter to the speci-
fied tightening torque. Have the spare wheel
replaced with a complete wheel and an extra-
wide tire at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
! Vehicles with Super Single tires: if you

install the spare wheel, do not exceed the
maximum speed of 40 mph (60 km/h) and do
not drive further than 65 miles(100 km).
The transmission could otherwise be dam-
Jacking point, rear axle (example: Cab Chassis) aged by the difference in wheel rotation
Jacking point at the rear axle on chassis ver- speeds.
sions On vehicles with Super Single tires, you must
X Place the jack next to the front leaf spring attach the narrow spare wheel to the rear axle by
support beneath the jacking point. means of an adapter. The adapter is bolted to
the spare wheel using the adapter bolts for
transportation.
The handling characteristics of your vehicle are
affected when driving with a spare wheel instal-
led. After changing a wheel, drive to the nearest
Changing wheels 271
specialist workshop and have the spare wheel ! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure
replaced with a wheel and tire assembly that has monitor, electronic components are located
a Super Single tire. in the wheel.
X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur- Tire-mounting tools should not be used near
faces. the valve. This could damage the electronic
X Unscrew the six adapter bolts on the spare components.
wheel and remove the adapter. Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-
X Tighten the adapter with the six adapter bolts cialist workshop.
evenly in a crosswise pattern through the
outer holes on the wheel hub.
X Tighten the six adapter bolts on the wheel hub
to a tightening torque of 177 lb-ft (240 Nm).
X Push the wheel onto the adapter and attach it.
Mounting a new wheel

G WARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
bolts to come loose. As a result, you could : Wheel bolt for alloy wheel
lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of ; Wheel bolt for steel wheel
accident. X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur-
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of faces.
Wheels and tires

damage to the threads, contact a qualified X Vehicles with Super Single tires: first attach
specialist workshop immediately. Have the the adapter for the narrow spare wheel to the
wheel hub (Y page 270).
damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving. Slide the new wheel onto the wheel hub or
onto the adapter for the spare wheel and push
it on.
G WARNING Slide the new wheel onto the wheel hub and
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts push it on.
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip Wheels with centering by wheel bolts:
over. There is a risk of injury.
X Vehicles with alloy wheels: take the short
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts wheel bolts that secure the steel spare wheel
when the vehicle is on the ground. out of the vehicle tool kit.
X Screw in the wheel bolts and tighten them
Always observe the instructions and safety lightly.
notes on "Changing a wheel" (Y page 267).
Only use wheel bolts or wheel nuts that have For wheels with wheel nuts:
been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For X Front wheels with wheel nut covers: press the
safety reasons, we recommend that you only wheel nut covers onto the wheel nuts.
use wheel bolts or wheel nuts which have been X Screw in three wheel nuts over the fixing discs
approved for Sprinter vehicles and the respec- of the wheel nut cover.
tive wheel.
X Turn the wheel so that the wheel bolts are in
! For a steel wheel, only use the short wheel the middle of the holes.
bolts to mount the steel spare wheel. Using X Screw on the rest of the wheel nuts.
other wheel bolts to mount the steel spare X Slightly tighten all the wheel nuts.
wheel could damage the brake system.
Z
272 Changing wheels
Lowering the vehicle X Using the extended lug wrench, tighten the
wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in
G WARNING the sequence indicated (: to B).
The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts Tighten the wheel bolts to the following tight-
and bolts are not tightened to the specified ening torques:
tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. RSteel wheel 177 lb-ft (240 Nm)
Have the tightening torque immediately RAlloy wheel 133 lb-ft (180 Nm)
checked at a qualified specialist workshop Tighten the wheel nuts to a tightening torque
after a wheel is changed. of 133 lb-ft (180 Nm).
X Push the piston on the hydraulic jack in again
! Only use the jack pump lever middle rod and and close the pressure release screw.
the rod with the largest diameter as a lug X Vehicles with all-wheel drive: turn the jack
wrench extension. Only slide the middle rod spindle clockwise as far as it will go
as far as it will go onto the lug wrench. The (Y page 268).
rods may otherwise bend and be distorted to X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle tools
such an extent that they can no longer be in the vehicle again.
used as a pump lever for the jack.
i You can now install the hub caps on steel
! Vehicles with Super Single tires: if you wheels with wheel bolts. The installing proce-
install the spare wheel, do not exceed the dure depends on whether the hub cap acts as
maximum speed of 40 mph (60 km/h) and do a trim that covers the whole wheel, or just
not drive further than 65 miles(100 km). covers the center.
The transmission could otherwise be dam- X Wheel with hub cap: position the opening for
aged by the difference in wheel rotation the tire valve in the hub cap over the tire valve.
Wheels and tires
speeds. X Push the edge of the hub cap with both hands
against the wheel until it clicks into place.
Make sure the hub cap retaining catches
engage on the steel wheel.
X Wheel with central hub cap: position the
retaining lugs of the central hub cap over the
wheel bolts.
X Hit the center of the hub cap to engage it on
the wheel.
X Secure the faulty wheel in the spare wheel
bracket (Y page 274).
X Vehicles with Super Single tires: transport the
Tightening torque pattern defective rear wheel in the load area. The rear
wheel is too large for the spare wheel bracket.
:—B Wheel bolts or wheel nuts
X Check the tire pressure of the newly mounted
X Using the pump lever, slowly turn the lowering wheel and adjust it if necessary.
screw on the jack through approximately one Observe the recommended tire pressure
revolution and carefully lower the vehicle (Y page 251).
(Y page 268).
X Retighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts to the
X Put the jack aside.
specified tightening torque after the vehicle
X Pull the rod with the smallest diameter off the has been driven for 30 miles (50 km).
pump lever.
The shortened pump lever serves as a lug When using a wheel or spare wheel with a new or
wrench extension. newly painted wheel rim, have the wheel bolts or
nuts retightened again after approximately 600
X Starting with the middle rod, slide the lug
to 3,000 miles (1,000 to 5,000 km). Observe the
wrench extension as far as it will go onto the
specified tightening torque.
lug wrench.
Spare wheel 273
i Vehicles with the tire pressure monitor sys- Spare wheel

tem: all mounted wheels must be equipped
with functioning sensors. Important safety notes
G WARNING
Wheel and tire combination Wheel and tire dimensions as well as the type
of tire can vary between the spare wheel and
General notes the wheel to be replaced. When the spare
! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec- wheel is mounted, driving characteristics may
ommended for Sprinter vehicles, since previ- be severely affected. There is a risk of an acci-
ous damage cannot always be detected on dent.
retreaded tires. We can therefore not guar-
In order to reduce risks:
antee driving safety. Do not mount used tires
if you have no information about their previ- Ryou should therefore adapt your driving
ous usage. style and drive carefully.
The recommended tire pressures can be found: Rnever mount more than one spare wheel
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard9 that differs from the wheel to be replaced.
on the B-pillar on the driver's side Ronly use a spare wheel that differs from the
Ron the tire pressure table on the B-pillar on the wheel to be replaced for a short time.
driver's side Rdo not deactivate ESP®.
The recommended tire pressure can also be
found in the "Tire pressure table" section in this Rhave a spare wheel that differs from the
Operator's Manual (Y page 257). The wheel/tire wheel that has been changed replaced at
Wheels and tires

combination for your vehicle can be found on the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
the tire pressure table. Further information on You must observe the correct wheel and
wheel/tire combination can be obtained at any tire dimensions as well as the wheel type.
Check tire pressures regularly and only when When using a spare wheel of a different size, do
the tires are cold. Observe the notes on the rec- not exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h.
ommended tire pressure (Y page 251).
Follow the maintenance recommendations in
the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your General notes
vehicle documents.
Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equip ! Check the spare wheel regularly to see that
the vehicle: it is secure and has the prescribed tire pres-
Rwith tires of the same size across an axle (left
sure.
and right) The procedure for mounting the spare wheel is
Rwith the same type of tires on all wheels at a described in "Mounting a wheel" (Y page 268).
given time (summer tires, winter tires) The following should be checked regularly, par-
Tires that have been specially designed and ticularly prior to long journeys:
approved for your vehicle are marked with MO Rthe tire pressure of the spare wheel, which
(Mercedes-Benz Original). You can find this should then be corrected if necessary
identification on the tires themselves and in the (Y page 251).
following table. Rthe fastenings of the spare wheel bracket.
i Not all wheel/tire combinations can be The spare wheel is located in a spare wheel
installed at the factory in all countries. bracket under the rear of the vehicle.
Replace the tires after 6 years at the latest,
regardless of wear. This also applies to the spare
wheel.
9 Only for vehicles with a gross weight of less than 10,000 lbs (4,536 kg).
Z
274 Spare wheel
i If you have mounted a spare wheel, the tire X Raise spare wheel bracket A with the pump
pressure monitor (Y page 254) will not func- lever and unhook right-hand retaining hook
tion for this wheel. The spare wheel is not =.
equipped with a sensor for monitoring tire X Slowly lower spare wheel bracket A down to
pressure. the ground.
X Lift spare wheel bracket A slightly and pull
the pump lever out of sleeve ?.
Removing and installing the spare
wheel
Cargo Van/Passenger Van
Spare wheel in the spare wheel carrier

X Use the pump lever to lift the spare wheel
beyond the rear edge of the spare wheel car-
rier.
Bolt covers for the safety catches (example: Cargo X Carefully remove the spare wheel from spare
Wheels and tires
Van)
wheel bracket A.
Removing The spare wheel is heavy. When the spare
X Open the rear doors. wheel is removed, the center of gravity
changes due to the heavy weight of the wheel.
X Place a screwdriver into recesses ; and then The spare wheel may slip down or tip over.
pry off covers :.
X Using the lug wrench from the vehicle tool kit Installing
(Y page 241), unscrew the now visible bolts X Carefully place the spare wheel onto spare
counter-clockwise by approximately 20 turns. wheel bracket A.
The spare wheel is heavy. When you place the
spare wheel onto spare wheel bracket A, the
center of gravity changes due to the weight of
the wheel. The spare wheel may slip down or
tip over.
X Slide the pump lever for the jack into
sleeve ? on spare wheel bracket A.
X Raise spare wheel bracket A with the pump
lever and attach right-hand retaining hook =.
X Slightly raise spare wheel bracket A and
attach left-hand retaining hook =.
X Pull the pump lever out of sleeve ?.
Spare wheel carrier under the vehicle X Using the lug wrench, tighten the retaining
X Slightly raise spare wheel bracket A and hook bolts by turning them clockwise.
unhook left-hand retaining hook =. X Replace and engage covers :.
X Assemble the pump lever for the jack and X Close the rear doors.
slide it into sleeve ? on spare wheel bracket
A.
Spare wheel 275
Cab Chassis version Installing

X Carefully place the spare wheel onto spare
wheel bracket ?.
The spare wheel is heavy. When you place the
spare wheel onto spare wheel bracket ?, the
center of gravity changes due to the weight of
the wheel. The spare wheel may slip down or
tip over.
X Raise spare wheel bracket ? with the pump
lever and attach right-hand retaining hook :.
X Slightly raise spare wheel bracket ? and
attach left-hand retaining hook :.
X Pull the pump lever out.
Removing X Tighten nuts ;.
X Loosen fender nuts = manually and then X Put fender nuts = in place and tighten them.
remove them.
X Loosen nuts ; as far as the thread end.
X Slightly raise spare wheel bracket ? and
unhook left-hand retaining hook :.
X Assemble the pump lever for the jack and
slide it into the sleeve on the right-hand side
of spare wheel bracket ?.
X Raise spare wheel bracket ? with the pump
Wheels and tires

lever and unhook right-hand retaining
hook :.
X Slowly lower spare wheel bracket ? down to
the ground.
X Lift spare wheel bracket ? slightly and pull
the pump lever out of the sleeve.
X Use the pump lever to lift the spare wheel

beyond the rear edge of spare wheel
bracket ?.
X Carefully remove the spare wheel from the
bracket.
The spare wheel is heavy. When the spare
wheel is removed, the center of gravity
changes due to the heavy weight of the wheel.
The spare wheel may slip down or tip over.
Z
276 Identification plates
Useful information tion to an approved exterior antenna. This is the

only way to ensure optimum reception quality
inside the vehicle and to minimize mutual inter-
ference between the vehicle electronics, mobile
phones and two-way radios.
to print. Country-specific variations are possi- The transmission output of the mobile phone or
ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped two-way radio may not exceed the following
with all of the described functions. This also maximum transmission output (PEAK):
Frequency range Maximum trans-
safety.
mission output
Read the information on qualified specialist (PEAK)
Shortwave 100 W
(f < 50 MHz)
Vehicle electronics 4 m waveband 30 W
Tampering with the engine electron- 2 m waveband 50 W
ics
Trunked radio/Tetra 35 W
! Only have engine electronics and the corre-
sponding parts, such as control units, actua- 70 cm waveband 35 W
tors, sensors or connector leads, serviced at a GSM/UMTS/LTE 10 W
qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, the
vehicle parts may wear more quickly. This can
lead to loss of the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty. Identification plates
Vehicle identification plate with vehi-
Installing electrical or electronic cle identification number (VIN)
Technical data
equipment
You and others can suffer health-related dam-
age through electromagnetic radiation. By using
an exterior antenna, a possible health risk
caused by electromagnetic fields, as discussed
have the exterior antenna installed by a qualified
Electrical and electronic devices may have a
detrimental effect on both the comfort and the
operating safety of the vehicle. If equipment of
this kind is installed, its electromagnetic com-
patibility must be checked and verified. Vehicle identification plate on the driver's side B-
pillar
If these devices are linked to functions associ-
ated with resistance to interference, they must
have type approval. This applies to the device or
its interfaces to the vehicle electronics, e.g.
charging brackets.
A telephone or two-way radio to be installed in
the vehicle must be approved. Further informa-
tion can be obtained from any Sprinter Dealer.
For operation of mobile phones and two-way
radios, Mercedes-Benz recommends connec-
Identification plates 277
Vehicle identification plate for vehicles or chassis Example: chassis identification plate (vehicles for
on the base of the driver's seat Canada)
X Open the driver’s door. ; VIN
You will see vehicle identification plate : = Paint code
with the vehicle identification number (VIN),
the paint code and the permissible weight
data.
Engine compartment
Technical data
? VIN (stamped on the rear wall of the engine
compartment)
Example: vehicle identification plate (US vehicles) A Engine number (stamped on the crankcase)
B Emission Control Information and engine
oil10 instruction labels
Example: chassis identification plate (US vehicles)
Example: Emission Control Information label
10 Also observe the notes on engine oil for diesel engines in the "Technical data" section.
278 Service products and capacities
i Such data is vehicle-specific and may differ to an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB 228.5). They
from that shown. Always observe the specifi- are therefore not necessarily approved.
cations on your vehicle's identification plate. More information can be obtained at any quali-
Additives for approved service products are nei-
Engine number ther required nor permitted. Approved fuel addi-
tives are the exception. Additives can cause
The engine number is stamped on the crank- engine damage and must therefore not be
case. More information may be obtained at any added to the service products.
The use of additives is always the responsibility
of the vehicle operator. The use of additives may
result in the restriction or loss of your Limited
Service products and capacities Warranty entitlements.
G WARNING Fuel
Service products may be poisonous and haz- Important safety notes
ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with instructions on the use, storage G WARNING
and disposal of service products on the labels Fuel is highly flammable. Improper handling of
of the respective original containers. Always fuel creates a risk of fire and explosion.
store service products sealed in their original Avoid fire, open flames, smoking and creating
containers. Always keep service products out sparks under all circumstances. Switch off the
of the reach of children. engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating
before refueling.
Dispose of service products in an environ- G WARNING
Technical data
mentally responsible manner. Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.

Service products include the following:
You must make sure that fuel does not come
RFuels, e.g. diesel into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
RAdditives for the exhaust gas aftertreatment, and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
e.g. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
RLubricants, e.g. engine oil, transmission oil
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
RCoolant
observe the following:
RBrake fluid
RWasher fluid RWash away fuel from skin immediately
RClimate control system refrigerants using soap and water.
Approved service products comply with the RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
highest quality standards and are listed in the immediately rinse them thoroughly with
MB Specifications for Service Products. Only clean water. Seek medical assistance with-
use service products approved for the vehicle. out delay.
This is an important condition for the warranty.
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
You will recognize the approved service prod-
ucts by the inscription on the container: MB tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-
Approval (e.g. MB Approval 228.5) ing.
Other identifications and recommendations RImmediately change out of clothing which
refer to quality level or a specification according has come into contact with fuel.
Service products and capacities 279
When handling, storing and disposing of fuels, This will prevent malfunctions in the fuel sys-
please observe the relevant regulations. tem due to contaminated fuel.
! You will damage the diesel engine if you do
Tank contents not refuel with ULSD or a diesel fuel with a
Depending on equipment, the total capacity of sulfur content of more than 15 ppm.
the fuel tank may vary. ! Do not use the following:
Total capacity Rmarine diesel
Rheating oil
All-wheel-drive vehicles: Approx-
Rvegetable oil
All models imately
24.6 US gal Rgasoline
(93 l) Rparaffin
Rkerosene
Cargo Van/Passenger Van: Approx-
imately Do not mix such fuels with diesel fuel and do
All models
24.6 US gal not use any special additives. This can other-
(93 l) wise lead to engine damage. This does not
include flow improvers. For further informa-
Cab Chassis/chassis: Approx- tion, see "Flow improvers".
All models imately Usually you will find information about the fuel
26.4 US gal grade on the filling pump. If there is no identifi-
(100 l) cation on the filling pump, consult a gas station
attendant.
of which reserve fuel For more information about refueling
(Y page 126).
Models with approximately Approx-
24.6 US gal (93 l) total capa- imately Diesel at very low outside temperatures
city 5.0 US gal G WARNING
(19 l)
Technical data
If you heat fuel system components, e.g. with
Models with approximately Approx- a hot-air gun or open flame, these compo-
26.4 US gal (100 l) total capa- imately nents could be damaged. This can cause fuel
city 4.8 US gal
(18 l) to escape and ignite. Depending on the type
of damage, fuel may also not escape until the
engine is running. There is a risk of fire and
Diesel
explosion.
Fuel grade Never heat fuel system components. Contact
a qualified specialist workshop to rectify the
G WARNING
malfunction.
If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash
point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. Refill only with commercially available ULTRA-
When the engine is running, exhaust system LOW SULFUR DIESEL (ULSD, maximum sulfur
components could overheat without being content 15 ppm), which fulfills the ASTM D975
noticed. There is a risk of fire. standard.
The flow properties of diesel may be inadequate
Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline at low outside temperatures due to paraffin sep-
with diesel fuel. aration.
! Filter the fuel before transferring it to the i Malfunctions resulting from paraffin sepa-
vehicle if you are refueling the vehicle from ration can only be rectified by heating the
barrels or containers. entire fuel system. Park the vehicle in a
heated garage, for example.
Z
To prevent operating problems, diesel with bet- Information on fuel consumption

ter flow qualities is available during the winter
months. You can obtain information at the gas H Environmental note
station or from your fuel supplier. CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scien-
Your vehicle is equipped with a fuel preheating
tists believe to be principally responsible for
system. This improves the flow properties of the
diesel by approximately 14.5 ‡ (8 †). ULTRA- global warming (the greenhouse effect). Your
LOW SULFUR DIESEL can be used without risk vehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related to
of malfunction down to an outside temperature fuel consumption and therefore depend on:
of approximately 14 ‡ (Ò10 †). Refficient use of the fuel by the engine
Fuel additives Rdriving style
! Do not add gasoline or kerosene to diesel Rother non-technical factors, such as envi-
fuel to improve its flow characteristics. Gas- ronmental influences, road conditions or
oline or kerosene impairs the lubricating traffic flow
properties of the diesel fuel. This can result in
damage to the fuel injection system, for You can minimize your vehicle's CO2 emis-
example. sions by driving carefully and having it serv-
iced regularly.
B20 fuels with bio-diesel content
Fuel consumption depends on:
! Continuous use of fuels with bio-diesel con- Rthe vehicle version
tent over 5% (B20 fuels) can lead to fuel filter
Rthe style of driving
clogging. Deposits may also form on the fuel
injector. This may reduce the engine output. Rthe operating conditions
Unburned fuel can get into the oil pan. This Rthe type or quality of the fuel used
causes the engine oil level to rise. This can The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in the
cause engine mechanical damage. following situations:
To avoid damages and performance degrada- Rat very low outside temperatures
Technical data
tion, observe the following points: Rin city traffic

RFill up with fuels with bio-diesel content of Rduring short journeys
5% (ULSD) or less, whenever possible. Ron mountainous terrain
RRegularly monitor your engine oil level if
Rwhen towing a trailer
you use B20 fuels on a regular basis.
RStrictly follow the oil change intervals quo-
To keep fuel consumption low, observe the
advice in the "Protection of the environment"
ted in the instrument cluster and within
your maintenance booklet.
RUse only engine oils and filters approved for
The following components of the different vehi-
cle versions influence fuel consumption:
use in your vehicle.
RIf you do not plan to drive your vehicle for Rtire sizes, tire tread, tire pressure, tire condi-
several weeks, completely fill the fuel tank tion
in advance with ULSD fuel. Rbody
For more information, consult the gas station Rtransmission ratios for the drive assemblies
staff. The identification of fuels with bio-diesel Radditional equipment (e.g. air-conditioning
content (ULSD or B20) must be clear. If the system, auxiliary heating system)
marking does not make this clear, do not refuel For these reasons, the actual consumption fig-
from that pump. ures for your vehicle may deviate from the con-
Do not refuel with any fuels that have not been sumption figures determined according to EU
approved for your vehicle. Directive 80/1268/EEC.
For more information about refueling Data concerning fuel consumption are recorded
(Y page 127). in the on-board computer; use the steering
wheel buttons to call up the Trip computer Low ambient temperatures

menu (Y page 173). DEF freezes at a temperature of approximately
12 ‡ (Ò11 †). The vehicle is equipped with a DEF
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) preheating system at the factory. Winter oper-
ation is therefore also guaranteed at tempera-
General notes tures under 12 ‡ (Ò11 †).
When opening the DEF tank filler cap at high i If you add DEF at temperatures below 12 ‡
outside temperatures, ammonia vapors may (Ò11 †) it is possible that the level is not
escape. shown correctly due to the frozen DEF.
Ammonia vapors have a pungent smell and pri- Drive for at least 20 minutes (heating phase in
marily cause irritation of the: the fuel tank activated) and then stop the
Rskin vehicle for at least 30 seconds. The level is
Rmucous membranes then shown correctly.
Reyes Additives
You may experience a burning sensation in your ! Do not mix DEF with any additives and do
eyes, nose and throat, as well as coughing and not dilute DEF with tap water. Otherwise, the
watering of the eyes. exhaust gas aftertreatment may be damaged.
Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Avoid contact Observe the MB Specifications for Service
with DEF. Products, Sheet No. 352.0.
Do not allow DEF to come into direct contact Damage that arises through the use of addi-
with your skin; it is hazardous to your health. tives or tap water will invalidate the New Vehi-
Rinse any affected areas off with plenty of clean cle Limited Warranty.
water. Consult a doctor if necessary.
If DEF heats up, e.g. in direct sunlight, in the DEF Storage
supply reservoir for some time to over 122 ‡ ! Containers made of aluminum, copper, cop-
(50 †), ammonia vapor will develop. per alloys as well as unalloyed or galvanized
To conform to emission regulations, you must steel are not suitable for storing DEF. If stored
Technical data
operate the vehicle with DEF and refill the supply in these types of containers, DEF could cause
regularly. The engine management recognizes constituents of these metals to dissolve and
attempts to operate the vehicle without DEF, cause irreparable damage to the exhaust gas
with thinned DEF or with another reducing aftertreatment.
agent. After previous warning messages, the Damage caused by such impurities in the DEF
engine management then prevents a further will invalidate the New Vehicle Limited War-
engine start. ranty.
When the number of remaining engine starts is 0
the engine management prevents the vehicle Only store DEF in containers made of high-alloy
from being driven at a speed exceeding 5 mph Cr‑Ni steel or Mo‑Cr‑Ni steel in accordance with
(8 km/h). The multifunction display shows the DIN EN 10 088‑1/2/3 or plastic containers
Idle Mode message. made of polypropylene or polyethylene.
DEF consumption Purity

DEF consumption depends on operational and ! Impurities in DEF (e.g. caused by other ser-
driving conditions and it is not necessary to wait vice products, cleaning agents, dust, etc.)
until the next scheduled service to replenish the result in increased emissions, malfunctions,
fluid. Therefore, refill the DEF supply tank regu- catalytic converter damage or engine dam-
larly during vehicle operation or, at the latest, age.
after receiving the first warning message via the The purity of DEF is essential to prevent mal-
on-board computer. functions in the exhaust gas aftertreatment.
If DEF is pumped out of the DEF tank, e.g. during
repair work, the same liquid must not be used to
refill the tank. Its purity is no longer guaranteed.
Z
Disposal The MB Specifications for Service Products are

valid for your vehicle
R228.51
Dispose of DEF in an environmentally respon-
R229.31
sible manner.
R229.51
Observe country-specific laws and regulations R229.52
when disposing of DEF. These are high quality engine oils which have a
positive effect on:
DEF supply reservoir content
Rengine wear
Tank contents Rfuel consumption
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)11 Rexhaust gas emissions
Approximately 4.7 US gal (18.0 l) If the quality grade is not available for diesel
engines, you may also add engine oils meeting
the requirements in MB Sheet Number 228.5,
229.3 or 229.5. The topping-up quantity is then
Engine oil limited to a maximum of 1 qt (1 l).
Multi-grade engine oils of the prescribed SAE
General notes class (viscosity) may be used all year round, tak-
ing the outside temperatures into account.
Engine oil viscosity

! If the SAE viscosity class of the engine oil
used does not cover the outside temperature
range in which you are operating the vehicle,
it must be changed in good time, in particular
before the cold season commences. Using an
engine oil that does not have adequate tem-
Technical data
perature characteristics can lead to engine

damage.
The temperature range information of the SAE
! The bottles of the various engine oil types classification always refers to that of fresh oil.
are marked with ACEA (Association des Con- The temperature characteristics of the engine
structeurs Européens d'Automobiles) and/or oil may deteriorate significantly due to aging
API (American Petroleum Institute) classifica- in use, especially at low outside tempera-
tions. Only use approved engine oils that con- tures.
form to the following MB Specifications for We recommend that you change the engine
Service Products and the prescribed ACEA oil before the cold season commences. Use
and/or API classifications. Using engine oils an approved engine oil of the specified SAE
of another quality is not permitted and may class.
invalidate the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The use of other, non-approved engine oils for
diesel engines can cause damage to the die-
sel particle filter (DPF).
Use only engine oils that have been approved for
your vehicle according to the MB Specifications
for Service Products.
11 DEF according to ISO 22241. Observe MB Specifications for Service Products, Sheet 352.0.
Subsequently have the engine oil changed at the

earliest possible opportunity.
Interval for oil change

The on-board computer automatically shows
the date for the next oil change as an event
message in the display.
Only by using engine oil with a particularly high
quality grade, e.g. according to Sheet Number
228.51 of the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Service Products, can the maximum interval for
Engine oil SAE classification oil change be achieved.
Viscosity indicates the flow characteristics of a We recommend having the oil changed at a
fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity, this qualified specialist workshop.
means that it is thick; a low viscosity means that Engine oil for diesel engines
it is thin.
Product name/number
Depending on the respective outside tempera-
tures, select an engine oil according to SAE See the Maintenance Booklet.
classification (viscosity). The table displays the MB Sheet Number 228.51, 229.31, 229.51,
SAE classification to be used. The low temper- 229.52
ature characteristics of engine oils can notice-
ably deteriorate during operation, e.g. from
aging, soot and fuel accretion. For this reason, Capacities
regular oil changes using an approved engine oil
from the suitable SAE classification are urgently ! Do not add too much oil. adding too much
recommended. engine oil can result in damage to the engine
or to the catalytic converter. Have excess
engine oil siphoned off.
Additives
Technical data
Oil change including oil filter
! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.
This could damage the engine. Vehicles Engine oil
4-cylinder Approximately
Miscibility of engine oils 3 US gal (11.5 l)
! Mixing oils reduces the benefits of using 6-cylinder Approximately
high grade engine oils. 3.3 US gal (12.5 l)
We recommend that you only add engine oil of
the same quality grade and SAE class as used Information about oil consumption
when the engine oil was last changed.
If, in exceptional cases, oil of the type in the ! If the vehicle is predominantly used for
engine is not available, top up using another short-distance driving, this could lead to a
approved mineral or synthetic engine oil. malfunction in the automatic cleaning func-
If the quality grade is not available for diesel tion for the diesel particle filter. As a result,
engines, you may also add engine oils meeting fuel may accumulate in the engine oil and
the requirements in MB Sheet Number 228.5, cause engine failure.
229.3 or 229.5. The quantity to be added is then Therefore, if you mainly drive short distances,
limited to a maximum of 1 qt (1 l). you should drive on a highway or on rural
Engine oils are differentiated according to: roads for 20 minutes every 310 miles
(500 km). This ensures sufficient regenera-
Rengine oil brand tion of the diesel particle filter.
Rquality grade (sheet number)
RSAE class (viscosity)
Z
Depending on the driving style, the vehicle con- Steering

sumes a maximum of 1.0 qt (1.0 l) of engine oil
over a distance of 620 miles (1000 km). Service product: power steering fluid
Oil consumption may be higher if: Product name/number Maintenance
RThe vehicle is new. interval
RYou mainly operate the vehicle under arduous
Mobil ATF‑D, —
operating conditions.
Exxon Mobil Corporation
RYou frequently drive at high engine speeds. or equivalent
Regular maintenance is one of the preconditions MB Sheet No. 236.3
for moderate rates of consumption.
You can only estimate the oil consumption after
you have driven a considerable distance. The steering is maintenance-free. Further infor-
mation can be obtained at any qualified special-
Check the engine oil level on a regular basis, e.g. ist workshop.
weekly or each time you refuel (Y page 221).
Brake fluid
Transmission and power steering oil
G WARNING
Automatic transmission
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture
Service product: automatic transmission from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
fluid the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake
Product name/number Maintenance fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the
interval brake system when the brakes are applied
hard. This would impair braking efficiency.
Shell ATF 3403/M-115 — There is a risk of an accident.
MB Sheet No. 236.10
You should have the brake fluid renewed at
Technical data
Fuchs/Shell ATF 3353 the specified intervals.

MB Sheet No. 236.12
! Brake fluid corrodes paint, plastic and rub-
ber. If paint, plastic or rubber has come into
Further information can be obtained at any
contact with brake fluid, rinse with water
immediately.
Rear axle When handling, storing and disposing of brake
fluid, please observe the relevant regulations
Service product: transmission oil and the important safety notes for service prod-
ucts.
Product name/number Maintenance Over a period of time, the brake fluid absorbs
interval moisture from the air. This reduces its boiling
BP Energear Hypo DC — point.
80W-90 Have the brake fluid replaced at specified inter-
MB Sheet No. 235.20 vals by a qualified specialist workshop.
Mobil Delvac Synthetic

i There is usually a notice in the engine com-
partment to remind you when the next brake
Gear Oil 75W-90
fluid change is due.
MB Sheet No. 235.8
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-
Benz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MB-
Further information can be obtained at any Approval 331.0.
Information about approved brake fluids can be To prevent damage to the engine cooling sys-
obtained: tem, use only approved corrosion inhibitor/anti-
Ron the Internet at freeze that comply with the Mercedes-Benz
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Specifications for Service Products.
We recommend corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze
that meets the requirements in MB Specifica-
tions for Service Products Sheet Number 325.
Coolant
Check the antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor con-
Important safety notes centration in the coolant every six months.
The percentage of corrosion inhibitor/anti-
G WARNING freeze additive in the engine cooling system
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com- should:
ponents in the engine compartment, it may Rbe at least 50%. This way, the engine cooling
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. system is protected against freezing down to
approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).
Let the engine cool down before you add anti-
Rnot exceed 55 % otherwise heat will not be
freeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled dissipated as effectively. At 55 %, the engine
next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the cooling system is protected against freezing
antifreeze from components before starting down to approximately -49 ‡ (-45 †).
the engine. If there has been coolant loss, do not refill only
with water. If the vehicle has lost coolant, add
! Take care not to spill any coolant on painted equal parts water and corrosion inhibitor/anti-
surfaces. You could otherwise damage the freeze additive. The water used as part of the
paintwork. coolant mixture must fulfill certain require-
When handling coolant, observe the important ments; these are usually fulfilled by drinking
safety notes for service products (Y page 278). water. If the water quality is not sufficient, you
must treat the water.
Coolant additive with antifreeze
Technical data
Operating fluid: coolant
requirements
! Use only approved antifreeze/corrosion Product name/number
inhibitor that complies with MB Specification EURO Peak Coolant/Antifreeze,
for Service Products, Sheet Number 325.
Using other, non-approved antifreeze/corro- OLD WORLD INDUSTRIES
sion inhibitors may cause damage to the cool- MB Sheet No. 325.0
ant system and reduce the engine's service
life. Zerex G05, The Valvoline Company
MB Sheet No. 325.0
Coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/
corrosion inhibitor. It performs the following Zerex G48, The Valvoline Company
tasks: MB Sheet No. 325.0
RAnti-corrosion protection
Glysantin G05, BASF AG
RAntifreeze protection
MB Sheet No. 325.0
RRaises the boiling point
When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with
a coolant mixture that ensures adequate anti- Capacities
freeze/corrosion protection. Coolant must be Engine cooling system
used in the system all year round to ensure anti-
corrosion protection and a raised boiling point – Coolant Approx. 10.75 qt
even in countries with high outside tempera- (10.0 l)
tures.
Z
286 Vehicle data
Refrigerant ! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for

plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB
The air-conditioning system uses the refrigerant WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could dam-
R‑134a. This refrigerant does not damage the age the plastic lenses of the headlamps.
ozone layer.
When handling washer fluid, observe the impor-
Product name/number Maintenance tant safety notes on service products
interval (Y page 278).
Refrigerant R‑134a — Mixing ratio

MB Sheet No. 361.0
Add windshield washer concentrate to the
washer fluid all year round. Adapt the mixing
More information can be obtained at any quali- ratio to the ambient temperature.
At temperatures above freezing:
X Fill up the washer fluid reservoir with a mix-
ture of water and windshield washer concen-
trate, e.g. Summerwash to prevent smearing.
At temperatures below freezing:
X Fill up the washer fluid reservoir with a mix-
ture of water and windshield washer concen-
trate, e.g. Winterwash if there is a danger of
frost.
This prevents washer fluid from freezing on
the windshield.
Refrigerant warning label (example)
: Warning symbols Capacities
; Refrigerant capacity Windshield washer system with/without
Technical data
= Applicable standards headlamp cleaning system

? Part number PAG oil
Washer fluid Approx. 6.3 qt (6.0 l)
A Type of refrigerant
Warning symbols : refer to:
Rpossible dangers Vehicle data
Rthe implementation of maintenance work at a
qualified specialist workshop General notes
The following section contains important tech-
nical data for your vehicle. Your vehicle regis-
Washer fluid tration documents contain vehicle-specific and
equipment-dependent technical data such as
Important safety notes vehicle dimensions and vehicle weights.
G WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if
it comes into contact with hot engine compo-
nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of
fire and injury.
Make sure that no windshield washer con-
centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
Vehicle data 287
Cargo tie-down points and carrier sys- The values specified apply only to loads placed
tems on the cargo compartment floor if:
Rthe load is secured to two cargo tie-down
Cargo tie-down points points on the rail and
Rthe distance to the nearest load-securing
General notes point on the same rail is approximately 3 ft
! Observe the information on the maximum (1 m)
loading capacity of the individual cargo tie-
down points. Roof carrier
If you use several cargo tie-down points to
secure a load, you must always take the max- G WARNING
imum loading capacity of the weakest cargo When you load the roof, the center of gravity
tie-down point into account. of the vehicle rises and the driving character-
If you brake hard, for example, the forces act- istics change. If you exceed the maximum roof
ing could be up to several times the weight
force of the load. Always use multiple cargo load, the driving characteristics, as well as
tie-down points in order to distribute the force steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.
absorption. Load the anchorages evenly. There is a risk of an accident.
You will find further information about cargo tie Never exceed the maximum roof load and
down points and cargo tie-down rings in the adjust your driving style.
"Transporting" section (Y page 215).
Cargo tie-down rings
G WARNING
The maximum tensile load of the cargo tie-down If you distribute the load unevenly in the vehi-
rings is: cle, the handling as well as the steering and
braking characteristics are severely affected.
Cargo tie-down Permissible nomi- There is a risk of an accident.
rings nal tensile load
Distribute the load evenly in the vehicle.
Technical data
Passenger Vans 786.5 lbf Secure the load to prevent it from slipping.
(3500 N)
! The weight of any load carried on the roof,
Cargo Van 1124.0 lbf including the roof carrier, must not exceed
(5000 N) the maximum permissible roof load.
The roof carrier supports must be mounted at
Load rails equal distances.
The maximum tensile loads of the cargo tie- We recommend that you have a stabilizer
down points in the cargo compartment are: installed on the front axle.
Cargo tie-down Permissible nomi- ! For safety reasons, we recommend that you
point nal tensile load only use roof carrier systems that have been
tested and approved for the Sprinter. This will
Load rails on cargo 1124.0 lbf help to avoid damage.
compartment floor (5000 N)
Lower load rail on 562.0 lbf
sidewall (2500 N)
Upper load rail on 337.0 lbf
sidewall (1500 N)
Z
288 Vehicle data
The data is valid for a load distributed evenly Trailer tow hitch
over the entire roof area. Maximum roof load
and minimum number of pairs of roof carrier General notes
supports on vehicles with:
We recommend that you have the trailer tow
Maximum Minimum hitch mounted at an authorized Sprinter Dealer.
roof load number of Use only a trailer tow hitch that has been tested
pairs of sup- and approved specially for your vehicle by the
ports distributor named on the inside of the front
cover. Only use a ball coupling that is approved
Standard 660 lbs 6
for your vehicle and Sprinter trailer tow hitch.
roof (300 kg)
You can also find information on the permitted
High roof 330 lbs 3 dimensions of the ball coupling on the identifi-
(150 kg) cation plate of the trailer tow hitch.
The maximum permissible trailer load for trail-
Reduce the load on shorter roof carriers pro- ers without a separate braking system is
portionately. The maximum load per pair of roof 1653 lbs (750 kg).
carrier supports is 110 lbs (50 kg). You can obtain advice from a qualified specialist
Loading directions and other information con- workshop. Also observe the information on tow-
cerning load distribution and load securing can ing a trailer in the "Driving and parking" section
be found in the "Transporting" section (Y page 154).
(Y page 213).
Maximum permissible weights and loads

! On vehicles with a permissible gross vehicle weight of 11030 lbs (5003 kg), the permissible
gross combination weight is less than the total of the permissible gross vehicle weight and the
permissible trailer load. Exceeding the permissible gross combination weight can lead to damage
to the drivetrain, to the transmission or to the trailer tow hitch.
Technical data
If the vehicle or the trailer is fully laden, the relevant value for the permissible gross vehicle weight
or the permissible trailer load is therefore lower. In this case, the trailer or the vehicle may only
be partially loaded.
Please make sure to comply with local trailer load regulations.
The permissible weights and loads which cannot be exceeded can also be found:
Rin your vehicle documents and
Ron the identification plates of the trailer tow hitch, trailer and vehicle (Y page 276)
You will find the basic values approved by the manufacturer in the following table. If the values differ,
the lowest value applies.
Make sure that you adhere to the weight restrictions by having the weight checked on a calibrated
weighbridge.
Vehicle data 289
Vehicle Permissi- Gross Gross rear Maximum Trailer load, Maximum

type ble gross front axle axle load permissi- braked13 permissi-
weight load GAWR ble gross ble nose
GVWR GAWR (RA) weight of weight
(FA) vehicle/ TWR
trailer com-
bination12
GCWR
2500 8550 lbs 3970 lbs 5360 lbs 13550 lbs 5000 lbs 500 lbs
(3878 kg) (1801 kg) (2431 kg) (6146 kg) (2268 kg) (227 kg)
3500 9900 lbs 4080 lbs 7060 lbs 14900 lbs 5000 lbs 500 lbs
(4490 kg) (1851 kg) (3202 kg) (6759 kg)14 (2268 kg)14 (227 kg)14
Canada only
4410 lbs 15250 lbs 7500 lbs 750 lbs
(2000 kg) (6917 kg)15 (3402 kg)15 (340 kg)15
9990 lbs 4080 lbs 7060 lbs 14990 lbs 5000 lbs 500 lbs
(4531 kg) (1851 kg) (3202 kg) (6799 kg)14 (2268 kg)14 (227 kg)14
USA only
4410 lbs 15250 lbs 7500 lbs 750 lbs
(2000 kg) (6917 kg)15 (3402 kg)15 (340 kg)15
3500 XD 10141 lbs 4080 lbs 7060 lbs 14990 lbs 5000 lbs 500 lbs
(4600 kg) (1851 kg) (3202 kg) (6799 kg)14 (2268 kg)14 (227 kg)14
4410 lbs 15250 lbs 7500 lbs 750 lbs
(2000 kg) (6917 kg)15 (3402 kg)15 (340 kg)15
11030 lbs 4080 lbs 7720 lbs 15250 lbs 5000 lbs 500 lbs
(5003 kg) (1851 kg) (3502 kg) (6917 kg) (2268 kg)14 (227 kg)14
Technical data
4410 lbs 7500 lbs 750 lbs
(2000 kg) (3402 kg)15 (340 kg)15
4500 12125 lbs 4630 lbs 7937 lbs 12125 lbs — —
(5500 kg) (2100 kg) (3600 kg) (5500 kg)
12 Maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle and trailer.

13 Maximum permissible gross weight of the trailer, if the trailer is equipped with a separate functional braking
system.
14 Only for extra-long vehicles with an overall length of 289.1 in (7344 mm).
15 Not for extra-long vehicles with an overall length of 289.1 in (7344 mm).
Z
290
291
292

2018 Sprinter Operators Manual

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

2018 Sprinter Operators Manual

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Sprinter

Order no. 64627567 13 Part no. 906 584 32 13 Edition 07-17

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

Index ....................................................... 4 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 74

At a glance ........................................... 33 Climate control .................................... 99

Transporting loads ............................ 213

Maintenance and care ...................... 219

Breakdown assistance ..................... 241

Wheels and tires ............................... 248

1, 2, 3 ... Setting the center air vents ........... 106

Selector lever ................................ 123 Battery

Display message ............................ 183 Car

Change of address .............................. 24 Child

Setting the air distribution ............. 103 Cornering lamps

Switching on/off (vehicles with- Safety systems .............................. 181

Driving systems Function ........................................... 68

High-beam headlamps Motion detectors ............................. 88

License plate lamp Load securing aids

Message memory (on-board com- Off-road driving

Operator's Manual Passenger compartment heating

Windshield wiper .............................. 96 Refueling

Removing/mounting ...................... 274 Stowage space under the rear

Theft deterrent systems Tires

Sidewall (definition) ....................... 266 Trailer loads ................................... 288

Two-way radios VIN ...................................................... 276

Wheels Setting a limit speed ...................... 133

Operating Instructions Service and vehicle operation

Maintenance Operating the vehicle outside of the

Proper use Do not store or transport any substances in

Operating conditions: Operating safety and vehicle approval

Reporting malfunctions relevant to Attachments, bodies, equipment and

Further information can be obtained at any Notes on the radiator

of use. The manufacturer has no influence over

Instrument cluster on vehicles without steering wheel buttons

Instrument cluster in vehicles with steering-wheel buttons

? Fuel gauge with fuel filler flap D Service button Ë

Indicator and warning lamps

Instrument cluster in vehicles with steering-wheel buttons

Function Page Function Page

cleaning system 203 m Fuel filter dirty 203

å DEF supply low or contami- # The charging process is mal-

i Corresponding messages may also be

Steering wheel buttons Center console

1 Only on vehicles without rear-compartment climate control.

Function Page Overhead control panel

Door control panel Further control panels

= Opens/closes the left-hand y Switches the auxiliary heat-

? Opens/closes the right-hand ± Switches the heater booster

Control panel between the steering

Important safety notes

Rthe seat belt is not twisted

not touch your neck or be routed under your

Fastening and adjusting seat belts

board, for example. Your feet may otherwise G WARNING

G WARNING When deployed, the window curtain air bag

Deployment of Emergency Tensioning

Activating the special seat belt retractor:

and who are secured using the safety belt 2 seats

This helps reduce the risk of injury even further.

Important safety notes

Child restraint system on the front-

Rearward-facing child restraint system

ufacturer's installation and operating instruc- G WARNING

Child-proof locks for rear doors (Y page 54).